E-Class Sedan Operator's Manual

E-Class Sedan Operator’s Manual
E 320
E 320 4MATIC
E 500
E 500 4MATIC
E 55 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you 앫 Please read this manual carefully, then
on the purchase of your new return it to your vehicle where it will be
Mercedes-Benz. handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon- 앫 Please follow the recommendations
stration of your trust in our company contained in this manual. They are de-
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your signed to assist you with the operation
desire to own an automobile that will be as of your Mercedes-Benz.
easy as possible to operate and provide
앫 Please pay attention to the warnings
years of service.
and cautions contained in this manual.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- They are designed to help improve the
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure, cupants.
as well as your and your passengers' safe-
We extend our best wishes for many miles
ty, we ask you to make a small investment
of safe, pleasurable driving.
of time:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 19 Getting started ................................... 29

Product information................................ 9 Cockpit................................................. 20 Unlocking ............................................. 30
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10 Instrument cluster ................................ 22 Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... 30
Service and warranty information .. 10 Multifunction steering wheel ................ 24 Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*......... 32
Important notice for California Center console ..................................... 25 Adjusting .............................................. 34
retail buyers and lessees of Upper part ...................................... 25 Seats .............................................. 34
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11 Lower part ...................................... 26 Steering wheel................................ 36
Maintenance .................................. 12 Overhead control panel ........................ 27 Mirrors............................................ 37
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12 Door control panel................................ 28 Driving.................................................. 40
Change of address or ownership.... 12 Fastening the seat belts ................. 40
Operating your vehicle outside Starting the engine ......................... 43
the USA or Canada......................... 13 Switching on headlamps................. 46
Where to find it.................................... 14 Turn signals and high beam ............ 47
Symbols............................................... 15 Windshield wipers........................... 47
Operating safety .................................. 16 Problems while driving.................... 49
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16 Parking and locking.............................. 51
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17 Parking brake ................................. 51
Reporting safety defects...................... 18 Switching off headlamps................. 52
Reporting safety defects ................ 18 Turning off engine........................... 52
Contents
Memory function ............................... 121

Safety and Security ........................... 55 Controls in detail ............................... 93 Storing positions in memory ........ 122
Occupant safety................................... 56 Locking and unlocking ......................... 94 Recalling positions from memory. 122
Air bags ......................................... 57 SmartKey ....................................... 94 Storing exterior rear view mirror
Seat belts ....................................... 63 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ........ 97 parking position ........................... 123
Children in the vehicle.................... 66 Opening the doors from the inside 103 Lighting ............................................. 124
Blocking of rear door window Opening the trunk ........................ 103 Exterior lamp switch .................... 124
operation........................................ 78 Closing the trunk.......................... 105 Combination switch ..................... 127
Panic alarm .......................................... 79 Trunk lid opening/closing system* ..... Hazard warning flasher ................ 128
Activating ....................................... 79 105 Interior lighting ............................ 128
Deactivating ................................... 79 Trunk lid emergency release ........ 110 Door entry lamps ......................... 130
Driving safety systems......................... 80 Automatic central locking ............ 111 Trunk lamp................................... 130
ABS ................................................ 80 Locking and unlocking from Instrument cluster ............................. 131
BAS ................................................ 82 the inside ..................................... 111 Instrument cluster illumination .... 131
ESP................................................. 82 Seats ................................................. 113 Coolant temperature gauge ......... 132
The SBC brake system ................... 85 Easy-entry/exit feature* ............. 113 Trip odometer .............................. 132
Four wheel electronic traction Removing and installing front Tachometer.................................. 133
system (4MATIC) with the ESP ....... 88 seat head restraints ..................... 114 Outside temperature indicator..... 133
Anti-theft systems................................ 89 Rear seat head restraints ............. 115
Immobilizer..................................... 89 Multicontour seat*....................... 116
Anti-theft alarm system.................. 89 Drive-Dynamic seat* ................... 117
Tow-away alarm ............................. 90 Seat heating*............................... 118
Seat ventilation* .......................... 119
Contents
Control system .................................. 134 Good visibility ..................................... 172 Air recirculation mode .................. 194
Multifunction display.................... 134 Rear view mirror ........................... 172 Charcoal filter ............................... 196
Multifunction steering wheel........ 135 Windshield wipers......................... 173 Deactivating the climate control
Menus .......................................... 137 Headlamp cleaning system* ......... 174 system .......................................... 197
Standard display menu ................ 139 Sun visors ..................................... 174 Air conditioning ............................ 198
AUDIO menu ................................ 139 Rear window sunshade* ............... 176 Residual heat and ventilation........ 198
NAV* menu.................................. 141 Roller sunblind* in the rear doors. 176 Rear air conditioning..................... 199
Distronic* menu........................... 141 Rear window defroster.................. 177 Power windows .................................. 201
Malfunction memory menu .......... 142 Climate control................................... 178 Opening and closing the windows 201
Settings menu.............................. 143 Setting the temperature................ 182 Synchronizing power windows...... 204
Trip computer menu..................... 158 Adjusting air distribution............... 182 Sliding/pop-up roof* ......................... 205
TEL menu* ................................... 159 Adjusting air volume ..................... 183 Opening and closing the
Automatic transmission..................... 162 Defrosting ..................................... 183 sliding/pop-up roof...................... 205
One-touch gearshifting................. 163 Air recirculation mode .................. 184 Synchronizing the
Gear ranges ................................. 164 Deactivating the climate control sliding/pop-up roof...................... 208
Gear selector lever position ......... 165 system .......................................... 185 Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*......... 209
Steering wheel gearshift control Air conditioning............................. 186 Opening and closing the roller
(Speedshift) E 55 AMG................. 166 Residual heat and ventilation* ...... 186 sunblinds ...................................... 209
Program mode selector switch..... 168 Automatic climate control* ................ 188 Opening and closing the
Accelerator position..................... 168 Setting the temperature................ 192 panorama sliding/pop-up roof ..... 210
Manual shift program E 55 AMG .. 169 Adjusting air distribution............... 193 Synchronizing the panorama
Emergency operation Adjusting air volume ..................... 194 sliding/pop-up roof...................... 213
(Limp Home Mode) ...................... 171 Maximum cooling MAX COOL ....... 194 Solar panel*.................................. 214
Defrosting ..................................... 194
Contents
Driving systems ................................. 215 At the gas station .............................. 280

Cruise control............................... 215 Operation ......................................... 267 Refueling...................................... 280
Distronic*..................................... 218 The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ......... 268 Check regularly and before
Airmatic DC (Dual Control)* ......... 230 Driving instructions............................ 269 a long trip..................................... 281
Parktronic system* Drive sensibly – save fuel............. 269 Engine compartment ......................... 283
(Parking assist)............................. 233 Drinking and driving ..................... 269 Hood ............................................ 283
Loading .............................................. 237 Pedals .......................................... 269 Engine oil ..................................... 284
Roof rack*.................................... 237 Power assistance ......................... 270 Transmission fluid level................ 287
Ski sack*...................................... 237 Brakes.......................................... 270 Coolant level ................................ 287
Split rear bench seat* .................. 240 Driving off .................................... 272 Battery ......................................... 288
Expanding the cargo area*........... 242 Parking......................................... 272 Windshield washer system and
Loading instructions..................... 243 Tires ............................................. 272 headlamp cleaning system*......... 289
Cargo tie-down rings* .................. 244 Hydroplaning................................ 273 Tires and wheels................................ 291
Useful features .................................. 245 Tire traction.................................. 274 Important guidelines .................... 291
Storage compartments................. 245 Tire speed rating .......................... 274 Life of tire .................................... 292
Ashtrays ....................................... 249 Winter driving instructions ........... 275 Direction of rotation..................... 292
Cigarette lighter ........................... 250 Standing water............................. 276 Checking tire inflation pressure ... 292
12-V socket*................................ 251 Passenger compartment .............. 277 Rotating wheels ........................... 295
Heated steering wheel* ............... 251 Driving abroad.............................. 277 Winter driving .................................... 297
Telephone*................................... 252 Control and operation of radio Winter tires .................................. 297
Tele Aid* ...................................... 253 transmitter ................................... 277 Block heater* (Canada only) ........ 298
Garage door opener ..................... 261 Catalytic converter....................... 278 Snow chains................................. 298
Emission control .......................... 278
Coolant temperature.................... 279
Contents
Maintenance...................................... 299 Replacing bulbs.................................. 365

Flexible Service System PLUS Practical hints .................................. 311 Bulbs............................................. 365
(FSS PLUS)................................... 299 What to do if … ................................... 312 Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 367
Clearing the service indicator ...... 300 Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 312 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 369
Service term exceeded ................ 300 Lamp in center console................. 319 Replacing wiper blades ...................... 370
Calling up the service indicator.... 300 Messages in the display................ 321 Removing wiper blades................. 370
Resetting the service indicator..... 300 Where will I find ...? ............................ 356 Installing wiper blades .................. 371
Setting the date for special works 302 First aid kit.................................... 356 Flat tire............................................... 372
Calling up the service data Spare wheel .................................. 356 Preparing the vehicle .................... 372
information .................................. 303 Luggage box ................................. 357 Mounting the spare wheel ............ 372
Vehicle care....................................... 304 Vehicle tool kit.............................. 358 Batteries............................................. 379
Cleaning and care of vehicle ........ 304 Unlocking/locking in an emergency .. 359 Disconnecting the battery ............ 380
Unlocking the vehicle.................... 359 Removing the battery ................... 381
Locking the vehicle ....................... 360 Charging and reinstalling
Changing batteries in the the battery .................................... 381
SmartKey/ SmartKey with Reconnecting the battery ............. 381
KEYLESS-GO* ............................... 361 Jump starting...................................... 382
Fuel filler flap emergency release . 363 Towing the vehicle.............................. 385
Manually unlocking the Installing towing eye bolt .............. 388
transmission selector lever ........... 363 Fuses.................................................. 389
Opening/closing in an emergency..... 364 Fuse box in passenger
Sliding/pop-up roof* or compartment ................................ 389
panorama sliding/pop-up roof* ... 364
Contents
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. .......... 406

Technical data.................................. 391 Capacities .................................... 406 Technical terms............................... 417
Spare parts service ............................ 392 Engine oils.................................... 409
Warranty coverage............................. 393 Engine oil additives ...................... 409
Loss of Service and Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 409 Index................................................. 423
Information Booklet...................... 393 Brake fluid.................................... 409
Identification labels............................ 394 Premium unleaded gasoline ......... 410
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 395 Fuel requirements ........................ 410
E 320/E 500 ............................... 395 Gasoline additives ........................ 410
E 55 AMG ..................................... 395 Coolants....................................... 411
Engine................................................ 396 Windshield and headlamp
Rims and tires.................................... 398 washer system ............................. 413
Same size tires............................. 399 Consumer information ....................... 414
Mixed size tires ............................ 401 Uniform tire quality grading ......... 414
Spare wheel ................................. 402
Electrical system................................ 403
Main dimensions................................ 404
Weights.............................................. 405
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
best interest: other products and therefore cannot be conversion parts and accessories ap-
held responsible for them, even if in indi- proved by us are available at your autho-
We recommend using genuine
vidual cases an official approval or authori- rized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
zation by governmental or other agencies receive comprehensive information, also
parts and accessories explicitly approved
should exist. Use of such parts and acces- on permissible technical modifications,
by us for your vehicle model.
sories could adversely affect the safety, and where proper installation will be per-
We have tested these parts to determine performance or reliability of your vehicle. formed.
their reliability, safety and special suitabili- Please do not use them.
ty for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
왔 Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information
mation, illustrations and descriptions in about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
this Operator’s Manual might differ from Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
your vehicle. 앫 New Car Limited Warranty
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in 앫 Emission System Warranty
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are 앫 Emission Performance Warranty
ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from Vermont Emission Control System
the actual equipment of your vehicle. Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operator’s Vermont only)
optional equipment not installed in your Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz 앫 State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about Center will be glad to inform you of correct (Lemon Laws)
the operation of any equipment, your au- care and operating procedures.
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be The Operator’s Manual and Service Book-
glad to demonstrate the proper proce- let are important documents and should be
dures. kept with the vehicle.
10
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail (1) the same substantial defect or mal- (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz function results in a condition that is of repair of the same or different sub-
automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily stantial defects or malfunctions for a
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to 30 calender days. Written notification
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have should be sent to us, not a dealer, at
of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au- LLC in writing of the need for its repair, Assistance Center, One Mercedes
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
(2) the same substantial defect or mal-
one or more substantial defects or mal-
function of a less serious nature than
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
category (1) has been subject to repair
its express warranty after a reasonable
four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
its repair, or
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approximately 29000 km)
on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever
occurs first, a reasonable number of repair
attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following oc-
curs:
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership
The Service Booklet describes all the nec- The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance If you change your address, be sure to
essary maintenance work which should be Program provides factory trained technical send in the “Change of Address Notice”
performed at regular intervals. help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to found in the Service and Warranty Informa-
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number tion Booklet, or simply call the
Always have the Service Booklet with you
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
when you take the vehicle to your autho- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Ser-
The service advisor will record each ser-
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz vice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
vice in the booklet for you. Customer Assistance Representatives your own interest that we can contact you
24 hours a day, 365 days a year. should the need arise.
For additional information refer to the If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
gram Brochure in your glove box. able to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty In-
formation Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
12
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail-
or Canada able for delivery in Europe under our Euro-
pean Delivery Program. For details, consult
If you plan to operate your vehicle in for- your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
eign countries, please be aware that: write to:
앫 service facilities or replacement parts In the USA:
may not be readily available,
앫 unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat- European Delivery Department
alytic converters may not be available; One Mercedes Drive
the use of leaded fuels will damage the Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
catalysts,
In Canada:
앫 gasoline may have a considerably low-
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
er octane rating, and improper fuel can
European Delivery Department
cause engine damage.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
13
Introduction
Where to find it
왔 Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information Controls in detail Technical data
for you, the vehicle operator. For easy Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your vehi-
access, each section has its own reference about the equipment installed in your vehicle can be found in this section.
color: cle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes techni-
cal innovations. If you are already familiar Indexes
At a glance
with the basic functions of your vehicle, The glossary provides explanations of the
Here you will find an overview of all the this section will be of particular interest to most important technical terms.
controls that can be operated from the you.
driver’s seat. The table of contents and the index are de-
signed to help you find information quickly
Operation and easily.
Getting started Here you will find all the information you The following publications are part of your
Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi- vehicle documentation:
need for your first drive. You should read cle. 앫 this Operator’s Manual
this section first if this is your first
앫 the Service Booklet
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent-
ing or borrowing this vehicle. Practical hints Separate operating instructions will be
This section provides fast assistance for provided as required depending on the
dealing with problems you may encounter. equipment options installed in your vehi-
Safety and Security cle.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features of your vehicle.
14
Introduction
Symbols
왔 Symbols
The following symbols are found in this 왘 This symbol points to instructions for
Operator’s Manual: Warning! G you to follow.
* Optional equipment is identified 왘 A number of these symbols appearing
Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
with an asterisk. Since standard ards that may endanger your health or life, in succession indicates a multiple-step
equipment varies between models, or the health or life of others. procedure.
the descriptions and illustrations in
컄 Page This symbol tells you where to
this manual may differ slightly from
! look for further information on a
the actual equipment of your vehi-
topic.
cle. Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle. 컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
i
page.
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful. -> In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to in-
dicate cross-references to term
definitions.
DISPLAY Words appearing in the multi-
function display are printed in
the type shown here.
15
Introduction
Operating safety
왔 Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle
Warning! G Warning! G
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
Work improperly carried out on electronic Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody are familiar with the following information
components and associated software could or tires/wheels, for example when running and rules:
cause them to cease functioning. Because over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
앫 the safety precautions in this manual
the vehicle’s electronic components are in- may cause serious damage to and impair the
terconnected, any modifications made may operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a 앫 the “Technical data” section in this
produce an undesired effect on other sys- sudden strong vibration or ride disturbance, manual
tems. Electronic malfunctions could seri- or you suspect that damage to your vehicle 앫 traffic rules and regulations
ously impair the operating safety of your has occurred, you should turn on your haz-
vehicle. ard warning flashers, carefully slow down, 앫 motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
and drive with caution to an area which is a dards
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic safe distance from the road.
components. Inspect the vehicle underbody and Warning! G
Other improper work or modifications on the tires/wheels for possible damage. If the ve-
hicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center vehicle. These warning labels are intended
the operating safety of the vehicle.
or other qualified maintenance or repair fa- to make you and others aware of various
Some safety systems only function while the cility for further inspection or repairs. risks. You should not remove any of these
engine is running. You should therefore nev- warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
er turn off the engine while driving. do so by information on the label itself. Re-
moval of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or per-
sonal injury.
16
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔 Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
왔 Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.”
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from the Hotline.
18
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel
19
At a glance
Cockpit
왔 Cockpit
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Item Page Item Page Item Page

1 Parking brake pedal 45, 51 8 Headlamp washer button* 174 e Starter switch 31
2 Hood lock release 283 9 Cruise control lever f Front Parktronic* warning 233
3 Steering wheel adjustment 37 앫 Cruise control 222 indicator
stalk 앫 Distronic* 218 g Overhead control panel 27
Heated steering wheel* 251 a Instrument cluster 22, h Mobile phone/Glasses box 245
4 Parking brake release 45 131 j Glove box lid release, glove 245
5 Combination switch b Multifunction steering 24, box lock
앫 Turn signals 47 wheel 135 k Glove box 245
앫 Windshield wipers 47 c Horn l Center console 25
앫 High beam 47 d Lever for voice control sys-

tem*, see separate
6 Door control panel 28 operating instructions
7 Exterior lamp switch 124
21
At a glance
Instrument cluster
왔 Instrument cluster
22
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item Page Item Page Item Page

1 L Left turn signal indi- 7 Coolant temperature dis- a Clock with: 148
cator lamp play with: ; Brake warning 314
2 v Antilock Brake Sys- 313 • Coolant tempera- 316 lamp, except
tem (ABS)/Electronic ture warning lamp Canada
Stability Program 8 Tachometer with: 3 Brake warning 314
(ESP) warning lamp lamp, Canada only
1 Supplemental 318
3 Speedometer restraint system ? Engine malfunction 315
4 Multifunction display indicator lamp indicator lamp
with: - Antilock Brake Sys- 312 b Fuel display with:
앫 Basic display with out- 146 tem (ABS) malfunc- A Fuel reserve warn- 317
side temperature display tion indicator lamp ing lamp
앫 Status indicator with < Seat belt telltale 317 c Reset button for:
malfunction warning A High beam head- 127 앫 Resetting trip 132
message lamp indicator odometer
앫 Trip odometer 132 9 Main odometer with: 앫 Adjusting instrument 131
5 l Distance warning 317 앫 Selector lever position 43 cluster illumination
lamp1
앫 Program mode 168 앫 Confirming new time 148
6 K Right turn signal indi- settings
cator lamp
1
Vehicles without Distronic*: Warning lamp without
function. It illuminates with the ignition on. It should
go out when the engine is running.
23
At a glance
왔 Multifunction steering wheel
Item Page Item Page
1 Multifunction display in 134 4 Menu systems: Press but-
speedometer ton
Operating control sys- 135 è for next system
tem ÿ for previous system
2 Selecting the submenu or 5 Moving within a menu:
setting the volume Press button
æ up/to increase j for next display
ç down/to decrease k for previous display
3 Telephone*: Press button
s to take a call
to dial a call
t to end a call
to reject an incom-
ing call
24
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part Item Page Item Page
1 Climate control 178 8 Rear window sunshade* 84
Automatic climate control* 188 9 Seat heating*, driver’s side 118
2 COMAND system, see sep- Seat ventilation*, driver’s 119
arate operating instruc- side
tions a Hazard warning flasher 128
3 Seat heating*, front pas- 118 switch
senger side b PASS AIR BAG OFF indica- 73
Seat ventilation*, front 119 tor lamp
passenger side
4 Electronic Stability Pro- 84
gram (ESP) control switch
5 Central locking switch 111
6 Opening/closing button 246
for storage tray or CD
changer*, see separate op-
erating instructions
7 Rear seat head restraints 115
switch, folding down
25
At a glance
Center console
Lower part Item Page Item Page

1 Ashtray 249 6 Vehicle level control 231
2 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop 33 switch*
button 7 Thumbwheel for setting 225
3 Selector lever for automat- 43, distance for Distronic*
ic transmission 165 8 Distance warning func- 226
4 Parking assist (Parktronic 233 tion* on/off switch
system)* deactivation 9 Program mode selector for 168
switch automatic transmission
5 Adaptive damping system 230
(ADS)* switch
26
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item Page Item Page
1 Rear interior lighting 129 7 Tele Aid (emergency call 253
on/off system) button
2 Automatic interior lighting 128 8 Rear view mirror 172
3 Front interior lighting 128 9 Reading lamps 128
on/off a Garage door opener 261
4 Temperature sensor b Tow-away alarm button 90
5 Right reading lamp on/off 128 c Ambient lighting 152
6 Sliding/pop-up roof* or 205, d Interior lighting
panorama sliding/pop-up 209
roof* e Left reading lamp on/off 129
27
At a glance
Door control panel
왔 Door control panel
Item Page
1 Door handle 103
2 Seat adjustment 35
3 Memory function (for stor- 121
ing seat, exterior mirror
and steering wheel set-
tings)
4 Exterior rear view mirror 38
adjustment
5 Switches for opening/ 201
closing front and rear side
windows, rear window
override switch
6 Remote trunk lid release 105
switch, Trunk lid open-
ing/closing system*
28
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
29
Getting started
Unlocking
왔 Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey 왘 Press unlock button Œ on the
overview of the vehicle’s most basic func- SmartKey.
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners All turn signal lamps flash once. The
should pay special attention to the infor- locking knobs in the doors move up.
mation given here.
The SBC brake system is activated.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in 왘 Get in the vehicle and insert the
detail” section will provide you with further SmartKey in the starter switch.
information. The corresponding page refer- More information can be found in the
ences are located at the end of each seg- “Controls in detail” section (컄 page 94).
ment.
SmartKey
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for trunk lid
3 Œ Unlock button
4 Â Panic button (컄 page 79)
30
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions !

Warning! G If the SmartKey cannot be turned, the
battery may not be sufficiently
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
charged.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, 왘 Check the battery and charge it
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu- if necessary (컄 page 381).
pervised use of vehicle equipment may 왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 382).
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury. To prevent accelerated battery dis-
charge or a completely discharged bat-
tery, always remove the SmartKey from
Starter switch i the starter switch when the engine is
0 For removing SmartKey The SmartKey can only be removed not in operation.
1 Power supply to some electrical con- from the starter switch with the gear
sumers, such as seat adjustment selector lever in position P.
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
3 Starting position
31
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* i

To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey
Warning! G
If you have the KEYLESS-GO function, your
with KEYLESS-GO must be outside the
vehicle checks whether the SmartKey with When leaving the vehicle, always take the
vehicle, no further than approximately
KEYLESS-GO is valid when you pull the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and
3 feet (1 meter) away from the door.
door handle. If your SmartKey is valid, the lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
doors will unlock, and you can open them. tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
왘 Pull the door handle. unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
The function of the SmartKey overrules the
The turn signal lamps flash once. The cle equipment may cause an accident
KEYLESS-GO function.
locking knobs on the doors move up. and/or serious personal injury.
The SBC brake system is activated.

If the SmartKey is inside the vehicle, press-
ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on
the gear selector lever corresponds to
turning the SmartKey to the various starter
switch positions.
32
Getting started
Unlocking
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be Ignition (or position 2)

located in the vehicle.
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set ton twice.
to P.
This supplies power to all electrical
왘 Do not depress the brake pedal. consumers. All the lights in the instru-
ment cluster come on.
Position 1
i
If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
ton once.
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button start/stop button once, the power sup-
This supplies power to some electrical ply is again switched off.
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO consumers, such as seat adjustment.
start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board
More information can be found in the
electronics have status 0 (as with i “Controls in detail” section (컄 page 97).
SmartKey removed). If you now press the KEYLESS-GO For information on starting the engine us-
start/stop button ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
앫 once again, the ignition (position 2) see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO”
is switched on. (컄 page 44).
앫 twice, the power supply is again
switched off.
33
Getting started
Adjusting
왔 Adjusting
Warning! G Your seat must be adjusted so that you can

correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 40).
Warning! G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and Never place hands under the seat or near According to accident statistics, children
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas- any moving parts while a seat is being ad- are safer when properly restrained in the
tening of seat belts, must be done before justed. rear seating positions than in the front seat-
the vehicle is put into motion. ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats. Re-
Seats Warning! G gardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the properly secured in an appropriate infant or
Warning! G SmartKey from the starter switch, take the toddler restraint, or booster seat recom-
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and mended for the size and weight of the child.
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. lock your vehicle. For additional information, see “Children in
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause Even with the SmartKey removed from the the vehicle” (컄 page 66).
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. starter switch or the SmartKey with KEY- A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat LESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, the significantly increased if the child restraints
backrest in an excessively reclined position power seats can be operated when the re- are not properly secured in the vehicle and
as this can be dangerous. You could slide spective door is open. the child is not properly secured in the child
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide Therefore, do not leave children unattended restraint.
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
domen or neck. That could cause serious or vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
fatal injuries. The seat back and seat belts ment may cause an accident and/or seri-
provide the best restraint when the wearer ous personal injury.
is in a nearly upright position and belts are
properly positioned on the body.
34
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat adjustment Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat cushion tilt
The seat adjustment switches are located 왘 Press the switch forward or backward 왘 Press the switch up or down in the di-
on the front doors. in the direction of arrow 4. rection of arrow 3 until your upper
legs are lightly supported.
Adjust a comfortable seating position
that still allows you to reach the
Backrest tilt
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far to the rear as 왘 Press the switch forward or backward
possible, consistent with ability to in the direction of arrow 5 until your
properly operate controls. arms are slightly angled when holding
the steering wheel.
i
When moving the seat, be sure there Seat height
are no items in the footwell or behind
1 Head restraint height 왘 Press the switch up or down in the di-
the seats. Otherwise you could damage
2 Seat height rection of arrow 2.
the seats.
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat fore and aft adjustment The memory function (컄 page 121) lets
5 Backrest tilt you store the setting for the seat posi-
tion together with the setting for the
왘 Switch on ignition. steering wheel and the exterior rear
or view mirrors.
왘 Open the respective door.
35
Getting started
Adjusting
Head restraint height Head restraint tilt Steering wheel

왘 Press the switch up or down in the di-
rection of arrow 5.
Warning! G
Warning! G Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv-
For your protection, drive only with properly ing could cause the driver to lose control of
positioned head restraints. the vehicle.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of Even with the SmartKey removed from the
the head restraint supports the back of the starter switch or the SmartKey with KEY-
head at eye level. This will reduce the poten- Manually adjust the angle of the head re- LESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, the
tial for injury to the head and neck in the straint. steering wheel adjustment feature can be
event of an accident or similar situation. 왘 Push or pull on the lower edge of the operated when the driver’s door is open.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraint cushion. Therefore, do not leave children unattended
head restraints. Head restraints are intend- in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
More information on seats can be found in
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci- vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
the “Controls in detail” section
dent. ment may cause an accident and/or seri-
(컄 page 113).
ous personal injury.
36
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel adjustment Adjusting steering column in or out Mirrors

The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is 왘 Move stalk forward or back in the direc-
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
located on the steering column (lower left). tion of arrow 1 until a comfortable
mirrors before driving so that you have a
steering wheel position is reached with
good view of the road and traffic condi-
your arms slightly bent at the elbow.
tions.
Adjusting steering column up or down
왘 Move stalk up or down in the direction
Warning! G
of arrow 2.
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte
Make sure your legs can move freely may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
and that all the displays (incl. malfunc- glass breaks.
tion and indicator lamps) on the instru- Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
1 Adjusting steering column, in or out ment cluster are clearly visible. low the liquid to come into contact with
2 Adjusting steering column, up or down eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
i
왘 Switch on ignition. In case it does, immediately flush affected
The memory function (컄 page 121) lets
or area with water, and seek medical help if
you store the setting for the seat posi-
necessary.
왘 Open the driver’s door. tion together with the setting for the
steering wheel and the exterior rear
view mirrors. Interior rear view mirror
왘 Manually adjust the interior rear view
For more information, see “Heated steer- mirror.
ing wheel*”(컄 page 251). More information can be found in the
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 172).
37
Getting started
Adjusting
Exterior rear view mirror The buttons are located on the driver’s 왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on.
door. All the lamps in the instrument cluster
Warning! G come on.
왘 Press button 3 for the left mirror or
Exercise care when using the passenger
button 1 for the right mirror.
side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface 왘 Push adjustment button 2 up, down,
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror left or right according to the setting de-
are closer than they appear. Check your in- sired.
terior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
1 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir-

! ror button
Electrolyte drops coming into contact 2 Adjustment button
with the vehicle paint finish can only be 3 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
completely removed while in their liq- button
uid state and by applying plenty of wa-
ter.
38
Getting started
Adjusting
! i
If an exterior rear view mirror was forc- The memory function (컄 page 121) lets
ibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) you store the setting for the seat posi-
or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from tion together with the setting for the
the front), reposition it by applying firm steering wheel and the exterior rear
pressure until it snaps into place. The view mirrors.
mirror housing is now properly posi-
At low ambient temperatures, the mir-
tioned and you can adjust the mirror
rors will be heated automatically.
normally.
For more information, see “Activating exte-
rior rear view mirror parking position”
(컄 page 173).
39
Getting started
Driving
왔 Driving
Warning! G Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-

sition your seat belt greatly increases your
Warning! G
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s foot- risk of injuries and their likely severity in an According to accident statistics, children
well. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in accident. You and your passengers should are safer when properly restrained in the
the driver’s footwell have sufficient clear- always wear seat belts. rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ance for the pedals. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers can be considerably more severe without that children be placed in the rear seats.
the objects could get caught between the your seat belt properly buckled. Without Regardless of seating position, children
pedals. You could then no longer brake or your seat belt buckled, you are much more 12 years old and under must be seated and
accelerate. likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be properly secured in an appropriate infant or
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured toddler restraint, or booster seat recom-
or killed. mended for the size and weight of the child.
Fastening the seat belts For additional information, see “Children in
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your the vehicle” (컄 page 66).
Warning! G seat belt. The air bags can only provide the A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
protection they were designed to afford if significantly increased if the child restraints
Always fasten your seat belt before driving the occupants are using their seat belts are not properly secured in the vehicle and
off. Always make sure all of your passengers (컄 page 63). the child is not properly secured in the child
are properly restrained, even those sitting in restraint.
the rear and pregnant women.
40
Getting started
Driving
Never let more people ride in the vehicle Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
than there are seat belts available. Be sure backrest in an excessively reclined position
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re- as this can be dangerous. You could slide
strained with a separate seat belt. Never use under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
a seat belt for more than one person at a under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-
time. domen or neck. That could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Warning! G
Read and observe the additional warning no-
tices printed in the “Safety and security”
section (컄 page 63).
1 Retractor
2 Latch plate
3 Buckle
4 Release button
41
Getting started
Driving
왘 Place the shoulder portion of the belt Proper use of seat belts 앫 Check your seat belt periodically dur-
across the top of your shoulder and the ing travel to make sure that it is proper-
앫 Do not twist the belt when fastening.
lap portion across your hips. ly positioned.
앫 Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
왘 Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until 앫 Make sure that the seat belt is always
portion is located as close as possible
it clicks. fitted snugly. Take special care of this
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
when wearing loose clothing.
왘 If necessary, tighten the lap portion to not touch the neck). Never pass the
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion shoulder portion of the belt under your
up. arm. Warning! G
앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible
Belt outlet height adjustment Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
could tear.
across the abdomen.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
앫 Place the seat backrest in a nearly up-
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
right position.
This could damage the belt.
앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one Never attempt to make modifications to
person at a time. seat belts. This could impair the effective-
앫 Do not fasten a seat belt around a per- ness of the belts.
son and another object at the same Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
time. When using a seat belt to secure severely weaken them. In a crash they may
infant or toddler restraints or children not be able to provide adequate protection.
1 Release button
in booster seats, always follow the
왘 Press release button 1 and move the Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
seat belt height adjuster upward or stressed in an accident must be replaced.
downward. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter.
42
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine Automatic transmission Starting with the SmartKey

왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
Warning! G
왘 Do not depress the accelerator.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
to position 3 and hold until the engine
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-
starts (컄 page 31).
sciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas i
(such as a garage) which are not properly You can also use the “touch-start”
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas Gearshift pattern for automatic function. Turn the SmartKey to
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, transmission position 3 and release it again immedi-
have the cause determined and corrected P Park position with gear selector lever ately. The engine then starts automati-
immediately. If you must drive under these lock cally.
conditions, drive only with at least one win- R Reverse gear
dow fully open. N Neutral 왘 Depress the brake pedal.
D Drive position
The selector lever lock is released.
“Controls in detail” section (컄 page 164). For information on turning off the engine
with the SmartKey, see “Turning off en-
gine” (컄 page 52).
43
Getting started
Driving
Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 왘 Make sure the gear selector lever is set Starting difficulties
You can start your vehicle without the to P. If the engine does not start as described,
SmartKey in the starter switch using the 왘 Depress the brake pedal during the carry out the following steps:
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the starting procedure. Do not depress ac-
왘 If you are starting the engine with the
gear selector lever. celerator.
SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be The selector lever lock is released. switch to position 0 and repeat starting
located in the vehicle. procedure.
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button 1 once. 왘 If you are starting the engine with
The engine starts automatically if the KEYLESS-GO: Close any doors that
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the may be open to allow for better detec-
vehicle. tion of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
For information on turning off the engine Or:
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off with Start the engine with the SmartKey as
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 53). radio signals from another source may
be interfering with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
왘 Repeat the starting procedure
(컄 page 43). Remember that extended
starting attempts can drain the battery.
왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 382).
44
Getting started
Driving
If the engine does not start after several Driving

starting attempts, there could be a mal- Warning! G 왘 Depress the brake pedal.
function in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the 왘 Move selector lever to position D or R.
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz i
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
Center. lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- Wait for the gear selection process to
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an complete before setting the vehicle in
Parking brake unlocked vehicle. Children could release the motion.
parking brake, which could result in an acci-
dent and/or serious injury. 왘 Release the brake pedal.
왘 Carefully depress the accelerator
왘 Release the parking brake by pulling on pedal.
handle 2.
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automat-
The warning lamp ; (USA only) or ic central locking system engages and the
3 (Canada only) in the instrument locking knobs drop down.
cluster goes out.
i
1 Parking brake pedal You can open a locked door from the
2 Parking brake release handle inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so. 컄컄
45
Getting started
Driving
컄컄 ! Switching on headlamps
If you hear a warning signal and a mes- Warning! G
sage appears in the multifunction dis-
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le-
play when driving off, you have
ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high-
forgotten to release the parking brake.
er than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
Release the parking brake. on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
After a cold start the automatic transmis- could lose control of the vehicle and hit
sion engages at a higher revolution. This al- someone or something. Only shift into gear
lows the catalytic converter to reach its when the engine is idling normally and when
operating temperature earlier. your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Exterior lamp switch
Warning! G More information on driving can be found 1 Off

2 Low beam headlamps on
in the “Operation” section (컄 page 269).
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift 왘 Turn the switch to B.
in order to obtain braking action. This could
!
Simultaneously depressing the acceler- More information can be found in the
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
ator pedal and applying the brake re- “Controls in detail” section (컄 page 124).
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of loss of control. duces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
46
Getting started
Driving
Turn signals and high beam i Windshield wipers

To signal minor directional changes,
The combination switch is located on the The combination switch is located on the
move combination switch to point of
left of the steering column. left of the steering column.
resistance only and release. The turn
signal flashes three times.
High beam
왘 Push the combination switch forward.
The high beam headlights are switched
on.
The high beam symbol A in the
tachometer comes on.
Combination switch More information can be found in the Combination switch
1 Turn signal, right 1 Single wipe
2 Turn signal, left 2 Switching on windshield wipers
왘 Press the combination switch up 1 or 왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on.
down 2.
All the lights in the instrument cluster
The corresponding turn signal indicator come on.
lamp L or K flashes in the in-
strument cluster.
47
Getting started
Driving
Switching on windshield wipers ! Single wipe

왘 Turn the combination switch to the de- Do not leave windshield wipers in inter- 왘 Press switch briefly in the direction of
sired position depending on the inten- mittent setting when the vehicle is tak- arrow 1.
sity of the rain. en to an automatic car wash or during
The windshield wipers wipe one time
windshield cleaning. Wipers will oper-
0 Windshield wipers off without washer fluid.
ate in the presence of water sprayed on
I Intermittent wiping (interval depen- the windshield, and wipers may be
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
dent on wetness of windshield) damaged as a result.
The switch should not be left in inter- 왘 Push switch in the direction of
II Normal wiper speed
mittent setting as the wipers will wipe arrow 1 past the resistance point.
III Fast wiper speed the windshield once every time the en- The windshield wipers operate with
gine is started. Dust that accumulates washer fluid.
i on the windshield might scratch the
The intermittent wiping interval is de- glass and/or damage the wiper blades Information on filling up the washer reser-
pendent on wetness of windshield. when wiping occurs on a dry wind- voir can be found in the “Operation” sec-
Wiping will not occur with a door open. shield. tion (컄 page 289).
48
Getting started
Driving
! 앫 Remove blockage. Problems while driving

If anything blocks the windshield wip- 앫 Turn the windshield wipers on
ers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off again. The engine runs erratically and misfires
immediately.
If windshield wipers fail to function at 앫 An ignition cable may be damaged.
앫 For safety reasons, all in switch position I, 앫 The engine electronics may not be op-
앫 turn off the engine by turning 앫 set the combination switch to the erating properly.
the SmartKey to position 0 and next highest wiper speed 앫 Unburned gasoline may have entered
withdraw SmartKey from starter
switch 앫 have the windshield wipers the catalytic converter and damaged it.
checked at the nearest authorized 왘 Give very little gas.
or Mercedes-Benz Center
왘 Have the problem repaired by an au-
앫 turn off the engine by pressing
the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
button and open the driver’s soon as possible.
door (with the driver’s door
open, starter switch is in
position 0, same as with
SmartKey removed from starter
switch)
before attempting to remove any
blockage.
49
Getting started
Driving
The coolant temperature is above If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
248°F (120°C) termined:
The coolant is too hot and is no longer 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
cooling the engine. Center.
왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as possible If no damage can be determined on the
and turn off the engine. Allow engine
앫 major assemblies
and coolant to cool.
앫 fuel system
왘 Check the coolant level and add cool-
ant if necessary (컄 page 287). 앫 engine mount:
왘 Start the engine in the usual manner.
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
왘 Do not start the engine under any cir-
cumstances.
왘 Notify local fire and/or police authori-
ties.
50
Getting started
Parking and locking
왔 Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive. Parking brake
You have properly stopped and parked Warning! G
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
Warning! G leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before re-
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
moving the SmartKey from the starter
switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-
the SmartKey is removed. sult of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal. 1 Parking brake
Warning! G 앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal. 2 Release handle
앫 Move the selector lever to position P. 왘 Step firmly on parking brake 1.
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering 앫 Slowly release brake pedal. When the engine is running, the warn-
systems. In this case, it is important to keep 앫 When parked on an incline, turn front ing lamp ; (USA only) or 3
in mind that a considerably higher degree of wheel towards the road curb. (Canada only) in the instrument cluster
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve- 앫 Turn the SmartKey to starter switch will be illuminated.
hicle. position 0 and remove, or press
start-/stop button (vehicles with KEY-
LESS-GO*).
앫 Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* and lock vehicle when
leaving.
51
Getting started
Parking and locking
Switching off headlamps

왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se- (컄 page 46).
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the lector lever not fully engaged in position P is
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- position P alone may not prevent your vehi-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an cle from moving, possibly hitting people or
Turning off engine
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the objects.
parking brake and/or move the gear selec- Always set the parking brake in addition to 왘 Place the gear selector lever in
tor lever from position P, either of which shifting to position P. position P.
could result in an accident and/or serious
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
injury.
towards the road curb.
i
Always set the parking brake in addi-
tion to shifting to position P.
On steep slopes, turn the front wheels
towards the road curb.
52
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off with the SmartKey

(컄 page 31) to position 0 and remove To prevent possible personal injury, always When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
it. keep hands and fingers away from the door SmartKey from the starter switch and lock
The immobilizer is activated. openings when closing the doors. Be espe- your vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
cially careful when small children are tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
i
around. unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
The SmartKey can only be removed
Before closing doors, make sure that there cle may cause an accident and/or serious
from the starter switch with the gear
is no possibility of someone getting caught personal injury.
selector lever in position P.
in a door during closing.
왘 Press the seat belt release button
왘 After exiting the vehicle press the lock “Controls in detail” section (컄 page 94).
(컄 page 41).
button ‹ on the SmartKey
Allow the retractor to completely re- Turning off with KEYLESS-GO*
(컄 page 30).
wind the seat belt by guiding the latch
왘 Place the gear selector lever in P.
plate. All turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs on the doors move 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
i down. ton to shut off the engine.
With the SmartKey removed and the
With the driver's door closed, the start-
driver’s door open, a warning sounds
er switch is now in position 1. With the
and the message Switch off lights
driver’s door opened, the starter switch
appears in the multifunction display if
is set to position 0, same as SmartKey
the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not
removed from starter switch
switched off.
(컄 page 31). 컄컄
53
Getting started
Parking and locking
컄컄 왘 Press the seat belt release button 왘 After exiting the vehicle, press lock
(컄 page 41). Warning! G button 1 on the door handle or on the
trunk lid.
! To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door All turn signal lamps flash three times.
If you hear a warning signal, you have
openings when closing the doors. Be espe- The locking knobs on the doors move
either
cially careful when small children are down.
앫 forgotten to switch off the vehicle’s
around.
exterior lamps before opening the
driver’s door, Before closing doors, make sure that there Warning! G
is no possibility of someone getting caught
or in a door during closing. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
앫 tried to turn off the engine while the SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
gear selector lever is not in P. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
Turn off the lights or place the gear se- attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
lector lever in P. unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
cle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

1 Lock button on the door handle
54
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
55
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
왔 Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most im- Advanced air bag system components with The SRS system conducts a self-test when
portant facts about the restraint system the ignition is switched on and in regular
앫 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
components of the vehicle. intervals while the engine is running. This
(컄 page 73)
facilitates early detection of malfunctions.
앫 Seat belts (컄 page 63)
앫 Front passenger seat with Occupant The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
앫 Child restraints (컄 page 75) Classification System (OCS) cluster lights up when the ignition is
(컄 page 70) switched on and goes out no later than a
앫 Lower anchors and tethers for children
(LATCH) (컄 page 77) As independent systems, their protective few seconds after the engine has been
functions work in conjunction with each started.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with
other. The SRS components are in operational
앫 Air bags (컄 page 57) readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not
i lit when the engine is running.
앫 Air bag control unit (with crash sen-
sors) For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and A malfunction in the system has been
앫 Emergency tensioning device (ETD) for restraint systems for infants and chil- detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
seat belts (컄 page 66) dren, see “Children in the vehicle” 앫 fails to go out after approximately four
(컄 page 66). seconds after the engine was started
앫 does not come on at all
앫 comes on after the engine was started
or while driving
56
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Air bags
Warning! G If it is necessary to modify an advanced air
bag system to accommodate a person with
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp disabilities, contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Warning! G
comes on during driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
Air bags are designed to reduce the poten-
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly (1-800-367-6372) for details.
tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal im-
recommend that you visit an authorized pacts (front air bags), side impacts (side
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have impact air bags and head protection window
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may curtain air bags) or rollovers (head protec-
not be activated when needed in an acci- tion window curtain air bags). However, no
dent, which could result in serious or fatal system available today can totally eliminate
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and injuries and fatalities.
unnecessarily which could also result in
The deployment of the air bags temporarily
injury.
releases a small amount of dust from the air
In addition, improper repair work on the SRS bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious
creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera- to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in
tive or causing unintended air bag deploy- the vehicle. The dust might cause some tem-
ment. Work on the SRS must therefore only porary breathing difficulty for people with
be performed by qualified technicians. Con- asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G 앫 Adjust the driver seat as far as possible

rearward, still permitting proper opera-
앫 Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
tion of vehicle controls. The distance heads in the area of the door where the
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
from the center of the driver’s breast- side impact air bag inflates. This could
air bags inflate, it is very important for the bone to the center of the air bag cover result in serious injuries or death should
driver and front passenger to always be in a on the steering wheel must be at least the air bag be triggered. Always sit near-
properly seated position and to wear their 10 in (25 cm) or more. You should be ly upright, properly use the seat belts
respective seat belts. able to accomplish this by a combina- and use an appropriately sized infant or
For maximum protection in the event of a tion of adjustments to the seat and toddler restraint or booster seat recom-
steering wheel. If you have any prob- mended for the size and weight of the
collision always be in normal seated position
lems, please see your authorized child.
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
Mercedes-Benz Center. Failure to follow these instructions can re-
your seat belt and make sure that it is prop-
앫 Do not lean your head or chest close to sult in severe injuries to you or other occu-
erly positioned on your body.
the steering wheel or dashboard. pants.
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
앫 Keep hands on the outside of steering If you sell your vehicle, it is extremely impor-
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in- tant that you make the buyer aware of this
on steering wheel position will help to keep side the rim can increase the risk and
you at a safe distance from the air bag. Oc- safety information. Be sure to give the buyer
potential severity of hand/arm injury
cupants who are unbelted, out of position or this Operator's Manual.
when driver front air bag inflates.
too close to the air bag can be seriously in-
앫 Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
jured by an air bag as it inflates with great possible rearward from the dashboard
force in the blink of an eye: when the seat is occupied.
앫 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
58
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i
Warning! G (2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use
the seat belts and for children 12 years Air bags are designed to deploy only in
old and under, use an appropriately certain frontal impacts (front air bags),
Accident research shows that the safest
sized infant or toddler restraint or boost- side impacts (side impact and head
place for children in an automobile is in the
er seat recommended for the size and protection window curtain air bags)
rear seat.
weight of the child. which exceed preset thresholds and in
It should be noted that with respect to both certain rollovers (head protection win-
front and rear side impact air bags there is a (3) Always wear seat belts properly.
dow curtain air bags). Only during
possibility for a side impact air bag related If you believe that, even with the use of these events will they provide their
injury if occupants, especially children, are these guidelines, it would be safer for your supplemental protection.
not properly seated or restrained when next rear seat occupants to have the rear mount-
to a side impact air bag which needs to de- ed side impact air bags deactivated, then The driver and passengers should al-
ploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its deactivation can be accomplished upon ways wear their seat belts. Otherwise it
job. your written request to do so at your autho- is not possible for air bags to provide
rized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional their supplemental protection.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines: cost.
(1) Occupants, especially children, should Please contact your local authorized
never place their bodies or lean their Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
heads in the area of the door where the Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
side impact air bag inflates. This could (1-800-367-6372) for details.
result in serious injuries or death should
the side impact air bag be deployed.
59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In case of other types of impacts and Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
앫 No modifications of any kind may be
impacts below air bag deployment emergency tensioning device and air made to any components or wiring of
thresholds, air bags will not be de- bag the SRS. This includes changing or re-
ployed. The driver and passenger will moving any component or part of the
then be protected to the extent possi- Warning! G SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges etc. over the steering
ble by a properly fastened seat belt. A
properly fastened seat belt is also wheel hub, passenger front air bag cov-
앫 Damaged seat belts or belts that were
needed to provide the best possible er, door trim panels, or door frame
highly stressed in an accident must be
trims, and installation of additional elec-
protection in a rollover. replaced and their anchoring points
trical/electronic equipment on or near
must also be checked. Use only belts in-
We caution you not to rely on the pres- SRS components and wiring. Keep area
stalled or supplied by an authorized
ence of the air bags in order to avoid between air bags and occupants free
Mercedes-Benz Center.
wearing your seat belt. from objects (e.g. packages, purses,
앫 Air bags and emergency tensioning de- umbrellas, etc.).
It is important to your safety and that of vices (ETDs) are designed to function on
앫 Do not hang items such as coat hangers
your passengers that you replace de- a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
from the coat hooks or handles over the
ployed air bags and repair any malfunc- that was activated must be replaced.
door. These items may turn into projec-
tioning air bags to make sure that the 앫 Do not pass belts over sharp edges. tiles and cause head and other injuries
vehicle will continue to provide supple- They could tear. when curtain air bag is deployed.
mental crash protection for occupants. 앫 Do not make any modification that could 앫 Never place your feet on the instrument
change the effectiveness of the belts. panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
앫 Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this keep both feet on the floor in front of the
may severely weaken them. In a crash seat.
they may not be able to provide ade- 앫 An air bag system component within the
quate protection. steering wheel gets hot after the air bag
has inflated. Do not touch.
60
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Front air bags

앫 In addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
Warning! G
inoperative or causing unintended air
Only use seat covers which have been test-
bag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified ed and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
technicians. Contact an authorized vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
Mercedes-Benz Center. interfere with or prevent the deployment of
the front side impact air bags. Contact your
앫 For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the air bag authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for avail-
unit or emergency tensioning device, ability.
our safety instructions must be fol-
lowed. These instructions are available When you sell your vehicle we strongly 1 Driver air bag
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz urge you to give notice to the subsequent 2 Passenger air bag
Center.
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
Driver and passenger air bags are de-
앫 Given the considerable deployment alerting them to the applicable section in
speed, required inflation volume, and ployed:
the Operator’s Manual.
the textile structure of the air bags, 앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts
there is the possibility of abrasions or
other more significant injuries resulting 앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment
from air bag deployment. threshold
앫 independently of the side impact air
bags
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i The air bags will not deploy in impacts Side impact air bags, window curtain
The front air bags in this vehicle have which do not exceed the system’s deploy- air bags
been designed to inflate in two stages. ment thresholds. You will then be protect-
This allows the air bag to have different ed by the fastened seat belts.
rates of inflation that are based on the The passenger front air bag will only be
rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as deployed if:
assessed by the air bag control unit.
앫 the system, based on OCS weight sen-
On the front passenger side, the front sor readings, senses that the front pas-
air bag deployment is additionally influ- senger seat is occupied
enced by the passenger’s weight cate-
앫 the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
gory as identified by the Occupant
in the center console is not lit
Classification System (OCS) 1 Side impact air bags
(컄 page 73)
(컄 page 70). 2 Window curtain air bag
앫 the impact exceeds a preset deploy-
The lighter the front passenger side oc- The side impact air bags and window cur-
ment threshold
cupant, the higher the vehicle deceler- tain air bags are deployed:
ation rate required for the second
stage inflation of the air bag. 앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫 in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-
ment threshold
앫 independently of the front air bags
62
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In addition, the window curtain air bags 2 The use of seat belts and infant and child
are deployed: restraint systems is required by law in all Warning! G
50 states, the District of Columbia, the
앫 in certain vehicle rollovers
U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. Always fasten your seat belt before driving
The front passenger side impact air off. Always make sure all of your passengers
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle are properly restrained, even those sitting in
bags 1 will only deploy:
occupants should have their seat belts fas- the rear and pregnant women.
앫 independently of the front air bags tened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
The side impact air bags and window cur- For more information, see “Fastening the sition your seat belt greatly increases your
tain air bags are not deployed in impacts seat belts” (컄 page 40). risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
accident. You and your passengers should
ment threshold. i
always wear seat belts.
For information on infants and children
Seat belts traveling with you in the vehicle and re- If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
straint systems for infants and chil- can be considerably more severe without
When the engine is started, the seat belt dren, see “Children in the vehicle” your seat belt properly buckled. Without
telltale < illuminates to remind you and (컄 page 66). your seat belt buckled, you are much more
your passengers to fasten your seat belts. likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened be-
or killed.
fore the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < illuminates and a warning In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
chime sounds for approximately six sec- death is lessened if you are properly wearing
onds when the engine is started. your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are prop-
erly wearing their seat belts.
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
backrest in an excessively reclined position stressed in an accident must be replaced 앫 Seat belts can only work when used
as this can be dangerous. You could slide and their anchoring points must also be properly. Never wear seat belts in any
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide checked. other way than as described in this sec-
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- Only use seat belts which have been ap- tion, as that could result in serious inju-
domen or neck. That could cause serious or proved by Mercedes-Benz. ries in case of an accident.
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and 앫 Each occupant should wear their seat
seat belt provide the best restraint when the Do not make any modifications to the seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belts. This can lead to unintended activation
reduce the likelihood of and potential
belt is properly positioned on the body. or to failure. severity of injuries in accidents, includ-
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may ing rollovers. The integrated restraint
severely weaken them. In a crash they may system includes SRS (driver air bag, pas-
Warning! G not be able to provide adequate protection. senger front air bag, side impact air
bags, head protection window curtain
Have all work carried out only by qualified air bags for side windows), ETD (seat
Never let more people ride in the vehicle technicians. Contact an authorized belt emergency tensioning device), and
than there are seat belts available. Be sure Mercedes-Benz Center. front seat knee bolsters.
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at
a time.
64
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The system is designed to enhance the 앫 Never wear belts over rigid or breakable 앫 Pregnant women should also use a
protection offered to properly belted oc- objects in or on your clothing, such as lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
cupants in certain frontal (front air bags eyeglasses, pens, SmartKeys etc., as should be positioned as low as possible
and ETD) and side (side impact and win- these might cause injuries. on the hips to avoid any possible pres-
dow curtain air bags and ETD) impacts 앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible sure on the abdomen.
which exceed preset deployment on your hips and not across the abdo- 앫 Never place your feet on the instrument
thresholds and in certain rollovers (win- men. If the belt is positioned across your panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
dow curtain air bags and ETD). abdomen, it could cause serious injuries keep both feet on the floor in front of the
in a crash. seat.
앫 Never wear the shoulder belt under your
앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one 앫 When using a seat belt to secure infant
arm, against your neck or off your shoul-
der. In a frontal crash, your body would person at a time. Do not fasten a seat or toddler restraints or children in boost-
move too far forward. That would in- belt around a person and another per- er seats, always follow the child seat
crease the chance of head and neck in- son or other objects. manufacturer's instructions.
juries. The belt would also apply too 앫 Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
much force to the ribs or abdomen, crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
which could severely injure internal or- of the belt to distribute impact forces.
gans such as your liver or spleen. The twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device (ETD), In an impact, emergency tensioning devic- Children in the vehicle
seat belt force limiter es remove slack from the belts. Belt force
limiters reduce the force exerted by the If an infant or child is traveling with you in
The seat belts for the front and rear outer
seat belts on occupants during a crash. the vehicle:
seats are equipped with emergency ten-
sioning devices and belt force limiters. 앫 Secure the child using an infant or child
The ETD is designed to activate in the fol- Warning! G restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child and recommended for
lowing cases:
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that use by Mercedes-Benz.
앫 in frontal or rear-end impacts exceed- was activated must be replaced. 앫 Make sure that the infant or child is
ing a preset severity level
When disposing of the emergency tension- properly secured all times while the ve-
앫 in certain vehicle rollovers ing device, our safety instructions must be hicle is in motion.
followed. These are available at your autho-
앫 if the restraint systems are operational Infant and child restraint seats and
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
and functioning correctly, see information on choosing an appropriate
1 indicator lamp (컄 page 56) restraint system can be obtained from any
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
An automatic comfort-fit feature for front
The ETDs for the front seats will only
seats reduces the retracting force of the
activate if the front seat belts are fas-
seat belts when they are in normal use.
tened (latch plate properly inserted
into buckle).
The ETDs for the rear outer seats will
activate with or without the respective
seat belts fastened.
66
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Infant and child restraint systems i

We recommend all infants and children be Information on child seats with mount-
Warning! G
properly restrained at all times while the ing fittings for tether anchorages
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion. (컄 page 75).
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s For information on LATCH-type child belt retractor will be deactivated.
seat belt have special seat belt retractors seat mounts (컄 page 77).
for secure fastening of child restraints. !
To fasten a child restraint, follow child ! A statement by the child restraint man-
restraint instructions for mounting. Then The use of infant or child restraints is ufacturer of compliance with this stan-
pull the shoulder belt out completely and required by law in all 50 states, the Dis- dard can be found on the instruction
let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a trict of Columbia, the U.S. territories label on the restraint and in the instruc-
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate and all Canadian provinces. tion manual provided with the restraint.
that the special seat belt retractor is acti- Infants and small children should be When using any infant or child restraint
vated. The belt is now locked. Push down seated in an appropriate infant or child system, be sure to carefully read and
on child restraint to take up any slack. restraint system properly secured by a follow all manufacturer’s instructions
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and lap/shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a for installation and use.
let seat belt retract completely. The seat top tether anchorage point and a child
Please read and observe warning labels
belt can again be used in the usual man- restraint lower anchorage system that
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and
ner. complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehi-
to infant or child restraints.
cle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards 213 and 210.2.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G Children can be killed or seriously injured by

an inflating air bag. Note the following im-
앫 If you must install a rear-facing child re-
straint on the front passenger seat be-
portant information when circumstances re- cause circumstances require you to do
According to accident statistics, children
quire you to place a child in the front so, make sure that the PASS AIR BAG
are safer when properly restrained in the OFF lamp is illuminated, indicating that
rear seating positions than in the front seat- passenger seat:
the front passenger air bag is deactivat-
ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend 앫 Your vehicle is equipped with advanced ed. Should the light not illuminate or go
that children be placed in the rear seats air bag technology designed to turn off out while the restraint is installed,
whenever possible. Regardless of seating the front passenger front air bag in your please check installation. Periodically
position, children 12 years old and under vehicle when the OCS senses the weight check the indicator lamp while driving to
must be seated and properly secured in an of a typical 12-month-old child or less make sure the lamp is illuminated. If the
along with the weight of a standard ap- PASS AIR BAG OFF light goes out or re-
appropriate infant or child restraint recom-
propriate child restraint on the front mains out, do not transport a child on
mended for the size and weight of the child.
passenger seat. the front passenger seat until the sys-
The infant or child restraint must be properly 앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on tem has been repaired. A child in a
secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat the front passenger seat will be serious- rear-facing child restraint on the front
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors ly injured or even killed if the front pas- passenger seat will be seriously injured
and top tether strap, fully in accordance senger front air bag inflates in a collision or even killed if the front passenger front
with the child seat manufacturer's instruc- which could occur under some circum- air bag inflates.
tions. stances, even with advanced air bag
technology. The only means to com-
pletely eliminate this risk is to never
place a child in a rear-facing child re-
straint in the front seat. We therefore
strongly recommend that you always
straint in the back seat.
68
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫 If you have to place a child in a

forward-facing child restraint on the
Warning! G When the child restraint is not in use, re-
move it from the vehicle or secure it with the
front passenger seat, move the seat as seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
Infants and small children should never
far back as possible, use the proper becoming a projectile in the event of an ac-
child restraint recommended for the share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed cident.
age, size and weight of the child, and se-
cure child restraint with the vehicle's between the occupant and seat belt. Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
seat belt according to the child seat A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is hicle, even if the children are secured in a
manufacturer's instructions. For significantly increased if the child restraints child restraint system. Unsupervised chil-
children larger than the typical dren in a child restraint system may use ve-
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
12-month-old child, the front passenger hicle equipment and may cause an accident
the child is not properly secured in the child
air bag may or may not be activated and/or serious personal injury.
(컄 page 71). restraint.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi-
tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul-
der, not face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper belt positioning
for children from 41 lbs until they reach a
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits proper-
ly without a booster.
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant Classification System Furthermore, the occupant weight may ap-

The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
pear to increase or decrease due to Warning! G
objects hanging on the seat, other passen-
automatically turns the front passenger If the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp illu-
gers pushing on the seat, objects lodged
front air bag on or off based on the classi- minates when an adult or someone larger
underneath the seat or stuffed between
fied occupant weight category determined than a small individual is in the front passen-
seat and middle console or between seat
by weight sensor readings from the front ger seat, have the front passenger re-posi-
and door or due to objects applying pres-
passenger seat. tion himself or herself in the seat until the
sure on the back of the seat. Always make
sure that the seat has clearance in all di- light goes out, or check whether objects are
i
rections at all times. caught under or around the seat.
The system does not deactivate the
front passenger side impact air bag, More information about air bag display mes-
i sages (컄 page 350).
the window curtain air bag and the
If your seat, including your trim cover
emergency tensioning device. In the event of a collision, the air bag control
and cushion needs to be serviced in
unit will not allow front passenger front air
any way, take the vehicle to your autho-
Occupants must sit properly belted in a bag deployment when the OCS classified
nearly upright position with their back the front passenger seat occupant as being
against the seat backrest and feet on the Only seat accessories approved by up to or less than the weight of a typical
floor to be correctly classified. If the occu- Mercedes-Benz may be used. 12-month-old child in a standard child re-
pant's weight is transferred to another straint or if the front passenger seat is
object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning on Both driver and the front passenger should sensed as being empty.
armrests), the OCS may not be able to always use the PASS AIR BAG OFF indica-
properly approximate the occupant’s tor lamp as an indication of whether or not
weight category. the front passenger is properly positioned.
70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When the OCS senses that the front passen- When the OCS senses that the front passen- If the PASS AIR BAG OFF lamp is illuminated,
ger seat occupant is classified as being up ger seat occupant is classified as being the front passenger front air bag is deacti-
to or less than the weight of a typical heavier than the weight of a typical vated and will not be deployed.
12-month-old child in a standard child re- 12-month-old child seated in a standard If the PASS AIR BAG OFF lamp is not illumi-
straint, the PASS AIR BAG OFF lamp will illu- child restraint or as being a small individual nated, the front passenger front air bag is
minate when the engine is started and (such as a young teenager or a small adult), activated and will be deployed:
remain illuminated, indicating that the front the PASS AIR BAG OFF lamp will illuminate
앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts
passenger front air bag is deactivated. for approximately six seconds when the en-
gine is started and then, depending on occu- 앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment
When the OCS senses that the front passen-
pant weight sensor readings from the seat, threshold
ger seat is classified as being empty, the
PASS AIR BAG OFF lamp will illuminate remain illuminated or go out. With the PASS 앫 independently of the side impact air
when the engine is started and remain illu- AIR BAG OFF lamp illuminated, the front bags.
minated, indicating that the front passenger passenger front air bag is deactivated. With If the front passenger front air bag is de-
front air bag is deactivated. the PASS AIR BAG OFF lamp out, the front ployed, the rate of inflation will be influ-
passenger front air bag is activated. enced by:
When the OCS senses that the front passen- 앫 the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration
ger seat occupant is classified as an adult or as assessed by the air bag control unit
someone larger than a small individual, the
앫 front passenger's weight category as
PASS AIR BAG OFF lamp will illuminate for identified by the Occupant Classification
approximately six seconds when the engine System (OCS).
is started and then go out, indicating that
the front passenger front air bag is activat-
ed.
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G Children can be killed or seriously injured by

an inflating air bag. Note the following im-
앫 If you must install a rear-facing child re-
straint on the front passenger seat be-
portant information when circumstances re- cause circumstances require you to do
According to accident statistics, children
quire you to place a child in the front so, make sure that the PASS AIR BAG
are safer when properly restrained in the OFF lamp is illuminated, indicating that
rear seating positions than in the front seat- passenger seat:
the front passenger air bag is deactivat-
ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend 앫 Your vehicle is equipped with advanced ed. Should the light not illuminate or go
that children be placed in the rear seats air bag technology designed to turn off out while the restraint is installed,
whenever possible. Regardless of seating the front passenger front air bag in your please check installation. Periodically
position, children 12 years old and under vehicle when the system senses the check the indicator lamp while driving to
must be seated and properly secured in an weight of a typical 12-month-old child or make sure the lamp is illuminated. If the
less along with the weight of a standard PASS AIR BAG OFF light goes out or re-
appropriate infant or child restraint recom-
appropriate child restraint on the front mains out, do not transport a child on
mended for the size and weight of the child.
passenger seat. the front passenger seat until the sys-
The infant or child restraint must be properly 앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on tem has been repaired. A child in a
secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat the front passenger seat will be serious- rear-facing child restraint on the front
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors ly injured or even killed if the front pas- passenger seat will be seriously injured
and top tether strap, fully in accordance senger front air bag inflates in a collision or even killed if the front passenger front
with the child seat manufacturer's instruc- which could occur under some circum- air bag inflates.
tions. stances, even with advanced air bag
technology. The only means to com-
pletely eliminate this risk is to never
straint in the front seat. We therefore
strongly recommend that you always
straint in the back seat.
72
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫 If you have to place a child in a i 앫 that the seat was occupied by a

forward-facing child restraint on the Deployment of the driver front air bag small individual (such as a young
front passenger seat, move the seat as does not mean that the front passenger teenager or a small adult) or a child
far back as possible, use the proper front air bag also should have de- weighing more than the weight of a
child restraint recommended for the ployed. typical 12-month-old child in a stan-
age, size and weight of the child, and se- dard child restraint - instances
cure child restraint with the vehicle's The Occupant Classification System where the system may suppress de-
seat belt according to the child seat (컄 page 70) may have determined: ployment of the passenger front air
manufacturer's instructions. For
앫 that the seat was empty or occu- bag even though the impact met
children larger than the typical
pied by the weight up to or less than the criteria and was of sufficient se-
12-month-old child, the front passenger
air bag may or may not be activated that of a typical 12-month-old child verity to deploy the driver front air
(컄 page 71). seated in a standard child restraint bag.
- both instances where the system
suppresses deployment of the pas- The PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
senger front air bag even though located in the center console.
the impact met the criteria and was
of sufficient severity to deploy the
driver front air bag.
1 Indicator lamp
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp 1 Self-test Occupant Classification Sys-
앫 Do not place objects under and/or
will be illuminated, except with the around the front passenger seat. tem
SmartKey removed or in starter switch After turning the SmartKey in the starter
앫 Do not hang anything from or attach any
position 0. switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
items to the seats.
앫 Do not stuff objects such as books be- KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
Warning! G tween the middle console and the front twice, the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator
passenger seat. lamp 1 located in the center console illu-
If the 1 indicator lamp and the minates. If an adult occupant is properly
앫 Do not move the front passenger seat
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp are lit at
backwards against stiff objects. sitting on the front passenger seat and the
the same time, there is a malfunction in the system senses the occupant as being an
앫 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
Occupant Classification System. The front adult, the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator
position with your back against the seat
passenger front air bag will be deactivated lamp will illuminate and go out after ap-
backrest.
in this case. proximately six seconds.
앫 Do not lean on the armrests or lift your-
In order to ensure proper operation of the self from the seat by using the handle If the seat is not occupied and the system
airbag system and OCS: over the door as this may cause the OCS senses the front passenger seat as being
앫 Have the system checked as soon as to be unable to correctly approximate empty, the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator
possible by qualified technicians. Con- the occupant weight category. lamp will illuminate and not go out.
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- 앫 Only have the seat repaired or replaced
ter. by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
앫 Do not place more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) ter.
into the ruffled storage bag on the back 앫 Read and observe all warnings in this
of the front passenger seat. Otherwise, chapter.
the OCS may not be able to properly ap-
proximate the occupant weight catego-
ry.
74
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Installation of infant and child restraint 왘 Head restraint must be installed (if re-
Warning! G systems movable) and positioned such that the
This vehicle is equipped with tether an- top tether strap can pass freely be-
If the indicator lamp should not illuminate, tween the head restraint and the top of
the system is not functioning. You must see chorages for a top tether strap at each of
the rear seating positions. the seat back.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before
seating any child on the front passenger Make sure the tether strap is not twist-
seat. Not foldable rear seat backrest ed.

“Practical hints” section (컄 page 350).
Warning! G
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the Occupant Classifi-
cation System. The bottom of the child seat 1 Cover 2 Hook
must make full contact with the passenger 3 Anchorage ring
왘 Remove cover 1 from anchorage ring.
seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child
왘 Securely fasten the hook 2 to the an-
seat could cause injuries to the child in case 왘 Guide tether strap between head re-
chorage ring 3.
of an accident, instead of increasing protec- straint and top of the seat back.
tion for the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i
For safety, make sure the hook 2 has
attached to the ring 3 beyond the
safety catch, as illustrated.
Once the top tether anchorage hook is at-

tached, the child restraint itself can be se-
cured. Tighten the top tether strap
according to the child restraint manufac-
turer's instructions.
2 Hook 2 Hook
Foldable rear seat backrest* 3 Anchorage ring 3 Anchorage ring
왘 Securely fasten the hook 2 to the an- Once the top tether anchorage hook is
왘 Fold rear seat backrest slightly for-
ward. chorage ring 3. attached, the child restraint itself can be
secured. Tighten the top tether strap ac-
왘 Remove cover from anchorage ring. i cording to the child restraint manufactur-
왘 Guide tether strap between head re- For safety, make sure the hook 2 has er's instructions.
straint and top of the seat back. attached to the ring 3 beyond the
왘 Swing rear seat backrest to the rear un-
safety catch, as illustrated below.
왘 Head restraint must be positioned such til it engages.
that the top tether strap can pass freely 왘 Check the rear seat backrest to be
between the head restraint and the top locked in its upright position
of the seat back. (컄 page 328).
Make sure the tether strap is not twist-
ed.
76
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Child seat anchors - LATCH type !

This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH Make sure the seat belt for the center
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) seat can operate freely with a child
type anchors (at each of the outer rear seat installed.
seats) for the installation of a “LATCH”
child seat with the matching mounting fit- i
tings. Non-LATCH type child seats may also
The anchors are located behind an uphol- be used and can be installed using the
stery blend. vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child
seat according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
1 Indicates the position of the anchors

2 Anchors
왘 Install child seat according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Blocking of rear door window operation

Children too big for a toddler restraint must Activate the override switch when children
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi- are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul- The children may otherwise injure them-
der, not face or neck. A booster seat may be selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-
necessary to achieve proper belt positioning dow opening.
for children from 41 lbs until they reach a When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits proper- SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
ly without a booster. the vehicle. Do not leave children unattend-
Install child seat according to manufactur- ed in the vehicle, or with access to an un-
1 Override switch
er’s instructions. locked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
2 Indicator lamp
The child seat must be firmly attached in the equipment can cause an accident and/or
왘 Press override switch 1. serious personal injury.
right and left side anchors 2.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come Indicator lamp 2 comes on. The rear
loose during an accident which could result door windows can no longer be operat- For more information on power windows,
in serious injury or death to your child. ed using the switches located in the see the “Controls in detail” section
rear doors. (컄 page 201).
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mounting fittings must be re- !
placed. Operation of the rear door windows
Do not leave children unattended in the ve- with the switches located on the door
hicle, even if the children are secured in a control panel of the driver’s door is still
child restraint system. possible.
78
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
왔 Panic alarm
An audible alarm and flashing exterior Activating i
lamps will operate for approximately For operation in the USA only: This de-
2½ minutes. 왘 Press and hold button 1 for at least
vice complies with Part 15 of the
one second.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
Deactivating
(1) This device may not cause harmful
왘 Press button 1 again. interference, and
or (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
왘 Insert SmartKey in starter switch.
ence that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
1 Â button
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
79
Safety and Security
왔 Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on i ABS
the following driving safety systems: In winter operation, the maximum ef-
앫 ABS (Antilock Brake System) fectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, the
ESP, SBC and 4MATIC is only achieved Warning! G
앫 BAS (Brake Assist System)
with winter tires (M+S tires), or snow
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
앫 ESP (Electronic Stability Program) chains as required.
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
앫 SBC (Sensotronic Brake Control) ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
앫 4MATIC (Four Wheel Electronic Warning! G the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
Traction System)
The following factors increase the risk of ac-
cidents: The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do
앫 Excessive speed, especially in turns
not lock during braking. This allows you to
앫 Wet and slippery road surfaces maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
앫 Following another vehicle too closely
The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
The ABS, BAS, ESP, SBC and 4MATIC cannot proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
reduce this risk. of road surface conditions.
Always adjust your driving style to the pre- On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will re-
vailing road and weather conditions. spond even with light brake pressure.
80
Safety and Security
The - malfunction warning lamp in the Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
instrument cluster comes on when you yields the advantages provided by the ABS, Warning! G
switch on ignition. It goes out when the en- namely braking power and the ability to
gine is running. steer the vehicle. The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
The ABS/ESP warning lamp v flashes it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
Braking whenever the ABS is activated which can yond that afforded by the condition of the
If the ABS activates during braking, the be an indication of hazardous road condi- vehicle brakes and tires or the traction af-
ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the instru- tions and functions as a reminder to take forded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents,
ment cluster dial flashes. Because of the extra care while driving. including those resulting from excessive
SBC brake system, you will not feel any speed in turns, following another vehicle too
pulsation in the brake pedal. Emergency brake maneuver closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, atten-
왘 Keep firm and steady pressure on the 왘 Keep continuous full pressure on the tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
brake pedal. brake pedal. dents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeop-
ardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.

81
Safety and Security
BAS ESP
Warning! G
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
emergency situations. If you apply the The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of monitors the vehicle's traction (force of
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can adhesive friction between the tires and the
provides full brake boost, thereby poten- it increase braking efficiency beyond that road surface) and handling.
tially reducing the braking distance. Apply afforded by the condition of the vehicle
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spin-
continuous full braking pressure until the brakes and tires or the traction. The BAS
ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By ap-
emergency braking situation is over. The cannot prevent accidents, including those
plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
ABS will prevent the wheels from locking. resulting from excessive speed in turns, fol-
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to
lowing another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
When you release the brake pedal, the stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
brakes function again as normal. The BAS useful while driving off and on wet or slip-
driver can prevent accidents. The capabili-
is then deactivated. pery road surfaces.
ties of a BAS equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the
manner which could jeopardize the user’s instrument cluster flashes when the ESP is
safety or the safety of others. engaged.
The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.
82
Safety and Security
!
Warning! G Warning! G Vehicles without 4MATIC:
Because of the ESP’s automatic opera-
Never switch off the ESP when you see the The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
tion, the engine and ignition must be
ABS/ESP warning lamp v flashing in the physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
instrument cluster. In this case proceed as it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO
follows: cannot prevent accidents, including those
start/stop button* in position 0 or 1)
앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
when:
as possible. hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca- 앫 the parking brake is being tested on
앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera-
pabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must a brake test dynamometer
tor.
never be exploited in a reckless or danger- 앫 the vehicle is being towed with the
앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to ous manner which could jeopardize the us-
the prevailing road conditions. front axle raised
er’s safety or the safety of others.
Failure to observe these guidelines could Active braking action through the ESP
cause the vehicle to skid. may otherwise seriously damage the
! brake system.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
The ESP will only function properly if
from excessive speed. For information on vehicles with
you use wheels of the recommended
4MATIC, see “Four wheel electronic
tire size (컄 page 398).
traction system (4MATIC) with the
ESP” (컄 page 88).

83
Safety and Security
Switching off the ESP i If one or more drive wheels are spinning,
DISTRONIC* cannot be activated when the ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the in-
Warning! G the ESP has been deactivated. strument cluster flashes, regardless of the
speed.
The ESP should not be switched off during The switch is located on the center con- Traction control brakes a spinning wheel
normal driving other than in the circum- sole. even when the ESP is deactivated.
stances described below. Disabling of the
The ESP always operates when you are
system will reduce vehicle stability in driving
braking, even when it has been deactivat-
maneuvers.
ed.
To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off !

the ESP in driving situations where it would Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
be advantageous to have drive wheels spin extended period with the ESP switched
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip off. This may cause serious damage to
such as: the drivetrain which is not covered by
앫 starting out on slippery surfaces and in the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
1 ESP off/on switch
deep snow in conjunction with snow
chains 왘 Press ESP switch 1 until the
ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the in-
앫 in sand or gravel
strument cluster comes on.
! The ESP is deactivated.
Turn on the ESP immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not
apply anymore.
84
Safety and Security
The SBC brake system

The SBC brake system combines a hydrau-
When the ABS/ESP warning lamp v is lic brake circuit with electronically con- The SBC brake system requires electrical
illuminated continuously, the ESP is trolled brake servo assistance. You have power to operate.
switched off. increased braking safety and improved A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- braking comfort. or electrical system may impair brake sys-
ing road conditions and to the non-operating tem operation and switch it into its emer-
status of the ESP. Warning! G gency operation mode. In such a case, the
red brake warning lamp (컄 page 314) and
Switching on the ESP Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated warning messages in the instrument cluster
in the speedometer display, for example by (컄 page 321) come on while driving. To
왘 Press ESP button 1. the ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) brake, the driver must then apply signifi-
The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in warning lamp. Refer to the “Practical hints” cantly greater brake pedal pressure and de-
the instrument cluster goes out. section (컄 page 314). Also read and ob- press the pedal much further to obtain the
serve the messages in the instrument clus- expected braking effect. If necessary, apply
You are now again in normal driving
ter display (컄 page 321). full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may
mode.
only be applied to the front wheels. Stop-
! ping distance is increased! 컄컄
Turn on the ESP immediately if the

aforementioned circumstances do not
apply anymore.
85
Safety and Security
컄컄 The SBC brake system is automatically ac- i

If there is a malfunction in the SBC brake
tivated when you: If the SBC brake system is activated as
system, we recommend that the vehicle be
transported with all wheels off the ground 앫 unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey the brake pedal is first depressed, you
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly or the KEYLESS-GO* may feel a reduced pedal resistance
equipment. A tow bar must be used if cir- and longer pedal travel than normal.
앫 open the driver’s or passenger door
cumstances do not permit the use of the When releasing the pedal, you may also
recommended towing methods and the ve- 앫 turn the SmartKey in the starter switch feel the brake pedal pulsate and you
hicle requires towing with all four wheels on to position 1 may hear a sound which is caused by
the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four 앫 in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, press the activation of the SBC brake system-
wheels on the ground is only permissible for the start/stop button on gear selector pump. This is normal and not an indica-
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a lever once tion of a malfunction. Pedal travel
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For returns to normal when you release the
앫 depress the brake pedal brake pedal and the sound soon ceas-
more information, refer to “Towing the vehi-
cle” (컄 page 385). 앫 release the parking brake es.
If you experience the above while driv-
ing and the red brake warning lamp
(컄 page 314) illuminates and/or warn-
ing messages appear in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 321), the brake system
is malfunctioning. Follow the instruc-
tions of the warning message(s) and
have the brake system checked imme-
diately.
86
Safety and Security
The SBC brake servo assistance switches

Warning! G off automatically Warning! G
앫 approximately two minutes after you
Have brake pad replacement and other work Be very careful not to endanger other road
on the SBC brake system carried out by turned the SmartKey in the starter users when you apply the brakes.
qualified technicians only. Contact an switch to position 0 or removed the
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa- SmartKey
앫 After driving on wet or snow-covered
tion. The SBC brake system must be deacti- 앫 approximately two minutes after you roads, you should apply your brakes
vated prior to working on the system. High pressed the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop firmly before parking your vehicle. This
pressure is intermittently built up in the sys- button to turn off the engine or power produces heat which serves to dry the
tem as part of its automatic self-test. In ad- supply and opened the driver’s door brake disks and help prevent corro-
dition, the system is automatically activated (with driver’s door open, the starter sion.
when the vehicle is unlocked by SmartKey, switch is set to position 0, same as
when the driver or passenger door is 앫 On long and steep grades, shift to a
SmartKey removed from starter
opened, when the starter switch is turned to switch) lower gear (gear range 1, 2, or 3) to
position 1, when the brake pedal is de- prevent the brakes from overheating
앫 approximately 20 seconds after you and to reduce brake wear.
pressed or when the parking brake is re-
locked the vehicle from outside
leased. Failure to deactivate the system 앫 After hard braking, it is advisable to
prior to maintenance will cause brake pis- drive on for some time so that the air
Note on driving with the SBC
tons to extend and brake fluid to leak, which stream will cool down the brakes fast-
may result in injuries (contusions and acid 앫 Following extended periods of only mi- er.
burns). Extended brake pistons may also nor loads to your brake system, you
should occasionally apply the brakes 앫 Only Mercedes-Benz approved compo-
cause injury.
when traveling at high speeds. This im- nents (e.g. brake pads) should be in-
proves the grip of the brake pads. stalled on your vehicle. Brake pads not
approved by Mercedes-Benz may im-
pair the safety of your vehicle.
87
Safety and Security
Four wheel electronic traction system ! !

(4MATIC) with the ESP Do not tow with one axle raised. Because of the ESP’s automatic opera-
tion, the engine and ignition must be
Models with all-wheel-drive only. Otherwise the transfer case can be
shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
damaged, which is not covered by the
The 4MATIC improves vehicle’s ability to position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
use available traction, e.g. during winter start/stop button* in position 0 or 1)
operation in mountains under snowy when the parking brake is being tested
conditions, by applying power to all four ! on a brake test dynamometer.
wheels. Performance testing must only be con-
Active braking action through ESP may
ducted on a two-axle dynamometer.
otherwise seriously damage the front
Warning! G Otherwise the transfer case can be or rear axle brake system.
damaged, which is not covered by the
Operational tests with the engine
If you see the ESP warning lamp v flash- Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
running can only be conducted on a
ing in the speedometer, proceed as follows:
two-axle dynamometer.
앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible
앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera-
tor
앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.
88
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왔 Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer i i
In case the engine cannot be started If the alarm stays on for more than
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), 20 seconds, an emergency call is initi-
persons from starting your vehicle.
the system is not operational. Contact ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys-
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center tem* (컄 page 253) provided Tele Aid
Activating
or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the service was subscribed to and properly
앫 With the SmartKey: Removing the USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). activated, and that necessary cellular
SmartKey from the starter switch acti- service and GPS coverage are avail-
vates the immobilizer. Anti-theft alarm system able.
앫 With KEYLESS-GO*: Turning off the en-
gine by means of the KEYLESS-GO Once the alarm system has been armed, a Arming the alarm system
start/stop button on the gear selector visual and audible alarm is triggered when
The alarm system is armed within approxi-
lever activates the immobilizer. someone opens
mately ten seconds after locking the vehi-
앫 a door cle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*.
Deactivating The turn signal lamps flash three times to
앫 the trunk
앫 With the SmartKey: Inserting the indicate that the alarm system is activated.
앫 the hood. The indicator lamp in the central locking
SmartKey in the starter switch deacti-
vates the immobilizer. The alarm will stay on, even if the activat- switch (컄 page 25) begins to flash after
ing element (a door, for example) is imme- arming the alarm system.
앫 With KEYLESS-GO*: Starting the en-
diately closed.
gine by means of the start/stop button
on the gear selector lever deactivates The alarm system will also be triggered
the immobilizer. when
앫 someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
89
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
i 왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the i

If the turn signal lamps do not flash SmartKey. The tow-away protection alarm is trig-
three times, one of the following ele- The alarm is canceled. gered, for example, if the vehicle is lift-
ments may not be properly closed: ed on one side.
앫 a door With KEYLESS-GO* If the alarm stays on for more than
왘 Grasp the outside door handle. 20 seconds, an emergency call is initi-
앫 the trunk lid
ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys-
Close the respective element and lock or
tem* (컄 page 253), provided that the
the vehicle again. 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop Tele Aid service was subscribed to and
button. properly activated, and that necessary
Disarming the alarm system The alarm is canceled. cellular service and GPS coverage are
available.
The alarm system is disarmed when you
unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey or Tow-away alarm
KEYLESS-GO*. The turn signal lamps flash Arming the tow-away alarm
once to indicate that the alarm system is Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away
deactivated. and audible alarm will be triggered when alarm is automatically armed after about
someone attempts to raise the vehicle. 30 seconds.
Canceling the alarm
When you unlock your vehicle, the
With the SmartKey tow-away protection disarms automatical-
ly.
왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
or
90
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Disarming the tow-away alarm 왘 Switch off the ignition and remove the Canceling tow-away alarm
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm SmartKey. To cancel the alarm:
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm be- i
fore towing the vehicle, or when parking on With the SmartKey
You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
a surface subject to movement, such as a
when the ignition is switched on. 왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
ferry or auto train.
switch.
The button is located on the overhead con- 왘 Press button 1. or
trol panel.
The indicator lamp in the button comes 왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
on briefly. SmartKey.
왘 Exit and lock your vehicle with the
SmartKey or (vehicles with KEY- With KEYLESS-GO*
LESS-GO*) the lock button at each 왘 Grasp the outside door handle.
door handle.
or
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed un-
til you lock your vehicle again.
ton.
1 Tow-away alarm off button
91
92
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Climate control
Automatic climate control*
Power windows
Sliding/pop-up roof*
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
93
Controls in detail
왔 Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will SmartKey
find detailed information on how to oper-
ate the equipment installed on your vehi- Your vehicle comes supplied with two
cle. If you are already familiar with the SmartKeys, each with remote control and
basic functions of your vehicle, this section a removable mechanical key. The locking
will be of particular interest to you. tabs for the mechanical key portion of the
two SmartKeys are a different color to help
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
distinguish each key unit.
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual. The SmartKey provides an extended oper-
The corresponding page numbers are giv- ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
SmartKey with remote control
en at the beginning of each segment. advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it. 1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button for the trunk lid
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks
3 Mechanical key locking tab
앫 the doors 4 Œ Unlock button
앫 the trunk 5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 79)
앫 the fuel filler flap
94
Controls in detail
Factory setting Selective setting

Warning! G If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
Global unlocking to reprogram the SmartKey so that
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the 왘 Press button Œ. pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and door and the fuel filler flap.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- locking knobs in the doors move up. 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an simultaneously for about five seconds
The vehicle will lock again automatically
unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children until battery check lamp 5 flashes
within approximately 40 seconds of un-
to open a looked door from the inside, which twice.
locking if:
could result in an accident or serious injury.
The SmartKey will then function as fol-
앫 neither door nor trunk is opened
lows:
! 앫 the SmartKey is not inserted in the
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid starter switch
flap
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of 앫 the central locking switch is not acti-
electromagnetic radiation. vated 왘 Press button Œ once.
Global unlocking
i Global locking
왘 Press button Œ twice.
You can also open and close the power 왘 Press button ‹.
Global locking
windows (컄 page 201) and
All turn signal lamps flash three times.
sliding/pop-up roof* (컄 page 205) or 왘 Press button ‹.
The locking knobs in the doors move
panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
down.
(컄 page 212) using the SmartKey.
95
Controls in detail
Restoring to factory setting 앫 Use the mechanical key to lock the i

왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ doors (컄 page 359). If the vehicle was previously centrally
simultaneously for about six seconds If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, con- locked, the trunk lid will lock automati-
until battery check lamp 5 flashes tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz cally when closed (컄 page 105). The
twice. Center. turn signals will flash three times to
confirm locking.
!
Unlocking and opening the trunk lid
If you can no longer lock or unlock the The trunk can also be opened from its in-
vehicle with the SmartKey, then the You can unlock and open the trunk sepa-
side in an emergency, see “Trunk lid emer-
batteries in the SmartKey are dis- rately.
gency release” (컄 page 110).
charged, the SmartKey is malfunction- A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
ing or the vehicle battery is drained. (1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
앫 Check the batteries in the 왘 Press button Š until trunk unlocks
SmartKey (컄 page 97) and replace and begins to open.
them if necessary (컄 page 361).
!
앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock
the doors (컄 page 359). The trunk lid swings open upwards au-
tomatically. Always make sure there is
앫 Have the vehicle batteries and their sufficient overhead clearance.
connections checked.
Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing
system*: to stop the opening proce-
dure, press button Š. The trunk lid
stops moving.
96
Controls in detail
Checking the batteries Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
왘 Press button ‹ or Œ. If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
Specially equipped vehicles come with two
you should do the following:
Battery check lamp 5 comes on brief- SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each with
ly to indicate that the SmartKey batter- 왘 Have the SmartKey deactivated by an remote control and a removable mechani-
ies are in order. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. cal key. The locking tabs for the mechani-
왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey or the cal key portion of the two SmartKeys are a
! different color to help distinguish each
mechanical key immediately to your
If battery check lamp 5 does not SmartKey unit.
car insurance company.
come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey batteries are discharged. 왘 If necessary, have the mechanical lock The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
replaced. into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
Replace the batteries (컄 page 361). validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is checked every time you grasp a door
You can obtain the required batteries
will be glad to supply you with a replace- handle.
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
ment.
Center. If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid,
your vehicle unlocks
i 앫 the doors
If the batteries are checked within sig-
앫 the trunk lid
nal range of the vehicle, pressing the
button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock 앫 the fuel filler flap
the vehicle accordingly.
97
Controls in detail
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO

Warning! G 앫 You can also use the SmartKey with
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the (컄 page 94).
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and 앫 You can combine KEYLESS-GO func-
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- tions with normal SmartKey functions
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an (e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- locking with the remote control).
cle equipment may cause serious personal
앫 Always carry the SmartKey with
SmartKey injury.
KEYLESS-GO with you.
1 ‹ Lock button 앫 Never store the SmartKey with
2 Š Unlock button for the trunk lid ! KEYLESS-GO together with:
3 Mechanical key locking tab To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
4 Œ Unlock button exposing the SmartKey with 앫 Electronic items such as a cellular
5 Battery check lamp KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electro- phone or another SmartKey with
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 79) magnetic radiation. KEYLESS-GO
For more information on using the 앫 Metallic objects such as coins or

SmartKey buttons, see “SmartKey” i metal foil
(컄 page 94). You can also open and close the power Doing so could impair the function of
windows (컄 page 201) and the KEYLESS-GO system.
sliding/pop-up roof* (컄 page 205) or
panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
(컄 page 212) using the SmartKey.
98
Controls in detail
앫 To lock or unlock the vehicle, the 앫 This does not apply if, after starting, the 앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is re-
SmartKey must be located outside the selector lever is still in position P and moved from the vehicle while the igni-
vehicle within approximately 3 ft (1 m) then the SmartKey is inserted in the tion is switched on (e.g. if passenger
of a door or the trunk. starter switch. The SmartKey will then exits the vehicle with the SmartKey),
have priority over the KEYLESS-GO the message Key not recognized! will
앫 In order to start the engine with the
function and the vehicle’s electrical appear in the multifunction display.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
system will operate according to the
Find the SmartKey or change its
앫 The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO position of the SmartKey in the starter
present location immediately (e.g.
must be located in the vehicle. switch, even stopping the engine.
place it on the front passenger seat or
앫 All the doors must be closed. 앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is insert it in shirt pocket).
앫 The brake pedal must be firmly de- positioned farther away from the vehi-
앫 Remember that the engine can be
pressed. Do not depress the accel- cle and can no longer be recognized by
started by anyone with a SmartKey
erator. the system, the vehicle cannot be
with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the
locked or the engine started via the
앫 If you have started the engine with the vehicle. If you leave the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO system.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and
can only turn it off again with this but- locking the vehicle, the message Key
ton, even if you have put the SmartKey recognized in vehicle! will appear in
in the starter switch in the meantime. the multifunction display.
99
Controls in detail
Factory setting 앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
the doors (컄 page 359). simultaneously for about five seconds
Global unlocking until battery check lamp 5 flashes
앫 Have the vehicle batteries and their twice.
왘 Grasp the door handle. connections checked.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
The vehicle will lock again automatically 앫 Use the mechanical key to lock the then function as follows:
within approximately 40 seconds if neither doors (컄 page 359).
door nor trunk is opened. Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, con-
flap
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Global locking
Center. 왘 Press button Œ once.
왘 Press lock button at door handle Global unlocking
(컄 page 54) or trunk lid (컄 page 102). Selective setting
왘 Press button Œ twice.
! If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey with KEY- Global locking
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the SmartKey, then the LESS-GO so when you grasp the driver’s 왘 Press button ‹.
batteries in the SmartKey are dis- door handle only the driver’s door and the
charged, the SmartKey is malfunction- fuel filler flap unlocks. Restoring to factory setting
ing or the vehicle battery is drained. 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
앫 Check the batteries in the simultaneously for about six seconds
SmartKey (컄 page 97) and replace until battery check lamp 5 flashes
them if necessary (컄 page 361). twice.
100
Controls in detail
! Unlocking and opening the trunk lid !

If you can no longer lock or unlock the A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft The trunk lid swings open upwards au-
vehicle with the SmartKey with KEY- (1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid. tomatically. Always make sure there is
LESS-GO, then the batteries in the sufficient overhead clearance.
The handle is located in the rear license
SmartKey are discharged, the
plate recess. Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is mal-
system*: to stop the opening proce-
functioning or the vehicle battery is
dure, press button Š on the
drained.
SmartKey. The trunk lid stops moving.
앫 Check the batteries in the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO i
(컄 page 97) and replace them if
If the vehicle was previously centrally
necessary (컄 page 361).
locked, the trunk lid will lock automati-
앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock cally when closed. The turn signals will
the doors (컄 page 359). flash three times to confirm locking.
앫 Have the vehicle battery checked You can unlock and open the trunk lid sep-
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz The trunk can also be opened from the in-
arately.
Center. side in an emergency, see “Trunk lid emer-
왘 Pull on the handle gency release” (컄 page 110).
앫 Use the mechanical key to lock the
doors (컄 page 359). or
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is 왘 Press and hold button Š until the
malfunctioning, contact an authorized trunk lid unlocks and opens.
101
Controls in detail
Locking the vehicle Checking the batteries Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
왘 Press button ‹ or Œ. If you lose your SmartKey with KEY-
LESS-GO, you should do the following:
Battery check lamp 5 comes on brief-
ly to indicate that the SmartKey batter- 왘 Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
ies are in order. deactivated by an authorized
!
왘 Report the loss immediately to your car
If battery check lamp 5 does not
insurance company.
come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey batteries are discharged. 왘 Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
1 Lock button at trunk Replace the batteries (컄 page 361).
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
왘 Press the lock button 1. You can obtain the required batteries
will be glad to supply you with a replace-
or at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
ment.
Center.
왘 Press the lock button at the outside
door handle (컄 page 54).
i
or If the batteries are checked within sig-
왘 Vehicles with trunk lid opening/closing nal range of the vehicle, pressing the
system*, press the KEYLESS-GO button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock
locking/closing switch in the trunk the vehicle accordingly.
(컄 page 109).
The vehicle locks. The turn signals flash
three times to confirm locking.
102
Controls in detail
Opening the doors from the inside i Opening the trunk

If the vehicle has previously been
You can open a locked door from the in-
locked from the outside with the Opening the trunk from the outside
side. Open door only when conditions are
SmartKey, opening a door from the in-
safe to do so. A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
side will trigger the anti-theft alarm sys-
(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
tem.
The handle is located above the rear li-
To cancel the alarm, do one of the fol-
cense plate recess.
lowing:
With the SmartKey
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
앫 Press the Œ or ‹ button on
the SmartKey.
1 Locking knob With KEYLESS-GO*
2 Inside door handle
앫 Grasp the outside door handle.
왘 Pull on door handle 2.
앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop 왘 Pull on the handle.
If door was locked, locking knob 1 will button.
move up. The trunk opens.
103
Controls in detail
! Opening the trunk from the inside 왘 Pull remote trunk lid release switch 1
The trunk lid swings open upwards au- You can open the trunk from the inside if until the trunk begins to open.
tomatically. Always make sure there is the vehicle is stationary. The trunk lid opens. The indicator lamp
sufficient overhead clearance. in the switch comes on and remains lit
A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
until the trunk is closed.
i
The switch is located on the driver’s door. !
The vehicle is locked centrally
The trunk lid swings open upwards au-
(컄 page 94).
tomatically. Always make sure there is
If the vehicle was previously centrally sufficient overhead clearance.
cally when closed (컄 page 97). The
i
turn signals will flash three times to
If the vehicle was previously centrally
confirm locking.
cally when closed (컄 page 105). The
The trunk can also be opened using the turn signals will flash three times to
SmartKey (컄 page 96) or from its inside in confirm locking.
an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency 1 Remote trunk lid release switch with in-
release” (컄 page 110). dicator lamp
The trunk can also be opened using the
SmartKey (컄 page 96) or from its inside in
an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency
release” (컄 page 110).
104
Controls in detail
Closing the trunk Trunk lid opening/closing system*

Warning! G
You can open the trunk from the inside if
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among the vehicle is stationary.
other dangers such as visibility blockage,
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle Opening from the inside
interior.
A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
i The switch for opening and closing the
Do not place the SmartKey in the open trunk is located on the driver’s door.
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
1 Handle Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘 Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on To prevent a possible inadvertent lock-
handle 1. out, the trunk lid will open automatical-
ly if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
왘 Close trunk lid with hands placed flat recognized inside the vehicle or in the
on it. trunk.
Warning! G
To prevent possible personal injury, always 1 Remote trunk lid switch with indicator
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk lamp
opening when closing the trunk. Be espe-
cially careful when small children are
around.
105
Controls in detail
왘 Pull remote trunk lid switch 1 until the The trunk can also be opened using the Closing from the inside
trunk begins to open. SmartKey (컄 page 96) or from its inside in
왘 Press the remote trunk lid switch
The trunk lid opens automatically. The an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency (컄 page 105) until the indicator lamp in
indicator lamp in the switch comes on release” (컄 page 110).
the switch goes out and the trunk lid is
and remains lit until the trunk is closed. closed.
Limiting opening height of trunk lid*
! To interrupt the closing procedure:
The trunk lid opening height can be limited
The trunk lid swings open upwards au- when transporting goods on a roof rack 왘 Release the remote trunk lid switch.
tomatically. Always make sure there is (e.g. presence of an optional MB sport lug-
sufficient overhead clearance. To stop
the opening procedure, press or pull
gage container). When activated, the trunk Warning! G
lid opens to approximately the height of
the remote trunk lid switch. the roof edge. Maintain sight of trunk area while operating
You can activate the limiting opening the door mounted switch. Monitor the clos-
i height of trunk lid using the control system ing procedure carefully to make sure that no
If the vehicle was previously centrally (컄 page 155). one is in danger of being injured.
locked, the trunk lid will lock automati- To interrupt the closing procedure, release
cally when closed (컄 page 105). The the door mounted remote trunk lid switch.
turn signals will flash three times to
confirm locking.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly.
106
Controls in detail
Closing the trunk from the outside The closing procedure can be stopped at
(vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*) any time by: Warning! G
앫 pressing the trunk lid closing switch Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
again make sure that no one is in danger of being
앫 pulling the remote control switch on injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
the driver’s door always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
앫 pressing the Š button on the
Be especially careful when small children
SmartKey when the SmartKey is not in
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
the starter switch
press the remote trunk lid switch (on the
i driver’s door), the trunk lid closing
1 Trunk lid closing switch switch 1 or the Š button on the
Do not place the SmartKey in the open
SmartKey.
왘 Press trunk lid closing switch 1 brief- trunk. You may lock yourself out.
ly.
The trunk lid closes. Warning! G SmartKey you, and lock your vehicle. Do not
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has Only drive with the trunk closed as, among with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
been piled too high), the closing procedure other dangers such as visibility blockage, pervised use of vehicle equipment may
is stopped and the trunk lid re-opens exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle cause an accident and/or serious personal
slightly. interior. injury.
107
Controls in detail
Closing the trunk from the outside If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) object while closing (e.g. luggage that has Warning! G
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure that no one is in danger of being
The closing procedure can be stopped at injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
any time by: always keep hands and fingers away from
앫 pressing the trunk lid closing switch the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
again Be especially careful when small children
앫 pulling the remote control switch on
the driver’s door
driver’s door), the trunk lid closing
앫 pressing the Š button on the switch 1 or the Š button on the
1 Trunk lid closing switch
SmartKey when the SmartKey is not in SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
왘 Make sure you have the SmartKey with the starter switch
KEYLESS-GO with you.
왘 Press trunk lid closing switch 1 brief- Warning! G SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and
ly. lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
The trunk lid closes. Only drive with the trunk closed as, among attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
other dangers such as visibility blockage, unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
i exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle cle equipment may cause an accident
To prevent a possible inadvertent lock- interior. and/or serious personal injury.
out, the trunk lid will open automatical-
recognized inside the vehicle or in the
trunk.
108
Controls in detail
Closing the trunk and locking the vehi- If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
cle from the outside (vehicles with KEY- object while closing (e.g. luggage that has Warning! G
LESS-GO*) been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the trunk re-opens slightly. Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure that no one is in danger of being
The closing procedure can be stopped at injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
any time by: always keep hands and fingers away from
앫 pressing the trunk lid closing switch the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
again Be especially careful when small children
앫 pulling the remote control switch on
the driver’s door
driver’s door), the trunk lid closing
앫 pressing the Š button on the switch 1, the Š button on the SmartKey
SmartKey when the SmartKey is not in with KEYLESS-GO or the remote trunk lid
1 KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch
the starter switch opening switch (located on the driver’s
You can close the trunk lid and lock the ve- door).
hicle simultaneously. i
왘 Make sure you have the SmartKey with To prevent a possible inadvertent lock-
KEYLESS-GO with you. out, the trunk lid will open automatical-
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
왘 Press switch 1 briefly. lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
recognized inside the vehicle or in the
attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
The vehicle is locked and the trunk lid trunk.
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
closes automatically. The turn signals cle equipment may cause an accident
flash three times to confirm locking. and/or serious personal injury.
109
Controls in detail
왘 Briefly press emergency release i

Warning! G button 1. If the emergency release button is
The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid pressed and the vehicle was centrally
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
opens. locked from the outside using the
other dangers such as visibility blockage,
SmartKey, the exterior lamps will flash
exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
i and the alarm will sound as the trunk
interior.
The emergency release button unlocks lid opens.
and opens the trunk while the vehicle is To cancel the alarm, do one of the fol-
Trunk lid emergency release standing or driving. lowing:
The emergency release button is located The emergency release button does With the SmartKey
on the inside of the trunk lid. not open the trunk lid, if the vehicle
battery is discharged or disconnected. 앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Illumination of the emergency release but- 앫 Press the Œ or ‹ button on
ton: the SmartKey.
앫 The button will flash for 30 minutes af- With KEYLESS-GO*
ter opening the trunk.
앫 Grasp the outside door handle.
앫 The button will flash for 60 minutes af-
앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
ter closing the trunk.
button.
1 Emergency release button
110
Controls in detail
Automatic central locking Information on towing the vehicle can be

found in the “Practical hints” section Warning! G
The doors and the trunk automatically lock (컄 page 385).
when the ignition is switched on and the When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
You can deactivate the automatic locking SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of ap-
mode using the control system with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
proximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
(컄 page 154). children unattended in the vehicle, or with
You can open a locked door from the in-
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
side. Open door only when conditions are Locking and unlocking from the inside vised use of vehicle equipment may cause
safe to do so.
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
i trunk from inside using the central locking
The doors unlock automatically after an switch. This can be useful, for example, if The switch is located in the center console.
accident if the force of the impact ex- you want to lock the vehicle before starting
ceeds a preset threshold. to drive.
The vehicle automatically locks when The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or un-
the ignition is switched on and the locked with the central locking switch.
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more. You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle
앫 is pushed or towed
앫 is on a test stand Central locking switch
1 Locking
2 Unlocking
111
Controls in detail
Locking i
왘 Press upper half 1 of the central lock- You can open a locked door from the
ing switch. inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
If both front doors are closed, the vehi-
cle locks. If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked using the SmartKey, it will not
Unlocking unlock using the central locking switch.
왘 Press lower half 2 of the central lock- If the vehicle was previously locked
ing switch. with the central locking switch
The vehicle unlocks. 앫 while in the selective remote con-
trol mode, only the front door
opened from the inside is unlocked.
앫 while in the global remote control
mode, the vehicle is unlocked com-
pletely when a front door is opened
from the inside.
112
Controls in detail
Seats
왔 Seats
Information on seat adjustment can be You can activate the following functions:
found in the “Getting started” section Warning! G 앫 Steering column:
(컄 page 35).
Make sure that no one can become trapped Only the steering column is adjusted.
Easy-entry/exit feature* or injured by the moving steering wheel and
앫 Steering column and seat:
driver’s seat when the easy-entry / exit fea-
With the easy-entry/exit feature activat- ture is activated, the driver’s door is being The steering column and the seat are
ed, the steering wheel tilts upwards and opened and the engine is turned off or the adjusted.
the driver’s seat moves to the rear. SmartKey removed from the starter switch. The easy-entry/exit feature can be
This allows easier entry into and exit from Do not leave children unattended in the ve- switched on or off in the convenience sub-
the vehicle when the driver’s door is hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. menu of the control system (컄 page 155).
opened. However, the engine must be Children could open the driver’s door and
turned off. unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit i
feature*, which could result in an accident To cancel seat/steering wheel move-
When the SmartKey is inserted in the start- and/or serious personal injury. ment, do one of the following:
er switch or you have pressed the
KEYLESS-Go* start/stop button and the 앫 Press seat adjustment switch
driver’s door is closed, the steering wheel (컄 page 28).
and the driver’s seat return to their last set 앫 Move steering column stalk
positions. (컄 page 37).
앫 Press the memory switch
(컄 page 28).
113
Controls in detail
Seats
Removing and installing front seat i Installing front head restraints:

head restraints Tilt the backrest to the rear for easier 왘 Press switch 1 upwards and hold for
removal and installation of the head re- about five seconds.
Information on head restraint adjustment
straints.
can be found in the “Getting started” sec- 왘 Push the head restraint down until it
tion (컄 page 36). engages.
Front seat head restraints
왘 Adjust head restraint to desired posi-
Warning! G tion (컄 page 36).
For your protection, drive only with properly

positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the center of
the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-
tial for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat Removing front head restraints
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
왘 Press switch 1 upwards and hold until
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
the head restraint is fully extended.
왘 Pull out head restraint.
114
Controls in detail
Seats
Rear seat head restraints 왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on. Placing head restraints upright
All the lights in the instrument cluster
! come on.
The rear seat head restraints cannot be
왘 Press the symbol-side on rocker
adjusted.
switch 1 to release the head re-
straints.
Folding head restraints back with
switch in the center console The head restraints will fold backward.
The rear seat head restraints can be folded

backward for increased visibility. Warning! G
왘 Pull the head restraint forward until it
For safety reasons, always drive with the
locks into position.
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied. !
Keep the area around head restraints clear Make sure the head restraints engage
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the when placing them upright. Otherwise
folding operation of the head restraints. their protective function cannot be as-
sured.
1 Head restraint release switch
115
Controls in detail
Seats
Removing and installing rear seat head Installing rear seat head restraints
restraints
i
When installing the head restraints,
Warning! G make sure that:
For your protection, drive only with properly 앫 you place the correct head restraint
positioned head restraints. on the middle seat. It is marked
Adjust head restraint so that the head re- with the letter “M” on the outside of
straint supports the back of the head at eye the metal bars.
level. This will reduce the potential for injury 1 Release catch 앫 the head restraints engage fully.
to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
cident or similar situation. Removing rear seat head restraints Multicontour seat*
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat 왘 Fold the backrest forward
head restraints. Head restraints are intend- The multicontour seat has a movable seat
(컄 page 240).
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci- cushion and inflatable air cushions built
dent. 왘 Fold back head restraint (컄 page 115). into the backrest to provide additional lum-
왘 Press head restraint release catch 1 bar and side support.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat. and pull the head restraints out of the The seat cushion movement, backrest
guides. cushion height and curvature can be con-
왘 Fold the backrest back to its original tinuously varied with switches on the right
position. side of the seat after turning the SmartKey
in the starter switch to position 2 or press-
ing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
twice.
116
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat cushion depth Drive-Dynamic seat*

왘 Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
The Drive-Dynamic seat automatically ad-
length of your upper leg using
justs the lateral support provided by the
switch 1.
backrest to your driving style.
Backrest contour
왘 Adjust the contour of the backrest to
the desired position using æ or
ç.
1 Seat cushion depth 왘 Move the backrest support to the bot-
2 Backrest bottom tom by using button 2 or to the center
3 Backrest center by using button 3.
4 Backrest side bolster adjustment
왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on. Backrest side bolsters
1 Backrest center
All lights in the instrument cluster 왘 Adjust the side bolsters so that they 2 Backrest bottom
come on. provide good lateral support using 3 Seat cushion depth
switch 4. 4 Activate drive dynamic function
5 Backrest side bolsters
6 Massage function
The drive-Dynamic seat electronically con-
trols the air pressure in the air chambers of
the backrest side bolsters. This function
improves driving comfort and pleasure.
117
Controls in detail
Seats
Activating i Seat heating*

왘 Press button 4. When the engine is turned off, the last
Both switches for the front seats are locat-
cushion setting is retained in memory.
The indicator lamp in the button comes ed in the center console. The red indicator
The cushion is automatically adjusted
on for five seconds and the following lamps in the switch come on to show
to this setting when the engine is re-
display appears in the multi-function which heating level you have selected.
started.
display for about five seconds.
Level
Massage function (PULSE)
off No indicator lamps on
The massage function can help prevent
1 One indicator lamp on
muscle tension during long drives.
2 Two indicator lamps on
왘 Press button 6.
The seat heater automatically
The indicator lamp in button 2 comes switches to level 1 after approxi-
i on. The air cushions in the lumbar area mately ten minutes.
You can adjust the characteristics of pulsate.
the Drive-Dynamic seat using the con- 3 Three indicator lamps on
trol system (컄 page 157). i The seat heater automatically
The massage function turns off auto- switches to level 2 after approxi-
Deactivating matically after approximately five min- mately five minutes.
utes.
왘 Press button 4 again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes
out.
118
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching seat heating off Seat ventilation*

왘 Press button 1 repeatedly until all in-
The switch is located on the center con-
dicator lamps go out.
sole. Seat ventilation can be activated
i manually with the ignition on, or by the
summer opening feature (컄 page 203).
The seat heating will be automatically
switched off after approximately The blue indicator lamps on the switch
20 minutes. show the ventilation level selected:
! Level
1 Seat heating switch
If one or more of the lamps on the seat 3 Three indicator lamps lit
왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on. heater switch are flashing, there is in- 2 Two indicator lamps lit
All lights in the instrument cluster sufficient voltage available since too
1 One indicator lamp lit
come on. many electrical consumers are turned
on. The seat heater switches off auto- off No indicator lamp lit
Switching seat heating on matically.
왘 Press button 1 repeatedly until the The seat heater will switch back on
desired heating level is set. again automatically as soon as suffi-
cient voltage is available.
One or more red indicator lamps on the
switch show the selected heater level.
119
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching seat ventilation on

왘 Press button 1 repeatedly until the
desired ventilation level is set.
Switching seat ventilation off

왘 Press button 1 repeatedly until all in-
dicator lamps go out.
i
1 Seat ventilation switch The seat ventilation is automatically set
to the highest level if activated via sum-
왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on. mer opening feature (컄 page 203).
All lights in the instrument cluster
come on. !
If one or all of the lamps flash on the
seat ventilation switch, there is insuffi-
cient voltage due to too many electrical
consumers being switched on. The seat
ventilation switches off automatically.
The seat ventilation will switch back on
again automatically as soon as suffi-
cient voltage is available.
120
Controls in detail
Memory function
왔 Memory function
! You can store up to three different settings
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driv- per SmartKey. Warning! G
er should check and adjust the seat The following settings are saved for each Do not activate the memory function while
height, seat position fore and aft, and stored position: driving. Activating the memory function
seat backrest angle if necessary, to
앫 Driver’s seat and backrest position while driving could cause the driver to lose
ensure adequate control, reach and
control of the vehicle.
comfort. The head restraint should also 앫 Steering wheel position
be adjusted for proper height. See also 앫 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
the section on air bags (컄 page 57) for position
more information on proper seat posi-
tioning. 앫 Passenger side exterior rear view mir-
ror position
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, opera- 앫 Front passenger seat position
tion and comfort. Both the interior and These SmartKey-dependent memory set-
outside rear view mirrors should be ad- tings can be deactivated if desired
justed for adequate rear vision. (컄 page 156).
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small
children should be seated in a properly
secured restraint system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.
121
Controls in detail
Memory function
The memory switch is located on the door. Storing positions in memory Recalling positions from memory
왘 Adjust the seats, steering wheel and 왘 On memory button, press and hold
exterior rear view mirrors to the de- stored position button 1, 2 or 3 until
sired position (컄 page 34). the seat, steering wheel and exterior
rear view mirrors have fully moved to
왘 Press memory button M.
the stored positions.
왘 Release memory button and press
stored position button 1, 2 or 3 within i
three seconds. Releasing the button immediately
All the settings are stored at the select- stops movement to the stored posi-
M Memory button ed position. tions.
1, 2, 3 Stored positions
왘 Make sure the ignition is switched on Warning! G
or the respective door is open and the
SmartKey is inserted in the starter Do not operate the power seats using the
switch. memory button if the seat backrest is in an
excessively reclined position. Doing so
could cause damage to front or rear seats.
First move backrest to an upright position.
122
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing exterior rear view mirror park- 왘 Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
ing position with button 2 so that you see the rear
wheel and the road curb.
For easier parking you can adjust the pas-
왘 Press memory button M.
senger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as 왘 Within three seconds, press bottom of
soon as you engage reverse gear R. adjustment button 2.
For information on activating the parking The parking position is stored if the
position, see “Activating exterior rear view mirror does not move.
mirror parking position” (컄 page 173).
1 Passenger side, exterior rear view mir- i
i ror If the mirror does move, repeat the
You can store a parking position for the 2 Adjustment button above steps. After the setting is stored,
passenger side exterior rear view mir- 왘 Stop the vehicle. you can move the mirror again.
ror for each SmartKey using the memo-
왘 Switch on ignition (if not already on).
ry button.
왘 Press button 1.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
123
Controls in detail
Lighting
왔 Lighting
For information on how to switch on the Exterior lamp switch ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
headlamps and use the turn signals, see stop)
the “Getting started” section (컄 page 46). The exterior lamp switch is located on the
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
i stops)
If you drive in countries where vehicles i
drive on the other side of the road than
If you remove the SmartKey and open
the country where the vehicle is regis-
the driver’s door while the parking
tered, you must have the headlamps
lamps or low beam headlamps are
modified for symmetrical low beams.
switched on, then
Relevant information can be obtained
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz 앫 a warning sounds
Center. 앫 $ appears in the multifunction
display
M Off
앫 the message Switch off lights!
U Automatic headlamp mode appears in the multifunction display
C Parking lamps (also side marker
lamps, tail lamps, license plate
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
Canada only:
When engine is running, the low
beam is also switched on.
B Parking lamps plus low beam or
high beam headlamps (combination
switch pushed forward).
124
Controls in detail
Lighting
i Automatic headlamp mode

To minimize risk to you and to others, acti-
With the daytime running lamp mode The parking lamps, low beam headlamps vate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
activated and the engine running, the and license plate lamps switch on and off switch to B when driving or when traffic
low beam headlamps cannot be automatically depending on the brightness and/or ambient lighting conditions require
switched off manually. of the ambient light. you to do so.
To activate the daytime running lamp 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to U. In low ambient lighting conditions, only
mode, see “Setting daytime running switch from position U to B with the
lamp mode (USA only)” (컄 page 151). vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U
Warning! G to B will briefly switch off the head-
Manual headlamp mode lamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
lighting conditions may result in an acci-
The low beam headlamps and parking 앫 the headlamps may switch off unexpect- dent.
lamps can be switched on and off with the edly when the system senses bright am-
exterior lamp switch (컄 page 124). bient light, for example light from The automatic headlamp feature is only an
oncoming traffic. aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicle's lights at all
앫 the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions. times.
i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated, the low beam headlamps will
not be switched off automatically.
125
Controls in detail
Lighting
i Canada only Locator lighting and night security illu-

The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp When you shift from a driving gear to mination
cannot be switched on manually with position N or P, the low beam switches off Locator lighting and night security illumi-
exterior lamp switch in position U. (with a three-minute delay). nation are described in the control system
To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior section under “Setting locator lighting”
For nighttime driving you should turn the
lamp switch to position B and pull (컄 page 152) and “Setting night security il-
exterior lamp switch to position B to
the exterior lamp switch to first or sec- lumination” (컄 page 153).
permit activation of the high beam head-
ond stop (컄 page 126).
lamps.
Switching on fog lamps
Daytime running lamp mode USA only
왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to The high beam headlamps can also be ac- Warning! G
position M or U. tivated when driving with the daytime run-
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
When the engine is running, the low beam ning lamp mode activated and exterior
only switch from position U to B with
headlamps are automatically switched on. lamp switch in position M.
the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from
In low ambient light conditions the parking To activate the daytime running lamp U to B will briefly switch off the head-
lamps will also switch on. mode, see “Setting daytime running lamp lamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
mode” (컄 page 151). lighting conditions may result in an acci-
dent.
i
See notes on the exterior lamp switch
(컄 page 124).
126
Controls in detail
Lighting
i Switching on front fog lamps Combination switch

Fog lamps will operate with the parking 왘 Make sure the low beam headlamps
The combination switch is located on the
lamps and/or the low beam head- are switched on.
left side of the steering column.
lamps on. Fog lamps should only be
왘 Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
used in conjunction with low beam
stop.
headlamps. Consult your State or Prov-
ince Motor Vehicle Regulations regard- The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
ing allowable lamp operation. lamp switch comes on.
Switching on rear fog lamps

i
The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp 왘 Make sure the low beam headlamps
cannot be switched on manually with are switched on.
exterior lamp switch in position U. 왘 Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior stop. 1 High beam
lamp switch to position B and pull 2 High beam flasher
the exterior lamp switch to first or sec- The yellow indicator lamp † in the
ond stop (컄 page 124). lamp switch comes on.
Switching on high beams
왘 Turn exterior lamp switch to
position B (컄 page 124).
왘 Push the combination switch in
direction 1.
The high beam indicator A on the
instrument cluster is illuminated
(컄 page 22).
127
Controls in detail
Lighting
High beam flasher Switching on the hazard warning Interior lighting

flasher
왘 Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction 2. 왘 Press the hazard warning flasher
switch.
Hazard warning flasher
All turn signals will flash.
The hazard warning flasher can be activat- i
ed with the ignition switched on or off. It is
With the hazard warning flasher acti-
activated automatically when an air bag is
vated and the combination switch set
deployed.
for either left or right turn, only the re-
The switch is located on the center con- spective left or right turn signals will
sole. operate when the SmartKey in the
starter switch is in position 1 or 2.
Switching off the hazard warning

flasher 1 Switch for reading lamp, left
왘 Press hazard warning flasher switch 2 Switch for rear compartment lighting
again. 3 Switch for automatic function
4 Switch for interior lighting in front
i 5 Switch for reading lamp, right
If the hazard warning flasher was acti- 6 Ambient lighting
vated automatically, press switch 1 7 Interior lighting
1 Hazard warning flasher switch twice. 8 Reading lamps
128
Controls in detail
Lighting
The controls are located in the overhead Deactivating automatic control Switching left front reading lamp on and
control panel. off
왘 Press the switch 3.
왘 Press button 1.
Activating automatic control The interior lighting remains switched
off, even when you The left reading lamp goes on.
왘 Press the switch 3.
앫 centrally unlock the vehicle 왘 Press button 1 again.
Interior lamps are switched on in dark-
ness, when you 앫 open a door The left reading lamp goes out.
앫 unlock the vehicle 앫 remove the SmartKey from the
Switching right front reading lamp on
starter switch
앫 open a door and off
앫 remove the SmartKey from the Manual control 왘 Press button 5.
starter switch
The right reading lamp goes on.
Switching rear interior lights on and off
The interior lamps are switched off follow-
ing an adjustable time delay (컄 page 154). 왘 Press button 2.
The right reading lamp goes out.
i The lights in the rear passenger com-
partment go on.
If the door remains open, the interior
lamps switch off automatically after ap- 왘 Press button 2 again.
proximately five minutes when the The lights in the rear passenger com-
SmartKey is removed or in starter partment go out.
switch position 0.
An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
129
Controls in detail
Lighting
Door entry lamps
The appropriate door entry lamp switches

on if a door is opened in darkness and if
the interior lighting is switched to the auto-
matic function.
The entry lamp goes out automatically
when the door is closed.
i
If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 or remove the
SmartKey, the door entry lamps will re-
main lit for approximately five minutes.
Trunk lamp
The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk lid

is opened.
If you leave the trunk open for an extended
period of time, the trunk lamp will switch
off automatically after approximately ten
minutes.
130
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
왔 Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument Instrument cluster illumination To brighten illumination
cluster can be found in the “At a glance”
왘 Turn the reset button in the instrument
section of this manual (컄 page 22). Use the reset button (컄 page 22) to adjust
cluster clockwise (컄 page 22).
the illumination brightness for the instru-
The instrument cluster is activated when
ment cluster. The instrument cluster illumination will
you
brighten.
앫 open a door i
The instrument cluster illumination is To dim illumination
앫 turn on the ignition
dimmed or brightened automatically to
왘 Turn the reset button in the instrument
앫 press the reset button (컄 page 22) suit ambient light conditions.
cluster counterclockwise (컄 page 22).
앫 switch on the exterior lamps The instrument cluster illumination will
The instrument cluster illumination will
You can change the instrument cluster set- also be adjusted automatically when
dim.
tings in the instrument cluster submenu of you switch on the vehicle’s exterior
the control system (컄 page 146). lamps.
131
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature gauge i Trip odometer

Excessive coolant temperature trigger
Make sure you are viewing the trip odome-
a warning in the multifunction display
Warning! G (컄 page 316).
ter display (컄 page 134).
왘 If it is not displayed, press the è or
앫 Driving when your engine is overheated
During severe operating conditions, e.g. ÿ repeatedly until the trip odome-
can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tempera- ter appears.
catch fire. You could be seriously ture may rise close to 248°F (120°C). 왘 Press and hold the reset button on the
burned. instrument cluster (컄 page 22) until
The engine should not be operated with
앫 Steam from an overheated engine can the coolant temperature above 248°F the trip odometer is reset.
cause serious burns and can occur just (120°C). Doing so may cause serious en-
by opening the hood. Stay away from gine damage which is not covered by the
the engine if you see or hear steam com-
ing from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
132
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Tachometer Outside temperature indicator The temperature sensor is located in the

front bumper area. Due to its location, the
The red marking on the tachometer de- sensor can be affected by road or engine
notes excessive engine speed. Warning! G heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed
! The outside temperature indicator is not de- temperature can only be verified by com-
Avoid driving at excessive engine signed to serve as an ice-warning device and parison to a thermometer placed next to
speeds, as it may result in serious en- is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. the sensor, not by comparison to external
gine damage that is not covered by the Indicated temperatures just above the freez- displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ing point do not guarantee that the road sur- When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply especially in wooded areas or on bridges. garage), you will notice a delay before the
is interrupted if the engine is operated
lower temperature is displayed.
within the red marking.
The outside temperature is displayed in A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
the instrument cluster (컄 page 22). For in- atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
E 55 AMG
formation on how to select the unit of the perature indications caused by heat
The tachometer of the E 55 AMG does not displayed temperature, i.e. degrees Cel- radiated from the engine during idling or
have a red marking denoting excessive en- sius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F), see slow driving.
gine speed. “Selecting temperature display mode”
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply (컄 page 146).
is interrupted if the engine is operated at
an excessive engine speed.
133
Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as Multifunction display
the SmartKey in the starter switch is Warning! G
turned to position 1 or as soon as the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* is in A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
position 1. The control system enables you conditions must always be his/her primary
to: focus when driving.
앫 call up information about your vehicle For your safety and the safety of others, se-
lecting features through the multifunction
앫 change vehicle settings. steering wheel should only be done by the
For example, you can use the control sys- driver when traffic and road conditions per-
tem to find out when your vehicle is next mit it to be done safely.
due for service, to set the language for Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph 1 Segment ring
messages in the instrument cluster dis- (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is 2 Standard display
play, and much more. covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- 3 Trip odometer
ly 14 m) every second.
i
The displays for the audio systems (ra-
The control system relays information to
dio, CD player) will appear in English,
the multifunction display.
regardless of the language selected.
134
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel Pressing any of the buttons on the multi- The information available in the multifunc-
function steering wheel will alter what is tion display is arranged in menus, each
The displays in the multifunction display shown in the multifunction display. containing a number of functions or sub-
and the settings in the control system menus.
(컄 page 134) are controlled by the buttons 1 Multifunction display in the speed-
The individual functions are then found
on the multifunction steering wheel. ometer
within the relevant menu (radio or CD op-
Operating the control system erations under Audio, for example). These
2 Selecting the submenu or setting functions serve to call up relevant informa-
the volume tion or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
æ up / to increase
ç down / to decrease
3 Telephone*
s to take a call
t to end a call
4 Menu systems
è for next menu
ÿ for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu
j for next display
k for previous display
135
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the In the Settings menu, instead of functions The menus are described on the following
functions within each menu, as being ar- you will find a number of submenus for pages.
ranged in a circular pattern. calling up and changing settings. For in-
structions on using these submenus, see
앫 If you press button è or ÿ re-
the “Settings menu” section (컄 page 144).
peatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other. The number of menus available in the sys-
tem depends on which optional equipment
앫 If you press button k or j re-
is installed in you vehicle.
peatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
136
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus. overview of the individual menus.
137
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 Menu 7 Menu 8

Standard dis- AUDIO NAV* Distronic* Malfunction Settings Trip computer Telephone
play memory
Digital speed- Select radio Activate Call up set- Call up malfunc- Reset to factory Fuel consumption Load phone
ometer station route guid- tings tion messages settings statistics after book
ance start
Call up FSS Operate CD Instrument clus- Fuel consumption Search for
PLUS player ter submenu statistics since name in
Commands/submenus
the last reset phone book

Check tire pres- Time/Date sub- Call up range
sure* menu
Check engine oil Lighting sub-
level menu
Vehicle sub-
menu
Convenience
submenu
Dynamic seat*
submenu
138
Controls in detail
Control system
i Display digital speedometer Select radio station

The headings used in the menus table 왘 Press button j twice. 왘 Turn on the radio. Refer to separate op-
are designed to facilitate navigation erating instructions.
The current vehicle speed is shown in
within the system and are not neces-
the multifunction display. 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
sarily identical to those shown in the
until you see the currently tuned sta-
control system displays.
AUDIO menu tion in the display.
The first function displayed in each
menu will automatically show you The functions in the Audio menu operate
which part of the system you are in. the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.
Standard display menu If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message AUDIO OFF is shown in the
You can select the functions in the stan- display.
dard display menu with button k 1 Waveband setting
or j. The following functions are available: 2 Station frequency
The following functions are available: Function Page 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.
Function Page Select radio station 139
Call up digital speedometer 139 Select satellite radio station* 140
Call up FSS PLUS 299 Operate CD player 140
Check tire pressure* 293

Check engine oil level 285
139
Controls in detail
Control system
i 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly

You can only store new stations using until the desired channel is found. until the settings for the CD currently
the corresponding feature on the radio, being played are shown in the display.
i
see separate operating instructions.
Feature description is based on prelim-
You can also operate the radio in the inary information available at time of
usual manner. printing.
Additional optional satellite radio
Select satellite radio station*
equipment and a subscription to satel-
The satellite radio is treated as a radio ap- lite radio service provider are required 1 Current CD (for CD changer*)
plication. for satellite radio operation. At time of 2 Current track
printing, no date for the availability of
왘 Select SAT radio with the correspond- 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
optional equipment required for satel-
ing softkey in the radio menu. until the desired track is selected.
lite radio operation had been set. Con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz i
Center for details and availability for
To select a CD from the magazine,
your vehicle.
press a number on the COMAND
For more information, refer to separate system SmartKey pad located in the
COMAND operating instructions. center console.
1 SAT mode and preset number
2 Setting for station selection using Operate the CD player
memory 왘 Turn on the radio and select the CD
3 Channel name or number player. Refer to separate operating in-
structions.
140
Controls in detail
Control system
NAV* menu Distronic* menu Distronic deactivated

When Distronic is deactivated, you will see
The Nav menu contains the functions Use the Distronic menu to display the cur-
the standard display in the display.
needed to operate your navigation system. rent settings for your Distronic system.
What information is shown in the display
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
depends on whether the Distronic system
until you see the message Nav in the
is active or inactive.
display.
Please refer to the “Driving systems” sec-
앫 If the navigation system is switched off,
tion of this manual (컄 page 218) for in-
the message Nav Off is shown in the
display. structions on how to activate Distronic.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly 2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
앫 If the navigation system is switched on,
until you see one of the following two 3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle
the message Nav Active is shown in
pictures in the display. ahead
the display.
4 Your vehicle
Please refer to the COMAND manual for in-
5 Symbol for activated distance warning
structions on how to activate the route
function
guidance system.
141
Controls in detail
Control system
Distronic activated Malfunction memory menu 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly

When Distronic is activated, Distronic until you see the malfunction message
Use the malfunction memory menu to scan memory in the display.
and the set speed are seen in the display.
malfunction and warning messages that
may be stored in the system. What infor- No malfunction messages
mation is shown in the display depends on
If no malfunctions have occurred, the mes-
whether malfunctions have actually oc-
sage in the display is:
curred.
No Malfunction
Warning! G Malfunctions have occurred

1 Distronic activated
If malfunctions have occurred, you will see
Malfunction and warning messages are only
the number of malfunctions in the display:
indicated for certain systems and are inten-
tionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a remind-
er with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 321).
142
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button k or j. Settings menu Resetting all settings

The stored messages will now be dis- You can reset all the functions of all sub-
In the Settings menu there are two func-
played in order. See the “Practical menus to the factory settings.
tions:
hints” section for malfunction and
왘 Press the reset button in the instru-
warning messages (컄 page 321). 앫 The function To reset: Press reset
ment cluster (컄 page 22) for approxi-
button for 3 seconds, with which you
Should any malfunctions occur while driv- mately three seconds.
can reset all the settings to the original
ing, the number of malfunctions will reap-
factory settings. In the display you will see the request
pear in the display when the SmartKey in
to press the reset button again to con-
the starter switch is turned to position 0 or 앫 A collection of submenus with which
firm.
removed from the starter switch. you can make individual settings for
your vehicle. 왘 Press the reset button again.
i
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly The functions of all the submenus will
The message memory will be cleared until the Settings menu is seen in the reset to factory settings.
when you turn the SmartKey in the display.
starter switch to position 1 or 2. You i
will then only see high priority malfunc- The settings you have changed will not
tions. These are highlighted by red be reset unless you confirm the action
background (컄 page 321). by pressing the reset button a second
time.
143
Controls in detail
Control system
Submenus in the Settings menu The submenus are arranged by hierarchy. Resetting the functions of a submenu
Scroll down with the ç button, scroll up
왘 Press button k or j. For each submenu you can reset all the
with the æ button. functions to the factory settings.
In the display you see the collection of
Move within the submenus with the k
the submenus. 왘 Move to a function in the submenu.
or j button to the individual functions.
왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 22) in
The settings themselves are made with
the instrument cluster for approximate-
button æ or ç.
ly three seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button again to con-
firm.
왘 Press button ç.
왘 Press the reset button again.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu. All functions of the submenu will reset
to factory settings.
144
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can

be changed within the various menus. De-
tailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pag-
es.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TIME/DATE LIGHTING VEHICLE CONVENIENCE DYNAMIC SEAT*

Select temperature dis- Synchronizing the Set daytime running Set automatic lock- Activate Set level for dynam-
play mode time lamp mode ing easy-entry/exit ic seat, driver
(USA only) feature
Select speedometer dis- Set time (hours) Set locator lighting Limiting opening Set SmartKey-de- Set level for dynam-
play mode height of trunk lid* pendency ic seat, passenger
Select language Set time (minutes) Ambient lighting Set parking position
for exterior rear
view mirror
Select display (speed dis- Set date (month) Exterior lamps de-
play or outside tempera- layed shut-off
ture) for status line
Select display (speed dis- Set date (day) Interior lighting de-
play or outside tempera- layed shut-off
ture) for basic display
Tire pressure unit dis- Set date (year)
play*
145
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu Selecting temperature display mode Selecting speedometer display mode
Access the Instr. cluster submenu via 왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
the Settings menu. Use the Instr. clus- the æ or ç button to the Instr. the æ or ç button to the Instr.
ter submenu to change the instrument cluster submenu. cluster submenu.
cluster display settings. The following
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
functions are available:
until you see this message in the dis- until you see this message in the dis-
Function Page play: Temp. indicator. play: Display unit Speed-/odometer.
Select temperature display 146 The selection marker is on the current The selection marker is on the current
mode setting. setting.
Select speedometer display 146
mode
Select language 147
Select display (speed display or 147
outside temperature) for status
display 왘 Press æ or ç to set the temper- 왘 Press æ or ç to set speedome-
Select display (speed display or 148 ature unit to degrees Celsius (°C) or ter unit to km or miles.
outside temperature) for basic degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
display
Tire pressure display* 148
146
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting language 왘 Press æ or ç to select the lan- Selecting display (speed display or out-
guage to be used for the multifunction side temperature) for status display
왘 Move the selection marker with
display messages.
the æ or ç button to the Instr. 왘 Move the selection marker with
cluster submenu. Available languages: the æ or ç button to the Instr.
cluster submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 앫 German
until you see this message in the dis- 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
앫 English
play: Language. until you see this message in the dis-
앫 French play: Status line display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting. 앫 Italian The selection marker is on the current
앫 Spanish setting.
왘 Press æ or ç to select the sta-

tus line to degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or
miles.
i
You will see the status indicator when
you have called up a different display
from the standard display.
147
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting display (speed display or out- Tire pressure display* Time/Date submenu
side temperature) for basic display Use this function to set the unit for the tire Access the Time/Date submenu via the
왘 Move the selection marker with pressure display. Settings menu. Use the Time/Date sub-
the æ or ç button to the Instr. menu to change the time and date display
왘 Move the selection marker with the
cluster submenu. settings. The following functions are avail-
æ or ç button to the Instr,
able:
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly cluster submenu.
until you see this message in the dis- Function Page
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
play: Basic display.
until you see this message in the dis- Synchronizing the time 149
The selection marker is on the current play: Display unit Tire pressure.
Set time (hours) 149
setting.
The selection marker is on the current Set time (minutes) 149
setting.
Set date (month) 150
Set date (day) 150
Set date (year) 150
왘 Press æ or ç to select the dis- i

play permanently shown in the multi- Information on setting the time, refer to
왘 Press æ or ç to select the de- separate COMAND instructions.
function display.
sired tire pressure unit.
148
Controls in detail
Control system
Synchronizing the time Set time (hours) Set time (minutes)

This function can only be seen on vehicles This function can only be seen when time This function can only be seen when time
with COMAND and navigation module*. synchronization is switched off. synchronization is switched off.
왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the the æ or ç button to the the æ or ç button to the
Time/Date submenu. Time/Date submenu. Time/Date submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis- until you see this message in the dis- until you see this message in the dis-
play: Time sync. with head unit. play: Clock, hours. play: Clock, minutes.
The selection marker is on the current The selection marker is on the hour set- The selection marker is on the minute
setting. ting. setting.
왘 Press æ or ç to select the de- 왘 Press æ or ç to set the hour. 왘 Press æ or ç to set the minutes.
sired setting.
왘 Confirm by pressing reset button. 왘 Confirm by pressing reset button.
149
Controls in detail
Control system
Set date (month) Set date (day) Set date (year)

왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the the æ or ç button to the the æ or ç button to the
Time/Date submenu. Time/Date submenu. Time/Date submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the dis- until you see this message in the dis- until you see this message in the dis-
play: Set date month. play: Set date day. play: Set date year.
The selection marker is on the month The selection marker is on the day set- The selection marker is on the year set-
setting. ting. ting.
왘 Press æ or ç to set the month. 왘 Press æ or ç to set the day. 왘 Press æ or ç to set the year.
150
Controls in detail
Control system
Lighting submenu Setting daytime running lamp mode With daytime running lamp mode se-
(USA only) lected and the exterior lamp switch at
Access the Lighting submenu via the Set-
position 0, the following lamps will
tings menu. Use the Lighting submenu 왘 Move the selection marker with
come on automatically when the en-
to change the lamp and lighting settings on the æ or ç button to the
gine is turned on:
your vehicle. The following functions are Lighting submenu.
available: 앫 Parking lamps and low beam head-
lamps
Function Page until you see this message in the dis-
play: Lamp circuit headlamp. 앫 License plate lamps (in low ambient
Set daytime running lamp mode 151
light conditions)
(USA only) The selection marker is on the current
setting. i
Set locator lighting 152
Ambient light level 152 If you turn the exterior lamp switch to
another position, the corresponding
Exterior lamps delayed shut-off 153 lamp(s) will switch on.
Interior lighting delayed shut-off 154
For safety reasons, resetting the
Lighting submenu to factory settings
(컄 page 143) while driving will not re-
왘 Press æ or ç to select manual or
set the daytime running lamp mode.
daytime running lamp (constant)
mode. This function is not available in In the display you will then see the mes-
countries where daytime running sage: Lighting - Cannot be com-
lamps are mandatory. pletely reset to factory settings
while driving.
151
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting locator lighting

During darkness, the following lamps will
come on when the exterior lamp switch is
in position U, the locator lighting fea-
ture is activated and the vehicle is un-
locked by SmartKey:
앫 Parking lamps 왘 Press æ or ç to select the de- 왘 Press æ or ç to select the
sired setting. brightness of the lighting. 1 represents
앫 Tail lamps the darkest setting and 5 represents
The locator lighting will be switched on
앫 License plate lamps or off. the brightest setting.
앫 Front fog lamps The ambient light is switched off at set-
Ambient light level ting 0.
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened. It switches off au- Using this function, you can adjust the
tomatically after a period of approximately brightness of the ambient lighting.
40 seconds. 왘 Move the selection marker with the
왘 Move the selection marker with æ or ç button to the Lighting
the æ or ç button to the Light- submenu.
ing submenu. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly until you see the message Ambient
until you see this message in the dis- light Level in the display.
play: Function Surround lighting. The selection marker is on the current
The selection marker is on the current setting.
setting.
152
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting night security illumination (Exte- 왘 Move the selection marker with You can temporarily deactivate the de-
rior lamps delayed shut-off) the æ or ç button to the Light- layed shut-off feature:
ing submenu.
Use the Headlamps delayed shut-off 왘 Before leaving the vehicle, turn the
function to set whether and for how long 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly SmartKey in the starter switch to
you would like the exterior lamps to illumi- until you see this message in the dis- position 0.
nate during darkness after all doors are play: Headlamps delayed shut-off.
왘 Then turn the SmartKey in the starter
closed. When the delayed shut-off feature
The selection marker is on the current switch to position 2 and back to 0.
is activated and the exterior lamp switch is
setting.
in position U before the engine is turned The delayed shut-off feature is deacti-
off, the following lamps will remain lit after vated. It will reactivate as soon as you
you remove the SmartKey from the starter reinsert the SmartKey in the starter
switch or, when using KEYLESS-GO*, open switch.
the driver's door: Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
앫 Parking lamps 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
앫 Tail lamps 왘 Press æ or ç to select the de- ton on the gear selector lever
sired lamp-on period. (컄 page 33).
앫 License plate lamps
앫 Front fog lamps You can select:
앫 0 s, the delayed shut-off feature is
i deactivated.
You can reactivate this function within
앫 15 s, 30 s, 45 s or 60 s, the delayed
ten minutes by opening a door.
shut-off feature is activated.
If you do not open a door after remov-
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi-
ing the SmartKey, the lamps will auto-
tion U before turning the engine off.
matically switch off after 60 seconds.
153
Controls in detail
Control system
Interior lighting delayed shut-off 왘 Press æ or ç to select the de- Setting automatic locking
Use this function to set whether and for sired lamp-on time period. You can se- Use this function to activate or deactivate
how long you would like the interior light- lect: the automatic central locking. With the au-
ing to remain lit during darkness after the 앫 0 s, the delayed shut-off feature is tomatic central locking system activated,
SmartKey is removed from the starter deactivated. the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle
switch. speeds of approximately 9 mph
앫 5 s, 10 s, 15 s or 20 s, the delayed
(15 km/h).
왘 Move the selection marker with shut-off feature is activated.
the æ or ç button to the Light- 왘 Move the selection marker with
ing submenu. Vehicle submenu the æ or ç button to the Vehi-
cle submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Access the Vehicle submenu via the Set-
until you see this message in the dis- tings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
play: Interior lamp delayed make general vehicle settings. The follow- until you see this message in the dis-
shut-off. ing functions are available: play: Automatic door lock.
The selection marker is on the current Function Page The selection marker is on the current
setting. setting.
Set automatic locking 154
Limiting opening height of trunk 155
lid*
왘 Press æ or ç to switch Automat-

ic door lock on or off.
154
Controls in detail
Control system
Limiting opening height of trunk lid* Convenience submenu

Use this function to activate or deactivate Access the Convenience submenu via the
Warning! G
the limiting opening height of trunk lid. Settings menu. Use the Convenience sub- You must make sure that no one can be-
menu to change the settings for a number
왘 Move the selection marker with come trapped or injured by the moving
of convenience features. The following
the æ or ç button to the Vehi- steering wheel and the driver’s seat when
functions are available: the easy-entry/exit feature is in operation
cle submenu.
Function Page and the driver’s door is being opened or the
SmartKey is removed from the starter
until you see this message in the dis- Activate easy-entry/exit feature 155
switch.
play: Opening limiter Trunk lid.
Set SmartKey-dependency 156
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
The selection marker is on the current Set parking position for exterior 157 hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
setting. rear view mirror Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
Activating easy-entry/exit feature* feature, which could result in an accident
and/or personal injury.
Use this function to activate and deacti-
vate the easy-entry/exit feature. When
the feature is activated, the steering wheel After entering the vehicle, the steering
and driver’s seat will move back to facili- wheel and seat will move into the position
왘 Press æ or ç to switch Opening stored in memory when
tate exiting when you
limiter Trunk lid on or off.
앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter 앫 the driver’s door is closed
switch 앫 you put the SmartKey in the starter
앫 open the driver’s door switch or press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button*
However, the engine must be turned off.
155
Controls in detail
Control system
i Setting SmartKey-dependency
To cancel seat/steering wheel move- Use this function to set whether the mem-
ment, do one of the following: ory settings for the seats, the steering
앫 Press seat adjustment switch wheel, the mirrors and other settings of
(컄 page 35). the control system should be stored sepa-
rately for each SmartKey (컄 page 94).
앫 Move the steering column stalk 왘 Press æ or ç to change the
(컄 page 37). 왘 Move the selection marker with
easy-entry/exit setting. the æ or ç button to
앫 Press the memory button The following settings are available for the the Convenience submenu.
(컄 page 122). easy-entry/exit feature 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
off The until you see this message in the dis-
easy-entry/exit play: Key-dependent.
the æ or ç button to
the Convenience submenu. feature is deactivat- The selection marker is on the current
ed setting.
until you see this message in the dis- Steering col. Only the steering
play: Function Easy-entry feature. column is moved.
Steering col. + Both the steering
seat column and the
setting.
seat are moved.
왘 Press æ or ç to set
SmartKey-dependency to on or off.
156
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting parking position for exterior rear Adjusting the dynamic seat
view mirror The function dynamic seat adjustment lets
Use the Mirror adjustment parking aid you determine the way the seat adjusts
function to select whether the passen- while driving.
ger-side exterior rear view mirror should be
turned downward during parking maneu-
the æ or ç button to the
vers when reverse gear R is engaged. For 왘 Press æ or ç to switch function Dynamic Seat submenu.
additional information, see “Activating ex- on or off.
terior rear view mirror parking position” 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
(컄 page 172). Dynamic seat* submenu until you see this message in the dis-
play: Dyn. Multi-cont. Seat, driver
왘 Move the selection marker to the Access the Dynamic Seat submenu via the for the driver seat or
Convenience submenu using the æ Settings menu. Use the Dynamic Seat Dyn. Multi-cont. Seat, fr. pass.
or ç button. submenu to change the settings for the dy- for the passenger seat.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly namic seats. The following functions are
available: The selection marker is on the current
until you see this message in the dis- setting.
play: Mirror adjustment parking aid.
Function Page
Adjust driver seat 157
setting.
Adjust passenger seat 157
왘 Press æ or ç to switch function

Level 1 or Level 2.
157
Controls in detail
Control system
Trip computer menu
Use the trip computer menu to call up sta-

tistical data on your vehicle. The following
information is available:
Function Page
Fuel consumption statistics after 158 1 Distance driven since start 1 Distance driven since last reset
start 2 Time elapsed since start 2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average speed since start 3 Average speed since last reset
Fuel consumption statistics 158 4 Average fuel consumption since start 4 Average fuel consumption since last re-
since last reset set
Call up range (distance to empty) 159 Fuel consumption since last reset
i
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
Fuel consumption statistics after start All statistics stored since the last en-
until you see the first function of the
gine start will be reset approximately
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly Trip computer menu.
four hours after the SmartKey in the
until you see the first function of the 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly starter switch is turned to position 0 or
Trip computer menu. until you see this message in the dis- removed from the starter switch.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly play: After reset.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the
until you see this message in the left SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 with-
display: After start. in this time period.
158
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting fuel consumption statistics

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
until you see the first function of the covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
Trip computer menu. ly 14 m) every second.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Never operate radio transmitters equipped
until you see the reading that you want with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
to reset in the display. TEL menu* out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
왘 Press and hold the reset button in the
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
instrument cluster (컄 page 22) until
the value is reset to 0. Warning! G tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
A driver’s attention to the road must always personal injury.
Call up range (distance to empty)
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly your safety and the safety of others, we rec- You can use the functions in the TEL menu
until you see the first function of the ommend that you pull over to a safe location to operate your telephone, provided it is
Trip computer menu. and stop before placing or taking a tele- connected to a hands-free system and
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly phone call. If you choose to use the tele- switched on.
until you see this message in the dis- phone while driving, please use the
왘 Switch on the telephone and COMAND.
play: Range: hands-free device and only use the tele-
phone when weather, road and traffic condi- 왘 Press button ÿ or è on the
In the display you will see the calculat- tions permit. steering wheel repeatedly until you see
ed range based on the current fuel tank the Tel menu in the display.
level. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a ve-
hicle.
159
Controls in detail
Control system
Which messages will appear in the display Answering a call Ending a call
field depends on whether your telephone is When your telephone is ready to receive 왘 Press button t.
switched on or off: calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
You have ended the call. In the display
앫 If the telephone is off, the message in the display you will then see the message:
you will again see the standby mes-
the multifunction display is: PHONE OFF.
sage.
앫 If the telephone is on:
Dialing a number from the phone book
The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the display is If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
empty. you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
As soon as the telephone has found a 왘 Press button s.
network, READY appears in the display. 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
You have answered the call. In the dis- until you see the Tel menu in the dis-
play you see the length of the call. play.
i 왘 Press button j or k.
If you do not wish to accept a call, The control system reads the phone
press button t. book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take up to 30 seconds. In the
This standby message indicates that your display you will see the message
telephone is ready for use and you can op- Please wait.
erate it using the control system.
When the message Please wait disap-
pears, the phone book has been load-
ed.
160
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly

until the desired name appears in the until you see the Tel menu in the dis-
display. play.
The stored names are displayed in as- 왘 Press button s.
cending or descending alphabetical or-
In the display you see the first number
der.
in the redial memory.
앫 If no connection is made, the con-
i trol system stores the dialed num- 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
If you press and hold j or k for ber in the redial memory. until the desired name appears in the
longer than one second, the system display.
scrolls rapidly through the list of names Redialing 왘 Press button s.
until you release the button again.
The control system stores the most recent- The control system dials the selected
Cancel the quick search mode by ly dialed phone numbers. This eliminates phone number.
pressing t. the need to search through your entire
phone book.
왘 Press button s.
The system dials the selected phone
number.
앫 If the connection is successful, the
name of the party you called and
the duration of the call will appear
in the display.
161
Controls in detail
왔 Automatic transmission
Information on driving with an automatic The automatic transmission selects indi-
transmission is found in the “Getting vidual gears automatically, depending on: Warning! G
started” section (컄 page 43).
앫 the gear selector lever position D with It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear gear ranges (컄 page 164) lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
shifting process to your individual driving
앫 the selected shift program higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
style by continually adjusting the shift
(C/S) (컄 page 168) firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
points up or down. These shift point adjust- accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
ments are performed based on current or
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
operating and driving conditions. (C/S/M) (E 55 AMG only) someone or something. Only shift into gear
If the operating conditions change, the (컄 page 169) when the engine is idling normally and when
automatic transmission reacts by 앫 the position of the accelerator pedal your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
adjusting its gear shift program. (컄 page 168)
When the gear selector lever is in
i 앫 the vehicle speed
position D, you can influence transmission
During the brief warm-up, transmission The current gear selector lever position shifting by:
upshifting is delayed. This allows the and shift program (C/S) or (C/S/M) appear
catalytic converter to heat up more 앫 limiting the gear range
in the multifunction display (컄 page 134).
quickly to operating temperature. 앫 changing gears manually
An additional indication of the current gear
selector lever position can be found on the
cover of the shifting-gate. The indicators
come on when you activate a switch (e.g.
unlocking the vehicle or opening a door)
and go out after approximately
15 minutes.
162
Controls in detail
One-touch gearshifting i Canceling gear range limit

To avoid overrevving the engine when 왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever
Even with an automatic transmission you
the gear selector lever is moved to in the D+ direction until D reappears in
can change the gears manually when the
the D- direction, the transmission will the multifunction display.
gear selector lever is in position D.
not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s
The transmission will shift from the current
max. speed would be exceeded.
Downshifting gear range directly to gear range D.
왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to Upshifting Shifting into optimal gear range
the left in the D- direction.
왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to 왘 Press and hold the gear selector lever
The transmission will shift from the current the right in the D+ direction. in the D- direction.
gear to the next lower gear. This action
simultaneously limits the gear range of the The transmission will shift from the current The transmission will automatically select
transmission (컄 page 164). gear to the next higher gear as permitted the gear range suited for optimal
by the shift program. This action simul- acceleration and deceleration. This will
taneously extends the gear range of the involve shifting down one or more gears.
Warning! G transmission.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift

result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
163
Controls in detail
Gear ranges Effect Effect

With the gear selector lever in position D, ï The transmission shifts through ç The transmission shifts through
you can limit the transmission’s gear range sixth gear only (applies only to second gear only.
by pressing the gear selector lever to the vehicles with 7-speed automatic
Allows the use of engine’s
left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit transmission).
braking power when driving:
by pressing the gear selector lever to the î The transmission shifts through 앫 on steep downgrades
right (D+). fifth gear only (applies only to
vehicles with 7-speed automatic 앫 in mountainous regions
The selected gear range appears in the
multifunction display. If you press on the transmission). 앫 under extreme operating
accelerator when the engine has reached é The transmission shifts through conditions
its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift fourth gear only. æ The transmission operates in
beyond any gear range limit selected. è The transmission shifts through first gear only.
third gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
With this selection you can use braking effect on very steep or
the braking effect of the engine. lengthy downgrades.
164
Controls in detail
Gear selector lever position Effect Effect

The SmartKey can only be ë Neutral
Effect removed from the starter switch
No power is transmitted from the
ì Park position with the gear selector lever in
engine to the drive axle. When
position P. With the SmartKey
Gear selector lever position the brakes are released, the
removed, the gear selector lever
when the vehicle is parked. Place vehicle can be moved freely
is locked in position P.
gear selector lever in position P (pushed or towed).
only when vehicle is stopped. If the vehicle’s electrical system
To avoid damage to the trans-
The park position is not intended is malfunctioning, the gear
mission, never engage N while
to serve as a brake when the selector lever could remain
driving.
vehicle is parked. Rather, the locked in position P
driver should always set the (컄 page 363). If the ESP is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
parking brake in addition to í Reverse gear Move gear selector lever to N
placing the gear selector lever in
position P to secure the vehicle. Place gear selector lever in only if the vehicle is in danger of
position R only when vehicle is skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
stopped.
ê Drive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All forward gears
are available.
165
Controls in detail
! Steering wheel gearshift control

Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any Warning! G (Speedshift) E 55 AMG
other reason with gear selector lever
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the You can change the gears manually on the
in N can result in transmission damage
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the steering wheel or by using the gear
that is not covered by the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and selector lever (컄 page 163).
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
Allow engine to warm up under low load
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
use. Do not place full load on the engine
Warning! G unlocked vehicle. Children could move the
gear selector lever from position P, which
until the operating temperature has been
reached. Shift into reverse gear only when
could result in an accident and/or serious
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear the vehicle is stopped.
personal injury.
selector lever not fully engaged in position P
is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not !
intended to or capable of preventing your Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people extended period when driving off on
or objects. slippery road surfaces. This may cause
Always set the parking brake in addition to
serious damage to the drive train which
shifting to position P (컄 page 51).
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
bustible materials such as grass, hey or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
166
Controls in detail
The steering wheel gearshift buttons are Downshifting Upshifting

located to the left and right of the steering
왘 Press button 1 on the left side of the 왘 Press button 2 on the right side of the
wheel.
steering wheel. steering wheel.
The gear range is limited when you are not The gear range is extended when you are
driving in the manual program mode not driving in the manual program mode
(컄 page 164). (컄 page 164).
When driving in the manual program mode When driving in the manual program mode
(컄 page 169), the transmission will shift (컄 page 169), the transmission will shift
from the current gear to the next lower from the current gear to the next higher
gear (컄 page 170). gear (컄 page 170).
i
1 Left button: downshift Warning! G You cannot shift with the steering
2 Right button: upshift wheel gearshift buttons when the gear
selector lever is in position P, N or R.
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
i
You cannot shift with the steering
wheel gearshift buttons when the gear
selector lever is in position P, N or R.
167
Controls in detail
Program mode selector switch 왘 Press program mode selector Accelerator position
switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of
The program mode selector switch is the desired shift program appears in Your driving style influences the
located on the lower part of the center the multifunction display (컄 page 134). transmission’s shifting behavior:
console.
Select C for comfort driving: Less throttle Earlier upshifting
앫 The vehicle starts out in second More throttle Later upshifting
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if Kickdown
full throttle is applied or gear Use kickdown when you want maximum
range 1 is selected. acceleration.
앫 Traction and driving stability are 왘 Press the accelerator past the point of
improved on icy roads. resistance.
앫 Upshifts occur earlier even when The transmission shifts into a lower
1 Program mode selector switch you give more gas. The engine then gear.
operates at lower rpms and the
S Sport For standard driving wheels are less likely to spin. 왘 Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
C Comfort For comfort driving 앫 The power transmission ratio for
gear selector lever position R The transmission shifts up again.
!
changes depending on the program
Never change the program mode when mode selected (S or C).
the gear selector lever is out of
position P. This could result in a
change of driving characteristics for
which you may not be prepared.
168
Controls in detail
Manual shift program E 55 AMG Program mode selector switch Activating manual shift program
The program mode selector switch is 왘 Press program mode selector
In the manual shift program mode you can
located on the lower part of the center switch 1 repeatedly until the M for
change the gears manually (컄 page 166)
console. manual shift program appears in the
on the steering wheel or by using the gear
multifunction display.
selector lever (컄 page 163).
The program mode switches to manual
Allow engine to warm up under low load
program mode M. Automatic shifting is
use. Do not place full load on the engine
switched off. The gear range is not
until the operating temperature has been
limited.
reached. Shift into reverse gear only when
the vehicle is stopped. You can change the gears manually when
the gear selector lever is in position D. You
! can upshift or downshift through the gears
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an in succession.
extended period when driving off on 1 Program mode selector switch The current gear selector lever position
slippery road surfaces. This may cause
S Sport For standard driving and the selected shift program (C/S/M) is
serious damage to the drive train which
indicated in the multifunction display
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz C Comfort For comfort driving (컄 page 134).
Limited Warranty.
M Manual For manual gear shifting
The selected shift program (C/S/M) is
indicated in the multifunction display
(컄 page 134).
169
Controls in detail
Downshifting Upshifting Kickdown

왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to 왘 Briefly press the gear selector lever to The kickdown can also be used for
the left in the D- direction the right in the D+ direction maximum acceleration when driving in the
(컄 page 163). (컄 page 163). manual program mode.
or or 왘 Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
왘 Press button 1 on the left side of the 왘 Press button 2 on the right side of the
steering wheel (컄 page 166). steering wheel (컄 page 166). The transmission shifts to a lower gear.
The transmission shifts to the next The transmission shifts to the next 왘 Shift up once the desired speed has
lower gear. higher gear. been reached.
i
Warning! G When driving at full throttle, the trans-
mission shifts to the next higher gear
when maximum engine speed has been
reached.
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not When you brake or stop, the transmis-
prevent this type of loss of control. sion shifts down to a gear from which
you can easily accelerate or take off.
170
Controls in detail
Deactivating manual shift program Emergency operation (Limp Home

왘 Press the program mode selector Mode)
switch repeatedly until S or C appears
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
in the multifunction display.
transmission no longer shifts, the trans-
or mission is most likely operating in limp
왘 Restart the engine. home (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode only second gear and reverse gear
The transmission will go into the last can be activated.
automatic shift program mode selected
왘 Stop the vehicle.
(S or C).
왘 Move gear selector lever to P.
Program mode M is not stored.
왘 Turn off the engine.
i
왘 Wait at least ten seconds before
The last selected automatic program
restarting.
mode (S or C) is switched on when the
engine is restarted in the automatic 왘 Restart the engine.
program mode. 왘 Move gear selector lever to position D
(for second gear) or R.
왘 Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
171
Controls in detail
Good visibility
왔 Good visibility
Information on the windshield wipers
(컄 page 47) and for setting the rear view Warning! G Warning! G
mirrors (컄 page 37) is found in the “Get-
ting started” section. The automatic antiglare function does not Exercise care when using the passenger
react if incoming light is not aimed directly side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
Rear view mirror at sensors in the interior rear view mirror. surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not are closer than they appear. Check your in-
Automatic antiglare rear view mirror terior rear view mirror or glance over your
react, for example, if the rear window sun-
The reflection brightness of the exterior shade is in raised position. shoulder before changing lanes.
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
Glare can endanger you and others.
the interior rear view mirror will respond !
automatically to glare when:
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
앫 the ignition is switched on, and Warning! G with the vehicle paint finish can be
앫 incoming light from headlamps falls on completely removed only while in the
the sensor in the interior rear view mir- In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte liquid state by applying plenty of water.
ror may escape from the mirror housing if the
mirror glass breaks.
The rear view mirror will not react if
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
앫 reverse gear is engaged low the liquid to come into contact with
앫 the interior lighting is turned on eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
172
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating exterior rear view mirror Windshield wipers

parking position
Information on the windshield wipers is
Follow these steps to activate the mirror
found in the “Getting started” section
parking position so that the passen-
(컄 page 47).
ger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
turned downward to the stored position. i
왘 Make sure you have stored a parking Intermittent wiping is interrupted when
position for the passenger-side exterior the vehicle is at a standstill and a front
rear view mirror (컄 page 123). door is opened.
왘 Make sure the Mirror adjustment 1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
parking aid function in the Conve- button A rain sensor automatically controls the
nience submenu of the control system 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view windshield wipers depending on how wet
is switched to on (컄 page 157). mirror button the windshield is.
왘 Switch on ignition (if not already on). The exterior rear view mirror returns to its 왘 Switch on ignition.
previously stored driving position:
왘 Press button 2 for the passenger-side 왘 Set the wiper switch to position I
exterior rear view mirror. 앫 ten seconds after you put the gear se- (컄 page 48).
lector lever out of position R
왘 Place the gear selector lever in reverse After the initial wipe, pauses between
gear R. 앫 immediately once your vehicle exceeds wipes are automatically controlled by the
a speed of approximately 6 mph rain sensor.
The passenger-side exterior rear view (10 km/h)
mirror will be turned downward to the
stored position. 앫 immediately when you press button 1
for driver’s side mirror.
173
Controls in detail
Good visibility
! Headlamp cleaning system* Sun visors

Do not leave windshield wipers in inter-
mittent setting when the vehicle is tak- The button is located on the left side of the The sun visors protect you from sun glare
en to an automatic car wash or during dashboard. while driving.
windshield cleaning. Wipers will oper-
ate in the presence of water sprayed on Warning! G
the windshield, and wipers may be
damaged as a result. Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
The switch should not be left in inter- Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
mittent setting as the wipers will wipe while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
the windshield once every time the en- can endanger you and others.
gine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
왘 Swing sun visors down when you expe-
glass and/or damage the wiper blades
when wiping occurs on a dry wind- 1 Headlamp washer button rience glare.
shield. 왘 Switch on ignition.
왘 Press button 1.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
Information on filling up the washer reser-
voir can be found in the “Operation” sec-
tion (컄 page 289).
174
Controls in detail
Good visibility
1 Sun visor 1 Sun visor 1 Mounting

2 Mounting 2 Mirror cover 2 Additional visor*
3 Mirror lamp 3 Sun visor
왘 Swing sun visor 1 down when you ex-
4 Vanity mirror
perience glare. If sunlight enters through a side window:
왘 Make sure the sun visor is properly en-
왘 Disengage sun visor from mounting 1.
gaged in the mounting.
왘 Pivot sun visor to the side.
왘 Lift the mirror cover to access the mir-
ror. The sun visors are extendable.
Lamp 3 switches on. 왘 Adjust the sun visors by pushing or
pulling in the direction of the arrows.
175
Controls in detail
Good visibility
i Always raise the sunshade fully for its sup- Roller sunblind* in the rear doors
If sunlight enters through a side win- port against the window frame.
dow, disengage sun visor from
mounting 1 and pivot to the side. Warning! G
Mirror lamp 3 will switch off.
When operating the rear window sunshade,
be sure that there is no danger of anyone be-
Rear window sunshade*
ing harmed by the raising or lowering proce-
dure.
The switch is located in the center console.
The raising or lowering procedure can be im-
mediately halted by briefly pressing
switch 1. To reverse direction of move- 왘 Pull the roller sunblind out using the
ment, press switch 1 again. hooks.
왘 Attach the hooks at the top.
Warning! G !
Always guide the sunblind by hand. Do
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the not let it snap back, as the retractor
SmartKey from starter switch, and lock your could be damaged.
왘 Switch on ignition. vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
왘 Press the switch briefly at 1 to raise
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
the sunshade.
ment can cause an accident and/or serious
왘 Press the switch briefly at 1 to lower personal injury.
the sunshade.
176
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster Deactivating !

왘 Press button F again. If the rear window defroster switches
The rear window defroster uses a large off too soon and the indicator lamp
amount of power. To keep the battery The indicator lamp on the button goes
starts flashing, this means that too
drain to a minimum, switch off the defrost- out.
many electrical consumers are operat-
er as soon as the rear window is clear. The ing simultaneously and there is insuffi-
defroster is automatically deactivated af-
Warning! G cient voltage in the battery. The system
ter approximately 6 to 17 minutes of oper- responds automatically by deactivating
ation depending on the outside Any accumulation of snow and ice should be the rear window defroster.
temperature. removed from the rear window before driv-
As soon as the battery has sufficient
ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
Activating voltage, the rear window defroster au-
endangering you and others.
tomatically turns itself back on.
왘 Press button Fon the climate con-
trol panel (컄 page 177) or the automat-
ic climate control panel (컄 page 180).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
177
Controls in detail
Climate control
왔 Climate control
178
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Climate control panel i 1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable

2 Thumbwheel for air volume control For draft-free ventilation, move the 2 Right rear center air vent, adjust-
for left center air vent sliders for the center vents 3 and 5 able
to the middle position.
3 Left center air vent, adjustable 3 Thumbwheel for air volume control
4 Center air vent, fixed for right rear center air vent
5 Right center air vent, adjustable 4 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left rear center air vent
6 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right center air vent
The storage compartment between the
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control front seats can be ventilated, if so
for adding cold air equipped (컄 page 247).
for side air vent
9 Side defroster vent, fixed
Rear air vents
a Side air vent, adjustable
179
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Left-side temperature control 7 Residual heat/ventilation d Air recirculation

2 Windshield defroster 8 AC cooling on/off (ACOFF) e Air distribution and air volume
3 Increase air volume 9 Air distribution display (automatic, manual)
4 Air distribution a Climate control on/off

5 Rear window defroster b Air volume display
6 Right-side temperature control c Decrease air volume
180
Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control is operational whenev- Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and i
er the engine is running. You can operate odors are filtered out before outside air en- Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollu-
the climate control system in either the au- ters the passenger compartment through tion) may require replacement of the fil-
tomatic or manual mode. The system cools the air distribution system. ter before its scheduled interval. A
or heats the interior depending on the se- The air conditioning will not engage (no clogged filter will reduce the air volume
lected interior temperature and the cur- cooling) if the ACOFF mode is selected to the interior.
rent outside temperature.
(컄 page 186). If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Warning! G Warning! G Keep the air intake grille in front of the
When operating the automatic climate con- windshield free of snow and debris.
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
trol, the air that enters the passenger com- Do not obstruct air flow by placing ob-
ing and cooling given on the following pag-
partment through the air vents in the jects on the air flow-through exhaust
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
footwell can be very hot or very cold (de- slots below the rear window.
impairing visibility and endangering you and
pending on the set temperature). This may
others.
cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin
in the immediate area of the air vents. Al-
ways keep sufficient distance between un-
protected parts of the body and the footwell
air vents. If necessary change the air flow
using the air distribution controls
(컄 page 180) to direct the air away from the
footwell air vents.
181
Controls in detail
Climate control
Setting the temperature Decreasing 왘 Press air distribution rocker switch 4

(컄 page 180) until the display shows
왘 Turn the temperature control 1 or 6
Use temperature controls 1 and 6 to the desired setting.
slightly to the left.
separately adjust the air temperature on
The indicator lamp on the U button
each side of the passenger compartment. The climate control system will corre-
goes out and the current air distribu-
You should raise or lower the temperature spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
tion appears in the air distribution
setting in small increments, preferably perature.
display 9.
starting at 72°F (22°C).
Adjusting air distribution
Adjusting automatically
Increasing
왘 Press the U button.
왘 Turn the temperature control 1 or 6 Adjusting manually
slightly to the right. The indicator lamp on the button
Use air distribution control 4
comes on. The air distribution and vol-
The climate control system will corre- (컄 page 180) to adjust the air distribution.
ume is adjusted automatically.
spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
perature. Symbol Function Adjusting center air vents:
a Directs air through the center,
The thumbwheels for left 2 and right 6
side and rear passenger com-
center air vents are automatically posi-
partment air vents
tioned for optimum interior airflow. In this
Z Directs air to the windows position, center air vent 4 and adjustable
X Directs air into the entire left and right center vents 3 and 5 are
vehicle interior fully opened.
Y Directs air to the footwells
182
Controls in detail
Climate control
Heating: Adjusting air volume Defrosting

Only in manual mode is it possible to lower
the temperature in the headroom by regu- Adjusting manually i
lating the cold-airflow using These settings should only be selected
Five blower speeds are available.
thumbwheel 7 (컄 page 178). for a short time.
왘 Press to decrease or Q to in-
Windshield fogged on the outside crease air volume to the desired level. Activating
왘 Switch the windshield wipers on The indicator lamp on the U button 왘 Press button P.
(컄 page 48). goes out. The selected blower speed is
shown in the display. The indicator lamp on the button
왘 Press the U button. comes on.
The indicator lamp on the button Adjusting automatically
comes on. Deactivating
왘 Press the U button.
왘 Press button P.
The indicator lamp on the U button
comes on. The air volume is adjusted The indicator lamp on the button goes
automatically. out. Defrosting is turned off.
183
Controls in detail
Climate control
Air recirculation mode Activating

왘 Press button O.
Warning! G
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle The indicator lamp on the button Never operate the windows and
from the outside. This setting cuts off the comes on. sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama
intake of outside air and recirculates the sliding/pop-up roof* if there is the possibil-
air in the passenger compartment. i ity of anyone being harmed by the opening
If you keep button O pressed, the or closing procedure.
side windows and sliding/pop-up
Warning! G roof* or panorama sliding/pop-up
In case the procedure causes potential dan-
ger:
roof* will close.
When the outside temperature is below Vehicles with sliding/pop-up roof: The pro-
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation cedure for the windows can be immediately
mode for short periods to prevent window halted by pressing or pulling the respective
fogging. window switch. The procedure for the slid-
ing/pop-up roof can be immediately halted
by moving the switch for the sliding/pop-up
roof in any direction.
The closing of the side windows and the slid-
ing/pop-up roof can be reversed by again
pressing and holding the O button.
Vehicles with panorama sliding/pop-up
roof: The procedure for the windows and
panorama sliding/pop-up roof can be imme-
diately halted by releasing the O button.
184
Controls in detail
Climate control
i The air recirculation mode is deactivated Deactivating the climate control sys-
The air recirculation mode is activated automatically: tem
automatically at high outside tempera- 앫 after five minutes if the outside temper-
tures. ature is below approximately 41°F Deactivating
(5°C)
If you have turned off the air condition- 왘 Press button M (컄 page 180).
ing (컄 page 186) or the outside 앫 after five minutes if the air conditioning
temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the is turned off Reactivating
air recirculation mode will not switch
앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temper- 왘 Press button M again (컄 page 180).
on automatically.
ature is above approximately 41°F
or
(5°C)
Deactivating 왘 Press any button on the climate control
At outside temperatures above 79°F
왘 Press button O. panel (컄 page 180).
(26°C), the system will not automatically
The indicator lamp on the button goes switch back to outside air. A quantity of
out. outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
i
If you keep button O pressed, the
side windows and sliding/pop-up
roof* or panorama sliding/pop-up
roof* will return to their previous posi-
tion.
185
Controls in detail
Climate control
Air conditioning Activating Residual heat and ventilation*

Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
The air conditioning is operational while With the engine switched off, it is possible
dehumidify the air with the air condition-
the engine is running and cools the interior to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
ing.
air to the temperature set by the operator. for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
왘 Press ± again (컄 page 180). use of the residual heat produced by the
i engine.
The indicator lamp on the button ±
Condensation may drip out from under-
goes out.
neath the vehicle. This is normal and Activating
not an indication of a malfunction. The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer. to position 0 or 1, or remove it from
Deactivating the starter switch.
It is possible to deactivate the air condi- ! 왘 Press button T (컄 page 180).
tioning (cooling) function of the climate If the air conditioning cannot be turned
control system. The air in the vehicle will on again, this indicates that the air con- The indicator lamp on button T
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified. ditioning is losing refrigerant. The com- comes on.
왘 Press button ± (컄 page 180). pressor has turned itself off.
The indicator lamp on the button ± Have the air conditioning checked at
comes on. the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
186
Controls in detail
Climate control
i Deactivating
How long the system will provide heat- 왘 Press button T (컄 page 180).
ing depends on the coolant tempera-
The indicator lamp on button T
ture and the temperature set by the
goes out.
operator. The blower will run at speed
setting 1 regardless of the air distribu- The residual heat is automatically turned
tion control setting. off:
앫 when the ignition is switched on
앫 after about 30 minutes
앫 if the battery voltage drops
187
Controls in detail
왔 Automatic climate control*
188
Controls in detail
1 Automatic climate control panel

for left center air vent
3 Left center air vent, adjustable
4 Air vent, fixed
5 Right center air vent, adjustable
for right center air vent
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control 1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable
for adding cold air 2 Right rear center air vent, adjust-
8 Thumbwheel for air volume control 1 Thumbwheel for air volume control able
for side air vent for side air vent 3 Air volume control for right rear
9 Side defroster vent, fixed 2 Side air vent, adjustable center air vent
a Side air vent, adjustable 4 Temperature rocker switch, right
5 Display
6 Temperature rocker switch, left
7 Air volume control for left rear cen-
ter air vent
189
Controls in detail
1 Air distribution, left 7 Air distribution, right c Automatic climate control on/off
2 Defrosting 8 Air distribution and air volume, right d Decrease air volume
3 Temperature rocker switch, left (automatic, manual) e AC cooling on/off (ACOFF)
4 Display 9 Activated charcoal filter Residual heat/ventilation (REST)
5 Temperature rocker switch, right a Rear air-conditioning remote con- f Air recirculation
trol g Air distribution and air volume, left
6 Rear window defroster
b Increase air volume (automatic, manual)
190
Controls in detail
The automatic climate control is a 4-zone With the help of a sun sensor, the automat-
Warning! G intelligent climate control system. Your ve- ic climate control determines the relation
hicle interior is divided into 4 zones. of the sun to the vehicle and automatically
When operating the automatic climate con- adjusts the inside temperature for every in-
trol, the air that enters the passenger com- dividual zone.
partment through the air vents in the
footwell can be very hot or very cold (de- You can set the temperature for each of
pending on the set temperature). This may the 4 zones separately. These settings can
cause burn or frostbite to unprotected skin be assigned to a SmartKey and stored in
in the immediate area of the air vents. Al- memory (컄 page 156).
ways keep sufficient distance between un- The automatic climate control is operation-
protected parts of the body and the footwell al whenever the engine is running. It cools
air vents. If necessary change the air flow the vehicle’s interior according to the an-
using the air distribution controls gle and intensity of the sun’s rays, the out-
(컄 page 190) to direct the air away from the side temperature and the selected
footwell air vents. temperature. You can operate the climate
control system in either the automatic or
manual mode.
191
Controls in detail
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and i Setting the temperature

odors are filtered out before outside air en- Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollu-
ters the passenger compartment through Use temperature control 3 for the left
tion) may require replacement of the fil-
the air distribution system. side or 5 for the right side to separately
ter before its scheduled interval. A
adjust the air temperature on each side of
The air conditioning will not engage (no clogged filter will reduce the air volume
the passenger compartment. You should
cooling) if the ACOFF mode is selected to the interior.
raise or lower the temperature setting in
(컄 page 190). If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate small increments, preferably starting
the interior before driving off. at 72°F (22°C).
Warning! G Keep the air intake grille in front of the
i
windshield free of snow and debris.
Follow the recommended settings for heat- When operating the climate control
ing and cooling given on the following pag- Do not obstruct air flow by placing ob- system in automatic mode, you will
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up, jects on the air flow-through exhaust only rarely need to adjust the tempera-
impairing visibility and endangering you and slots below the rear window. ture, air volume and air distribution.
others.
192
Controls in detail
Increasing Adjusting air distribution Adjusting manually

왘 Push top of temperature control rocker 왘 Turn air distribution controls on each
Use the air distribution controls 1 and 7
switch 3 and/or 5. side of the passenger compartment to
(컄 page 180) to separately adjust the air
the desired symbol.
The automatic climate control system distribution on each side of the passenger
will correspondingly adjust the interior compartment. The following symbols are The indicator lamp in the U button
air temperature. found on the controls: goes out.
Decreasing Symbol Function Adjusting automatically

왘 Push bottom of temperature control a Directs air through the center, 왘 Press left or right U button.
rocker switch 3 and/or 5. side and rear passenger com-
The indicator lamp in the U button
partment air vents
The automatic climate control system illuminates. The air distribution is ad-
will correspondingly adjust the interior Z Directs air to the windows justed automatically.
air temperature. X Directs air into the entire vehi-
cle interior Windshield fogged on the outside
Heating:
Only in manual air distribution mode is it Y Directs air to the footwells 왘 Switch the windshield wipers on.
possible to lower the temperature in the 왘 Press the left or right U button.
headroom by adding outside air using
thumbwheel 7 (컄 page 188) in the dash-
board.
193
Controls in detail
Adjusting air volume Maximum cooling MAX COOL Deactivating

왘 Press button P.
If the left and right air distribution controls
Adjusting manually The indicator lamp on the button goes
as well as the airflow volume control are
Nine blower speeds are available. set to U and there is a high need for out. Defrosting is turned off.
cooling, the display “MAX COOL” appears
왘 Press to decrease or Q to in-
in the front and rear display. Air recirculation mode
crease air volume to the desired level.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
The AUTO display disappears and the Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
of the vehicle interior (when windows and
automatic mode is switched off. The unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama
selected blower speed is shown in the from the outside. This setting cuts off the
sliding/pop-up roof* are closed).
display. intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Adjusting automatically Defrosting
왘 Press left or right U button. i Warning! G

The air volume is adjusted automatical- These settings should only be selected When the outside temperature is below
ly. for a short time. 41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation
mode for short periods to prevent window
Activating fogging.
왘 Press button P.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
194
Controls in detail
Activating i
왘 Press button O.
Warning! G The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically:
The indicator lamp on the button Never operate the windows and
comes on. sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama 앫 at high outside temperatures
sliding/pop-up roof* if there is the possibil-
앫 if the concentration of carbon mon-
i ity of anyone being harmed by the opening
oxide and nitrogen oxide in the out-
If you keep button O pressed, the or closing procedure.
side air increases, for example in a
side windows and the sliding/pop-up In case the procedure causes potential dan- tunnel (charcoal filter activated
roof* or panorama sliding/pop-up ger: (컄 page 196))
roof* will close.
Vehicles with sliding/pop-up roof: The pro- If you have turned off the air condition-
cedure for the windows can be immediately ing (컄 page 186) or the outside
halted by pressing or pulling the respective temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the
window switch. The procedure for the slid- air recirculation mode will not switch
ing/pop-up roof can be immediately halted on automatically.
by moving the switch for the sliding/pop-up
roof in any direction. Deactivating
The closing of the side windows and the slid-
왘 Press button O.
ing/pop-up roof can be reversed by again
pressing and holding the O button. The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
diately halted by releasing the O button.
195
Controls in detail
i Charcoal filter
If you keep button O pressed, the
Warning! G
An activated charcoal filter markedly re-
side windows and the sliding / pop-up
duces bad odors and removes pollutants Never operate the side windows and
roof* or panorama sliding / pop-up
from air entering the passenger compart- sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama
ment. sliding/pop-up roof* if there is the possibil-
tion.
ity of anyone being harmed by the opening
Activating or closing procedure.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically: 왘 Press button e. Vehicles with sliding/pop-up roof: The pro-
cedure for the windows can be immediately
앫 after five minutes if the outside temper- The indicator lamp on the button halted by pressing or pulling the respective
ature is below approximately 41°F comes on. window switch. The procedure for the slid-
(5°C) ing/pop-up roof can be immediately halted
i
앫 after five minutes if the air conditioning by moving the switch for the sliding/pop-up
If you keep button e pressed, the
is turned off (ACOFF) side windows and the sliding / pop-up
roof in any direction.
앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temper- roof* or panorama sliding / pop-up The closing of the side windows and the slid-
ature is above approximately 41°F roof* will close. ing/pop-up roof can be reversed by again
(5°C) pressing and holding the e button.
At outside temperatures above 79°F
(26°C) the system will not automatically
switch back to outside air. A quantity of
diately halted by releasing the e button.
outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
196
Controls in detail
Deactivating The activated charcoal filter should be Reactivating

switched off when windows fog up on the
왘 Press button e. 왘 Press button M again.
inside, or if the passenger compartment
The indicator lamp on the button goes needs to be quickly heated or cooled i
out. down. With the climate control system deacti-
i vated, the air flow and circulation are
Deactivating the climate control sys- switched off.
If you keep button e pressed, the tem Only choose this setting temporarily to
side windows and the sliding/pop-up
prevent the windows from fogging up.
tion. Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the automatic
The system switches automatically to the climate control system.
air recirculation mode if the carbon 왘 Press button M until the display is
monoxide (CO) or nitrogen oxide (NOX) cleared.
concentration of the outside air increases
beyond a predetermined level. The climate control system is deacti-
vated.
The automatic air recirculation mode does
not function if ACOFF mode is selected or if
the outside temperature has fallen below
41° F (5° C).
197
Controls in detail
Air conditioning Activating Residual heat and ventilation

Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
The air conditioning is operational while With the engine switched off, it is possible
dehumidify the air with the air condition-
the engine is running and cools the interior to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
ing.
air to the temperature set by the operator. for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
왘 Press ° again. use of the residual heat produced by the
i engine.
ACOFF in the display goes out.
Condensation may drip out from under-
neath the vehicle. This is normal and The air conditioning uses the refrigerant Activating
not an indication of a malfunction. R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
to position 0 or 1, or remove it from
Deactivating ! the starter switch.
It is possible to deactivate the air condi- If the air conditioning cannot be turned 왘 Press button °.
tioning (cooling) function of the automatic on again, this indicates that the air con-
climate control system. The air in the vehi- ditioning is losing refrigerant. The com- REST in the display comes on.
cle will then no longer be cooled or dehu- pressor has turned itself off.
midified. Deactivating
Have the air conditioning checked at
왘 Press button °. the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz 왘 Press button °.
ACOFF in the display comes on. Center. REST in the display goes out.
198
Controls in detail
The residual heat is automatically turned Rear air conditioning

off
앫 when the ignition is switched on
앫 after about 30 minutes
앫 if the battery voltage drops
Display
i
1 Temperature, left
How long the system will provide heat-
2 Temperature, right
ing depends on the coolant tempera-
ture and the temperature set by the
Basic settings
operator. The blower will run at speed
1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable
setting 1 regardless of the air distribu- We recommend setting the temperature
2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable
tion control setting. on both the left- and right-hand sides to
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
72°F. This ensures a pleasant temperature
right rear center air vent
in the rear of the vehicle.
4 Temperature rocker switch, right
5 Display The temperatures for the left- and
6 Temperature rocker switch, left right-hand sides can be set using tempera-
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control for ture rocker switches 4 and 6.
left rear center air vent
199
Controls in detail
i The temperature for the rear left- and

The rear air conditioning will not cool right-hand sides of the vehicle can be set
the air when ACOFF mode has been se- with temperature rocker switches 3
lected in the front control panel. and 5.
The temperature display disappears ap-
Adjusting the rear settings with the proximately five seconds after the last
front control panel SmartKey confirmation and switches back
to the normal display.
i
The normal display will appear when
the ™ button is pressed again.
Display
왘 Press the ™ button (컄 page 190).
The display switches over.
200
Controls in detail
Power windows
왔 Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
Warning! G the automatic reversal function will not op-
erate.
The side windows can be opened and
closed electrically. The switches for all of When closing the windows, make sure that When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
the side windows are on the driver’s door. there is no danger of anyone being harmed SmartKey from starter switch, take the
The switches for the respective windows by the closing procedure. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
are on the front passenger door and the The closing of the door windows can be im- lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
rear doors. mediately halted by releasing the switch or, attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
if switch was pulled past the resistance unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
point and released, by either pressing or cle equipment can cause an accident
pulling the respective switch. and/or serious personal injury.
If the window encounters an obstruction

that blocks its path in a circumstance where i
you pulled the switch past the resistance You can also open or close the win-
point and released it to close the window, dows using the following:
the automatic reversal function will stop the 앫 SmartKey (summer opening/con-
window and open it slightly. venience feature) (컄 page 203)
1 Rear window override switch If the window encounters an obstruction 앫 Button O in the control panel of
(컄 page 78) that blocks its path in a circumstance where the climate control (컄 page 180)
2 Right front window you are closing the window by pulling and
holding the switch, by pressing and holding 앫 Button e in the control panel of
3 Right rear window
button ‹ on the SmartKey, or by press- the automatic climate control
4 Left rear window
ing and holding the lock button (vehicles (컄 page 190)
5 Left front window
with KEYLESS-GO*) on the door handle,
201
Controls in detail
Power windows
왘 Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to Closing the windows Fully closing the windows
position 1 or 2 or press the KEY- (Express-close)
왘 Pull switch 2 to 5 to the resistance
LESS-GO* start/stop button once or
point. 왘 Pull switch 2 to 5 past the resis-
twice.
tance point and release.
The corresponding window will move
i upwards until you release the switch. The corresponding window closes com-
You can still operate the windows when pletely.
the key is in starter switch position 0 or Warning G If the upward movement of the window is
has been removed: blocked during the closing procedure, the
앫 until the driver’s or front passenger If you pull and hold the switch up when clos- window will stop and open slightly.
door has been opened ing the window, and upward movement of
앫 for no more than five minutes

the window is blocked by some obstruction
including but not limited to arms, hands, fin-
Warning! G
gers, etc., the automatic reversal will not op-
Opening the windows Driver’s door only:
erate.
If within five seconds switch is again pulled
왘 Press switch 2 to 5 to the resistance past the resistance point and released, the
point. Fully opening the windows automatic reversal will not operate.
The corresponding window will move (Express-open)
downwards until you release the 왘 Press switch 2 to 5 past the resis- Stopping windows
switch. tance point and release.
왘 Press or pull respective switch again.
The corresponding window opens com-
pletely.
202
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows with Opening (Summer opening feature) 왘 Release the Œ button to stop proce-
the SmartKey If the weather is warm, you can ventilate dure.
The sliding/pop-up roof* (컄 page 206) or the vehicle before driving off by simulta-
Closing (Convenience feature)
panorama sliding/pop-up roof* neously:
(컄 page 212) will also be opened or closed 왘 Press and hold button ‹ after lock-
앫 opening the sliding/pop-up roof
when the power windows are operated ing the vehicle.
with the SmartKey. 앫 opening the side windows
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
앫 turning on the seat ventilation* for the or panorama sliding/pop-up roof* be-
Warning! G driver’s seat gin to close after approximately one
second.
Never operate the windows or sliding/ i
The seat ventilation* for the driver’s 왘 Release the ‹ button to stop proce-
pop-up roof or panorama sliding/pop-up
seat is automatically set to the highest dure.
roof* if there is the possibility of anyone be-
ing harmed by the opening or closing proce- level if activated via summer opening Make sure all side windows and the
dure. feature. sliding/pop-up roof or panorama slid-
ing/pop-up roof* are properly closed be-
In the event that the procedure causes po-
To do so, follow the instructions below: fore leaving the vehicle.
tential danger, the procedure can be imme-
diately halted by releasing the button on the 왘 Press and hold button Œ after un-
SmartKey. To reverse direction of move- locking the vehicle.
ment, press Œ for opening or ‹ for
closing.
or panorama sliding/pop-up roof* be-
gin to open after approximately one
왘 Aim transmitter eye at the front door second.
handle.
203
Controls in detail
Power windows
Closing the side windows with KEY- Synchronizing power windows

LESS-GO*
The power window must be resynchro-
왘 Press and hold lock button at door
nized each time
(컄 page 54) until the side windows and
the sliding / pop-up roof or panorama 앫 after the battery has been disconnect-
sliding/pop-up roof* are closed. ed.
앫 if the power windows cannot be fully
Warning! G opened (Express-open) or closed (Ex-
press-close).
When closing the windows and the
sliding/pop-up roof*, be sure that there is Synchronizing the power windows
no danger of anyone being harmed by the 왘 Switch on ignition.
closing procedure.
왘 Pull the power window switches until
If potential danger exists, proceed as fol-
the side windows are closed.
lows:
Hold the switches for approximately
앫 Release the lock button.
one second.
앫 Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
The side windows and the The power windows are synchronized.
sliding/pop-up roof* will open for as
long as the door handle is held but the
door not opened.
204
Controls in detail
왔 Sliding/pop-up roof*
Opening and closing the With the roof closed or tilted open, a !
sliding/pop-up roof screen can be slid into the roof opening to To avoid damaging the seals, do not
guard against sun rays. When sliding the transport any objects with sharp edges
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened roof open, the screen will also retract. which can stick out of the
and closed electrically. The switch for the sliding/pop-up roof.
sliding/pop-up roof is on the overhead
control panel.
Warning! G Open the sliding/pop-up roof only if
the roof is clear of snow or ice.
When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, make
sure that there is no danger of anyone being The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened
harmed by the closing procedure. or closed manually should an electrical
malfunction occur (컄 page 364).
The closing procedure of the sliding/pop-up
roof can be immediately halted by releasing
the switch or, if the switch was moved past i
the resistance point and released, by mov- You can also open or close the
ing the switch in any direction. sliding/pop-up roof using:
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the 앫 SmartKey, (컄 page 206)
1 Push back to slide roof open SmartKey from starter switch, take the
앫 Button O in the control panel of
2 Push forward to slide roof closed SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
the climate control (컄 page 180) or
3 Push up to raise roof at rear lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
automatic climate control
4 Pull down to lower roof at rear attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
(컄 page 190)
cle equipment can cause an accident 앫 Button e in the control panel of
and/or serious personal injury. the automatic climate control
(컄 page 190)
205
Controls in detail
왘 Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to Fully opening (Express-open) and clos- Opening and closing the
position 1 or 2 or press the ing (Express-close) the sliding/pop-up roof with the SmartKey
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once sliding/pop-up roof
The power windows (컄 page 203) will also
or twice.
왘 To open, close, raise or lower the slid- be opened or closed when you operate the
ing/pop-up roof, move the switch past sliding/pop-up roof with the SmartKey.
Opening and closing the
the resistance point in the required
sliding/pop-up roof
왘 To open, close, raise or lower the
direction 1 to 4 and release.
Warning! G
The sliding/pop up roof opens or clos-
sliding/pop-up roof, move the switch Never operate the windows or
es completely.
to resistance point in the required sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility
direction 1 to 4. of anyone being harmed by the opening or
Stopping the sliding/pop-up roof
Release the switch when the roof has closing procedure.
왘 Move the switch in any direction.
reached the desired position. In case the procedure causes potential dan-
i ger, the procedure can be immediately halt-
If the movement of the sliding/pop-up ed by releasing the remote control button.
roof is blocked during the closing pro- To reverse direction of movement,
cedure, the roof will stop and reopen press Œ for opening or ‹ for closing.
slightly.
왘 Aim transmitter eye at the front door
handle.
206
Controls in detail
Opening (Summer opening feature) Closing (Convenience feature)

If the weather is warm, you can ventilate 왘 Press and hold button ‹ after lock-
Warning! G
the vehicle before driving off by simulta- ing the vehicle. When closing the windows and the
neously: sliding/pop-up roof, be sure that there is no
앫 opening the sliding/pop-up roof begin to close after approximately danger of anyone being harmed by the clos-
one second. ing procedure.
앫 opening the side windows
앫 switching on the seat ventilation* 왘 Release the ‹ button to stop proce- The sliding/pop-up roof will not automati-
dure. cally reopen if blocked during convenience
To do so, follow the instructions below: closing.
Make sure all side windows and the slid-
왘 Press and hold button Œ after un- ing/pop-up roof are properly closed before If potential danger exists, proceed as fol-
locking the vehicle. leaving the vehicle. lows:
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof 앫 Release the lock button.
begin to open after approximately Closing the sliding/pop-up roof with 앫 Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
one second. KEYLESS-GO* The side windows and the
The power windows (컄 page 204) will also sliding/pop-up roof will open for as long
왘 Release transmit button to interrupt
be closed when you operate the as the door handle is held but the door
procedure. not opened.
sliding/pop-up roof with KEYLESS-GO.
왘 Press and hold lock button at door
(컄 page 54) until the side windows and
the sliding/pop-up roof are closed.
207
Controls in detail
Synchronizing the sliding/pop-up roof Synchronizing

왘 Remove the fuse from the main fuse
The sliding/pop-up roof must be resyn-
box (컄 page 389).
chronized each time
왘 Replace the fuse in the main fuse box.
앫 after the battery has been disconnect-
ed 왘 Switch on the ignition.
앫 the sliding/pop-up roof has been 왘 Press and hold the switch in
closed manually (컄 page 364) direction 3 until the sliding/pop-up
roof is fully raised at the rear.
앫 the sliding/pop-up roof does not open
smoothly Hold the switch for approximately one
second.
앫 a malfunction
The sliding/pop-up roof is synchro-
nized.
208
Controls in detail
왔 Panorama sliding/pop-up roof*
Opening and closing the roller
Warning! G sunblinds
When opening or closing the panorama The roller sunblinds can only be opened or
sliding/pop-up roof, make sure that there is closed when the panorama
no danger of anyone being harmed by the sliding/pop-up roof is closed. The front
opening or closing procedure. and rear roller sunblind cannot be operat-
If the panorama sliding/pop-up roof is ed individually.
closed with the convenience closing feature
and becomes blocked, it will not open auto-
matically. Should this occur, press the Roller sunblinds switch, rear
Œ button on the SmartKey and hold it 1 Open
down; the panorama sliding/pop-up roof 2 Close
opens again.
왘 Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
The panorama roof is made out of glass. In position 1 or 2 or press the
the event of an accident, the glass may shat- KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
ter. This may result in an opening in the roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing Panorama sliding/pop-up roof switch Opening and closing the roller sun-
their seat belts or not wearing them properly blinds
1 Open
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an 왘 To open or close the roller sunblinds,
2 Close
opening also presents a potential for injury move the panorama sliding/pop-up
for occupants wearing their seat belts prop- roof switch or the rear roller sunblind
erly as entire body parts or portions of them switch to resistance point in the re-
may protrude from the passenger compart- quired direction 1 or 2. 컄컄
ment.
209
Controls in detail
컄컄 Release the switch when the roller sun- Opening and closing the panorama
blinds have reached the desired posi- sliding/pop-up roof Warning! G
tion.
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof can be When opening or closing the panorama
opened and closed electrically. The switch sliding/pop-up roof, make sure that there is
Warning! G for the panorama sliding/pop-up roof is on no danger of anyone being harmed by the
the overhead control panel. opening or closing procedure.
When closing the roller sunblinds, make
sure that no one is in danger of being injured The panorama sliding/pop-up roof only op- The opening procedure of the panorama
by the closing procedure. The closing of the erates with the sunblinds opened. sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately
roller sunblinds can be immediately halted halted by releasing the switch or, if the
by releasing the switch. switch was moved past the resistance point
and released, by moving the switch in any di-
rection.
Fully opening the roller sunblinds
(Express-open) The closing procedure of the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof can be immediately
왘 Move the panorama sliding/pop-up halted by releasing the switch.
roof switch or the rear roller sunblind
switch past the resistance point in When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
direction 1 and release. SmartKey from starter switch, take the
The roller sunblinds opens completely. 1 Push back to slide roof open lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
2 Push forward to slide roof closed attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
Stopping the roller sunblinds 3 Push up to raise roof unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
4 Pull down to lower roof cle equipment can cause an accident
210
Controls in detail
! i Opening and closing the panorama

Do not transport any objects that pro- You can also open or close the panora- sliding/pop-up roof
trude out of the panorama ma sliding/pop-up roof using the: 왘 To open or close the panorama
sliding/pop-up roof as the seals could sliding/pop-up roof, move the switch
앫 SmartKey (summer opening/con-
be damaged. to resistance point in the required
venience future) (컄 page 203)
Do not open the panorama direction 1 to 4.
앫 button , in the control panel of
sliding/pop-up roof if there is snow or Release the switch when the roof has
the automatic climate control
ice on the roof, as this could result in reached the desired position.
(컄 page 190)
malfunctions.
앫 button e in the control panel of Fully opening the panorama
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof can
the automatic climate control sliding/pop-up roof (Express-open)
be opened or closed manually should
(컄 page 196)
an electrical malfunction occur 왘 Move the switch past the resistance
(컄 page 364). point in direction 1 and release.
왘 Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2 or press the The panorama sliding/pop-up roof
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once opens completely.
or twice.
i
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof can-
not be closed fully (Express-close)
Stopping the panorama

sliding/pop-up roof
211
Controls in detail
Opening and closing panorama Opening (Summer opening feature) If roller sunblinds are already open:
sliding/pop-up roof with the SmartKey If the weather is warm, you can ventilate 왘 Press and hold button Œ after un-
The power windows (컄 page 201) will also the vehicle before driving off by simulta- locking the vehicle.
be opened or closed when the panorama neously:
The windows move down and the pan-
sliding/pop-up roof is operated with the
앫 opening the sliding/pop-up roof orama sliding/pop-up roof tilts and
SmartKey.
opens after approximately one second.
앫 opening the side windows
왘 Release transmit button to stop proce-
Warning! G 앫 switching on the seat ventilation*
dure.
If roller sunblinds are closed:
Never operate the windows or panorama
왘 Press and hold button Œ after un- Closing (Convenience feature)
sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility
of anyone being harmed by the opening or locking the vehicle. 왘 Press and hold button ‹ after lock-
closing procedure. The windows and roller sunblinds begin ing the vehicle.
In case the procedure causes potential dan- to open after approximately The windows and panorama
ger, the procedure can be immediately halt- one second. sliding/pop-up roof begin to close after
ed by releasing the remote control button. 왘 Press and hold button Œ again. approximately one second.
To reverse direction of movement,
The panorama sliding/pop-up roof tilts 왘 Release the ‹ button to stop proce-
press Œ for opening or ‹ for closing.
and opens. dure.
Make sure all side windows and the pan-
왘 Aim transmitter eye at the driver’s door
orama sliding/pop-up roof are properly
handle.
closed before leaving the vehicle.
212
Controls in detail
Closing the panorama sliding/pop-up Synchronizing the panorama

roof with KEYLESS-GO* Warning! G sliding/pop-up roof
The power windows (컄 page 201) will also When closing the windows and the panora- It is necessary to resynchronize the pan-
be closed when the panorama ma sliding/pop-up roof, be sure that there is orama sliding/pop-up roof after
sliding/pop-up roof is operated with no danger of anyone being harmed by the
KEYLESS-GO. 앫 voltage supply interruption due to a
closing procedure.
disconnected or discharged battery
왘 Press and hold lock button at driver’s If potential danger exists, proceed as fol-
door (컄 page 54) until the side win- 앫 the roof has been closed manually
lows:
dows and the panorama 앫 the roof has been opened with an
앫 Release the lock button.
sliding/pop-up roof are closed. abrupt movement
앫 Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
The side windows and the panorama 앫 a malfunction.
sliding/pop-up roof will open for as long
왘 Remove the fuse from the main fuse
as the door handle is held but the door
is not opened.
box (컄 page 389).
왘 Replace the fuse in the main fuse box.
왘 Switch on ignition.
왘 Press the switch in direction 2
(컄 page 210). 컄컄
213
Controls in detail
컄컄 왘 Wait until the roller sunblinds are 왘 Move the switch in direction 2 Solar panel*
closed and then keep the switch (컄 page 210).
pressed for approximately one second. A solar panel is available in combination
왘 Wait until the panorama
with the panorama sliding/pop-up roof.
왘 Move the switch in direction 1 sliding/pop-up roof is closed and then
The solar cells convert natural light into
(컄 page 210). keep the switch pressed for approxi-
electrical energy. When the engine is
mately one second.
왘 Wait until the roller sunblinds are switched off, the energy generated auto-
opened. The panorama sliding/pop up roof is matically switches on the ventilation fan.
synchronized. The constant air flow creates a cooler tem-
왘 Move the switch in direction 3
(컄 page 210). The synchronization must be repeated if perature for cars parked in the sunlight.
the panorama sliding/pop-up roof cannot The air flow depends on the intensity of the
왘 Wait until the panorama
be fully opened (Express-open). solar radiation. The ventilation starts two
sliding/pop-up roof is raised and then
keep the switch pressed for approxi- minutes after switching off the engine.
mately one second.
214
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔 Driving systems
The following driving systems are ex- Cruise control
plained on the following pages: Warning! G
The cruise control automatically maintains
앫 Cruise control and Distronic*, with
the speed you set for your vehicle. Cruise control is a convenience system de-
which the vehicle can maintain a preset signed to assist the driver during vehicle op-
speed Use of cruise control is recommended for
eration. The driver is and must always
driving at a constant speed for extended
앫 Airmatic* adjusts the vehicle suspen- remain responsible for the vehicle speed
periods of time. You can set any speed
sion characteristics automatically and and for safe brake operation.
over 20 mph (30 km/h).
controls the vehicle level Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
The cruise control function is operated by and weather conditions make it advisable to
앫 Parktronic system*, which assists the
means of the cruise control lever. travel at a steady speed.
driver during parking maneuvers
The cruise control lever is the uppermost 앫 The use of cruise control can be danger-
The BAS, ABS, ESP and SBC are described
lever found on the left-hand side of the ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
in the “Safety and Security” section
steering column (컄 page 20). because conditions do not allow safe
(컄 page 80).
driving at a steady speed.
앫 The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫 Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
215
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i !
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise Moving gear selector lever to
control may not be able to maintain the position N while driving also cancels
set speed. Once the grade eases, the cruise control. However, the gear se-
set speed will be resumed. lector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
Canceling cruise control when the vehicle is in danger of skid-
ding (e.g. on icy roads).
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
1 Set current or higher speed
i
왘 Step on the brake pedal.
2 Set current or lower speed The last stored speed is canceled when
3 Cancel cruise control or you turn off the engine.
4 Resume at previously set speed 왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Saving current speed
Cruise control will be canceled. The
왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired last speed set will be stored for later
speed. use.
왘 Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
The current speed is set.
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
216
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting stored speed Setting a higher speed i

(“Resume” function) When you use the cruise control lever
왘 Lift the cruise control lever to
position 1 and hold it up until the de- to decelerate, the transmission will au-
Warning! G sired speed is reached. tomatically downshift if the engine’s
braking power does not brake the vehi-
왘 Release the cruise control lever.
The speed stored in memory should only be cle sufficiently.
set again if prevailing road conditions per- The new speed is set.
mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration Fine adjustment in 1 mph
differences arising from returning to preset i (Canada: 1 km/h) increments
speed could cause an accident and/or seri- Depressing the accelerator pedal does
ous injury to you and others. not deactivate cruise control. After Faster
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing),
cruise control will resume the last 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever to direction of arrow 1.
speed set.
position 4.
The cruise control will resume the last Slower
Setting a lower speed
previously set speed. 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
왘 Depress the cruise control lever to
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator position 2 and hold it down until the direction of arrow 2.
pedal. desired speed is reached.
왘 Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
217
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic*
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to traffic and road conditions
Warning! G
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
and to provide the steering, braking and oth- Distronic requires familiarity with its opera-
cruise control system increases driving
er driving inputs necessary to retain control tional characteristics. We strongly recom-
convenience afforded by the cruise control
of the vehicle. mend that you review the following
during travel on expressways and other
major roads. information carefully before operating the
system.
앫 If the Distronic distance sensor detects Warning! G
a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
your vehicle speed will be reduced so Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed i
that you follow that vehicle at a preset adjustment reduction capability is intended For operation in the USA only: This de-
distance. to make cruise control more effective and vice complies with Part 15 of the
앫 If there is no vehicle directly ahead of usable when traffic speeds vary. However, it FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
you, Distronic will function in the same is not intended to, nor does it, replace the following two conditions:
way as cruise control (컄 page 222). need for extreme care. The responsibility for
앫 this device may not cause harmful
the vehicle speed and the distance to the ve-
interference, and
hicle ahead, including most importantly
Warning! G brake operation to assure safe stopping dis- 앫 this device must accept any inter-
tance, always rests with the driver. ference received, including interfer-
Distronic adaptive cruise control is no sub- ence that may cause undesired
Distronic cannot take street and traffic con-
stitute for active driving involvement. It does operation.
ditions into account.
not react to stationary objects, nor recog-
Any unauthorized modification to this
nize or predict the curvature and lane layout
device could void the user’s authority
or the movement of vehicles ahead.
to operate the equipment.
Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20%
of the vehicle’s braking power.
218
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning! G Warning! G Distronic is designed and intended only to

maintain a set speed and keep a set dis-
Distronic cannot take street and traffic con- Close attention to road and traffic condi- tance from moving objects in front of it.
ditions into account. Only use Distronic if tions is imperative at all times, regardless of
the road, weather and traffic conditions whether or not Distronic is activated.
make it advisable to travel at a steady Warning! G
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on wind-
speed. ing roads or in heavy traffic because condi- The “Resume” function should only be oper-
tions do not allow safe driving at a steady ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
speed. ously set speed and wishes to resume this
Warning! G Distronic will not react to stationary objects particular preset speed.
in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slip-
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
pery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Switch off Distronic:
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight
distance conditions. Do not use Distronic 앫 when changing from the left to the right
during conditions of fog and heavy rain, lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
snow or sleet. in the left lane
앫 when entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp
앫 in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
In these situations, Distronic will continue to
maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
219
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic displays in the speedometer Under no circumstances should the

dial driver await the intermittent warning
sound before braking. See the follow-
ing warning note.
The intermittent warning sound ceases
and the red DTR warning lamp l
goes out when the necessary distance
to the vehicle ahead is again estab-
lished.
1 Segments
If Distronic detects a vehicle directly
1 Set speed ahead, the segments from the speed of the
If Distronic is activated, one or two seg- vehicle ahead to the set speed come on.
ments come on around the set speed. If Distronic calculates that there is a dan-
ger of collision:
i
The vehicle speed displayed on the 앫 The DTR warning lamp l in the in-
speedometer can briefly vary from the strument cluster comes on red.
speed setting on the Distronic system. 앫 An intermittent warning sounds.
왘 Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid
a collision.
220
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic menu in the control system

Warning! G Warning! G In the Distronic menu you can read the cur-
An intermittent warning sounds and the Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maxi- rent settings for Distronic. What appears in
DTR warning lamp in the instrument cluster mum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). the display depends on whether Distronic
is illuminated if the Distronic system calcu- This corresponds to about 20% of the maxi- and the distance warning function are
lates that the distance to the vehicle ahead mum deceleration ability of your vehicle. turned on or off.
and your vehicle’s current speed indicate Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
that Distronic will not be capable of slowing restore the preset distance or to maintain until you see one of the following dis-
the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the pre- the speed. The brake pedal is automatically plays.
set following distance, which creates a dan- applied as this happens which results in the
ger of a collision. brake pedal moving.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, in-
the distance to the vehicle in front of you. cluding the area under the brake pedal. Ob-
The warning sound is intended as a final cau- jects stored in this area may impair pedal
tion that you have not interceded with your movement which could interfere with the
own braking inputs to avoid a potentially braking ability of the Distronic system.
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the op-
eration of the warning signal to intercede Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
with your own braking, as that will result in – your foot could become caught.
potentially dangerous emergency braking
which will not always result in an impact be-
ing avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
221
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic deactivated Distronic activated Cruise control lever

If Distronic is deactivated you can see the If you turn Distronic on, you will see the set The Distronic system is operated by means
standard display of Distronic in the multi- speed in the multifunction display for of the cruise control lever.
function display. about five seconds. If Distronic is
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
activated, you can see the following dis-
lever found on the left-hand side of the
play in the multifunction display.
steering column.
1 Vehicle ahead, if detected

2 Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3 Preset distance threshold to vehicle 1 Distronic activated
ahead
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning
function 1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Deactivate Distronic
4 Resume at previously set speed
222
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating Distronic Setting the current speed Setting a higher speed

You can activate Distronic if: 왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
speed. direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 222) to
앫 you are driving between 25 mph
increase vehicle speed in increments
(40 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h) 왘 Briefly lift or depress the cruise control
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
lever.
앫 the ESP is activated (컄 page 82)
Distronic is activated and the current
If Distronic has not been activated after
speed is set. The stored speed is displayed in the
pressing the cruise control lever you will
multifunction display for approximately
see the message --- in the multifunction 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
five seconds (컄 page 222), and one or
display. pedal.
two segments around the stored speed
In the following cases you cannot activate i come on on the speedometer
Distronic: (컄 page 220).
If you do not take your foot off the
앫 Up to two minutes after starting the en- accelerator completely, the following
gine
i
message will appear in the multifunc-
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
앫 When you brake tion display:
not deactivate Distronic. After brief ac-
Distronic override. The distance to a
앫 If you have set the parking brake celeration (e.g. for passing), cruise con-
slower moving vehicles in front of you
trol will resume the last speed set.
앫 If the gear selector lever is in will not be set. Your vehicle speed will
position P, R or N then be determined only by the accel-
erator pedal position.
앫 If the ESP is switched off
223
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a lower speed Fine adjustment in 1 mph Setting stored speed

왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the (Canada: 1 km/h) increments (“Resume” function)
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 222) to
decrease vehicle speed in increments
Faster
Warning! G
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 222). The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions per-
The stored speed is displayed in the mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
multifunction display for approximately differences arising from returning to preset
five seconds (컄 page 222), and one or speed could cause an accident and/or seri-
two segments around the stored speed ous injury to you and others.
come on on the speedometer
(컄 page 220).
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
i direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 222).
When you use the cruise control lever Distronic is activated and set to the last
to decelerate, the transmission will au- stored speed.
tomatically downshift if the rate of de- 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
celeration is too low. pedal.
224
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Deactivating Distronic Distronic deactivates automatically when: Setting the following distance in
Distronic
There are several ways to deactivate the 앫 you set the parking brake
Distronic system: You can set the specified following dis-
앫 you drive slower than 25 mph
tance for Distronic by varying the time set-
왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the (40 km/h)
ting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using
direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 222).
앫 the ESP is active (컄 page 82) or you de- this time setting and the current speed of
or activate the ESP your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets
왘 Step on the brake pedal. 앫 you move the transmission selector le- the required following distance to the vehi-
ver into position N cle ahead. The set distance will be shown
Distronic will be deactivated. The last in the multifunction display field.
speed set will be stored in memory. A signal will sound. The Distronic off
message appears in the multifunction The thumbwheel for making the time set-
i display for approximately five seconds. ting is located on the lower section of the
The following message will appear in center console.
the multifunction display for approxi-
Warning! G
mately five seconds: Distronic off. Warning! G
The last stored speed is deleted when Distronic switches off and releases the
you turn off the engine. brakes when the vehicle decelerates below It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
the minimum speed of approximately select the appropriate setting given road
25 mph (40 km/h) by operation of the sys- conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
tem. At that time the driver must apply the style and applicable laws and driving recom-
brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed fur- mendations for safe following distance.
ther or bring it to a stop.
225
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Decreasing distance ahead is sufficient again without applying

the brake pedal. In this case the distance
Decreasing the distance setting tells
warning lamp also extinguishes.
Distronic to maintain a shorter following
distance to the vehicle ahead.
왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ®. Warning! G
If the DTR warning lamp l in the instru-
Distance warning function
ment cluster comes on while driving and/or
When Distronic is deactivated, this func- an intermittent warning sounds, immediate
tion will continue to warn you when recog- attention on the part of the driver is re-
1 Distance warning function on/off nizing a stationary obstacle or a slower quired.
switch vehicle moving in the vehicle’s path and
2 Control lamp As required by the traffic situation, apply the
the danger of a collision exists:
3 Thumbwheel for setting distance brakes and navigate around a possible ob-
앫 The distance warning lamp l in the stacle. However, do not drive by relying on
Increasing distance instrument cluster comes on. the distance warning function, as this will re-
sult in an emergency braking application.
Increasing the distance setting tells 앫 An intermittent warning sounds.
Especially depending on road surface condi-
Distronic to maintain a greater following If these warnings are issued, you must tions and driver reaction, this will not always
distance to the vehicle ahead. brake manually to maintain a safe distance enable you to avoid a collision.
왘 Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ¯. and avoid a collision with the vehicle
ahead.
i
When pressing the brake pedal, the warn-
Complex driving situations are not al-
ing sound stops. The warning sound also
ways fully recognized by Distronic. This
stops when the distance to the vehicle
could result in wrong or missing dis-
tance warnings.
226
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating Driving with Distronic

Distronic regulates only the distance be-
왘 Press button 1. This section describes a number of driving tween your vehicle and those directly ahead
situations where special precaution is re- of it, but does not register stationary objects
Indicator lamp 2 on the button comes
quired on the part of the driver. Be pre- in the road, e.g.:
on. A loudspeaker symbol appears in
pared to brake in such situations. This will 앫
the multifunction display (컄 page 222). A stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
deactivate the Distronic system.
앫 A disabled vehicle
Deactivating
앫 An oncoming vehicle
왘 Press button 1. Warning! G
The driver must always be on the alert, ob-
Indicator lamp 2 on the button goes Distronic works to maintain the speed se- serve all traffic and intercede as required by
out. No loudspeaker symbol appears in lected by the driver unless a moving obsta- steering or braking the vehicle.
the multifunction display. cle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g. fol-
lowing another vehicle ahead of you at a dis- Warning! G
tance set by Distronic). This means that:
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy
앫 Your vehicle can pass another vehicle road conditions.
after you change lanes
앫 While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in
front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front
of it, then your vehicle could accelerate
to the previously selected speed.
227
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning i Turns and bends

system is a dirty sensor (located behind If the message “Distronic - clean sen-
the hood grille), especially at times of snow sor!” See oper. manual disappears dur-
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case, ing driving and the last speed stored
Distronic will switch off, and the message flashes for approximately five seconds,
Currently unavailable see oper. the dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved;
manual appears in the multifunction dis- Distronic works again.
play.
For cleaning and care of the Distronic sen-
sor, see “Cleaning the Distronic system
sensor” (컄 page 307).
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect
a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect
one too soon. This may cause your vehicle
to brake late or unexpectedly.
228
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Offset driving Lane changing Narrow vehicles
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle Because of its narrow profile, the vehicle
from your direct line of travel may not be changing lanes. There will be insufficient traveling near the edge of the roadway has
detected by Distronic. There will be insuffi- distance to the lane-changing vehicle. not yet been detected by Distronic. There
cient distance to the vehicle ahead. will be insufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
229
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Airmatic DC (Dual Control)* The following suspension styles are 왘 Start the engine.
available:
왘 Press the damping button 1 until the
Airmatic automatically selects the opti-
앫 Comfortable desired suspension style is set.
mum suspension tuning and ride height for
your vehicle. The Airmatic consists of two Both indicator lamps 2 are off. i
components: 앫 Sporty I The selected suspension style is stored
앫 Adaptive Damping System (ADS) in memory, even after the SmartKey is
One indicator lamp 2 is on.
앫 Vehicle level control removed from the starter switch.
앫 Sporty II
The ADS automatically selects the opti- Both indicator lamps 2 are on.
mum damping for the respective driving
i
conditions. At the same time the suspen- In the sporty suspension style the vehi-
sion is set to either sporty or comfort. cle is lowered up to 0.6 in (15 mm).
Suspension tuning
The suspension tuning is set according to:
앫 Your driving style
앫 Road surface conditions
앫 Your choice of suspension style,
“sporty I”, “sporty II” or “comfortable”, 1 Damping button
which you select using the damping 2 Indicator lamps
button.
230
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Vehicle level control The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or Select the “Raised” level only when re-
lowered according to the selected level quired by current driving conditions. Oth-
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
setting and to the vehicle speed: erwise
height to
앫 At a speed above approximately above 앫 fuel consumption may increase
앫 reduce fuel consumption
68 mph (110 km/h) and the sporty
앫 handling may be impaired
앫 increase vehicle safety suspension style selected
The following vehicle chassis ride heights (컄 page 230), ride height is reduced
can be selected: automatically by up to approximately Warning! G
0.6 in (15 mm).
앫 Normal To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
앫 With decreasing speed, the ride height
앫 Raised and feet away from wheel housing area, and
is again raised to the “Normal” level. stay away from under the vehicle when low-
ering the vehicle chassis.
i
These height adjustments are so small
that you may not notice any change.
231
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The following vehicle level settings can be

selected when the vehicle is stationary and
the engine is running:
Vehicle level when Use for Ride height increase Automatic lowering Indicator lamp (컄 page 232)
stationary over normal
Normal Normal operation None Max. approx. 0.6 in (15 mm) Lamp off
Raised Driving with snow Approx. 0.8 in (20 mm) Max. approx. 1.4 in (35 mm) Lamp on
chains or very
rough road sur-
face conditions
The button is located in the lower section 왘 Briefly press button 1 to change from for approximately five minutes, the set-
of the center console. “Normal” level to “Raised” level. When ting “Raised” is canceled. The message
vehicle is at “Raised” level, pressing Level selec. canceled appears in the
the switch will return the vehicle to multifunction display.
“Normal” level.
If you do not drive in this speed range,
i the “Raised” level remains stored even
At a speed of approximately above if the SmartKey is removed from the
75 mph (120 km/h) or if the speed starter switch.
amounts to between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h)
1 Vehicle level control button

2 Indicator lamp
232
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic system* (Parking assist) The Parktronic system monitors the sur-
Warning! G roundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
Warning! G Make sure that no persons or animals are in rear bumper.
the area in which you are maneuvering. You
The Parktronic system is a supplemental could otherwise injure them.
system. It is not intended to, nor does it re-
place, the need for extreme care. The re- The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
sponsibility during parking and other critical designed to assist the driver during park-
maneuvers always rests with the driver. ing maneuvers. It visually and audibly indi-
Special attention must be paid to objects cates the relative distance between the
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes vehicle and an obstacle.
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road The Parktronic system is automatically ac-
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by tivated when you switch on the ignition
the system and can damage the vehicle. and release the parking brake. The 1 Sensors in the front bumper
The operational function of the Parktronic Parktronic system deactivates at speeds
system can be affected by dirty sensors, es- over 11 mph (18 km/h). At lower speeds
pecially at times of snow and ice. See the Parktronic system turns on again.
“Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors”
(컄 page 307).
Interference caused by other ultrasonic sig-
nals (e.g. working jackhammers or the air
brakes of trucks) can cause the system to
send erratic indications, and should be tak-
en into consideration.
233
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Range of the sensors Front sensors Minimum distance

To function properly, the sensors must be
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm) Center approx. 8 in (20 cm)
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
sensors regularly, being careful not to Corners approx. 48 in (120 cm) Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm)
scratch or damage the sensors.
Rear sensors If the system detects an obstacle in this
range, all the warning lamps come on and
Center approx. 48 in (120 cm) you hear a warning signal. If the obstacle is
Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm) closer than the minimum distance, the ac-
tual distance might no longer be indicated
by the system.
!
During parking maneuvers, pay special
attention to objects located above or
below the height of the sensors (e.g.
planters or trailer hitches). The
Parktronic system will not detect such
objects at close range and damage to
your vehicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sourc-
es (e.g. truck air brakes or jackham-
mers) may impair the operation of the
Parktronic system.
234
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators Each warning indicator is divided into six 앫 Front area: An intermittent acoustic
Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel- yellow and two red segments for either warning will sound as the first red seg-
ative distance between the sensors and an side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system ment comes on and a constant acous-
obstacle. The warning indicator for the is ready when the border around the indi- tic warning lasting a maximum of
front area is located above the center air cator is illuminated. three seconds will sound for the sec-
ond red segment. The signal is can-
vents in the dashboard. The warning indi- The position of the gear selector lever de-
cator for the rear area is integrated in the celed when the selector lever is placed
termines which warning indicators will be
in position P and the parking brake is
rear trim. activated.
activated.
Selector lever po- Warning indicator 앫 Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
sition warning will sound as the first red seg-
D Front area activated ment comes on and a constant acous-
R or N Front and rear area tic warning lasting a maximum of
activated three seconds will sound for the sec-
ond red segment. The signal is can-
P Neither activated celed when the selector lever is placed
in position D or P and the parking
As your vehicle approaches an object, one brake is activated.
Front area warning indicator or more segments will come on, depending
on the distance. When the eighth segment
1 Left side of the vehicle comes on, you have reached the minimum
2 Right side of the vehicle distance.
235
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching the Parktronic system Switching off the Parktronic system If only the red segments of the Parktronic
on/off system warning indicator come on and no
왘 Press button 1.
warning sounds, then the sensors of the
You can switch off the Parktronic system
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. Parktronic system are dirty or malfunction-
manually.
ing. Malfunction may also be caused by in-
The Parktronic system switch is located in Switching on the Parktronic system terference from other radio or ultrasonic
the lower section of the center console. signals. The Parktronic system will switch
itself off after 20 seconds.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
왘 Clean Parktronic system sensors
Parktronic system malfunction (컄 page 307).
There is a malfunction in the Parktronic 왘 Switch on the ignition.

system if the red segments of the or
Parktronic system warning indicator come
왘 Check Parktronic system operation at
on and a warning sounds. The Parktronic
another location to rule out interfer-
system will switch itself off after
ence from outside radio or ultrasonic
30 seconds and the indicator lamp on the
1 Parktronic system on/off signals.
Parktronic system switch comes on.
2 Indicator lamp
왘 Have the Parktronic system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter as soon as possible.
236
Controls in detail
Loading
왔 Loading
Roof rack* Preparing roof rack installation Ski sack*
왘 Open trim 1 at the trim strips in the
roof.
Warning! G
왘 Secure the roof rack according to man-
Use only roof racks approved by ufacturer’s instructions for installation.
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to
avoid damage to the vehicle. Follow manu- !
facturer’s installation instructions. Load the roof rack in such a way that
the vehicle cannot be damaged while
driving.
Make sure
Unfolding and loading
앫 you can fully raise the
sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama 왘 Fold armrest down (arrow).
sliding/pop-up roof* 왘 Swing cover 1 down. 컄컄
앫 you can fully open the trunk
1 Trim
237
Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄
왘 Open hook and loop strap 1. 왘 From trunk, slide skis into ski sack. 왘 Wrap strap around ski sack and arm-
rest.
왘 Pull ski sack into passenger compart-
ment and unfold. Warning! G 왘 Close clasp (arrows) and pull strap
tight to firmly secure skis.
The ski sack is designed for up to four pairs
of skis. Do not load the ski sack with other
objects.
Always fasten the ski sack securely. In an
accident, an unfastened ski sack can cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
238
Controls in detail
Loading
Unloading and folding
왘 Connect snap hook 1 of front strap to 왘 Close ski sack compartment cover.
eye 2 located on center tunnel in 왘 Loosen strap, open clasp by pressing
front of rear seat bench. tabs together (arrows).
왘 Unload skis.
왘 Close flap in trunk.
왘 Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise
and place folded ski sack inside recess
of backrest.
239
Controls in detail
Loading
Removal of ski sack

For removal of the ski sack, we recom-
Warning! G
mend that you contact an authorized When expanding the luggage compartment,
Mercedes-Benz Center. always fold the seat cushions fully forward.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the back-
Warning! G rests must remain properly locked in the up-
right position.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open while
the ski sack is removed. Deadly carbon In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in- den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
1 Release handle
terior, resulting in unconsciousness and around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
death. to vehicle occupants unless the items are i
securely fastened in the vehicle.
If tall persons have occupied the driv-
Always use the cargo tie down rings er’s and front passenger seats, it may
i
(컄 page 244). be necessary to move these seats for-
To prevent unauthorized persons from
ward slightly in order to fold the rear
access to the trunk, always close the
Folding the backrest forward seat backrests forward.
cover.
! 왘 Pull release handle 1.
Split rear bench seat* You must always release the seat cush-
The seat cushion automatically springs
ion and fold it up before folding the seat
To expand the trunk, you can fold down the upward slightly.
backrests forward. The upholstery on
left and right rear seat backrests.
the seat backrest may otherwise be
The two sections can be folded down sep- damaged.
arately to enlarge the trunk.
240
Controls in detail
Loading
Returning seat backrest to original po-

sition
1 Seat cushion 왘 Pull the handle in the trunk.

2 Seat backrest
The seat backrest is released and the
왘 Grip the back of seat cushion 1 and head restraints fold back. 1 Seat cushion
fold forward. 2 Seat backrest
왘 Fold the seat backrest forward.
왘 Push the rear seat head restraints all 왘 Swing seat backrest 2 to the rear until
the way in. ! it engages.
Make sure the head restraints fit all the 왘 Swing seat cushion 1 to the rear and
i way into the seat cushion pockets. This press the center front of the cushion
If the rear center seat is to be occupied will prevent the backrests from being until it audibly engages. 컄컄
while driving, it may be necessary to damaged during loading.
fold the seat belt buckle up again.
241
Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄 Expanding the cargo area*

Warning! G
Removing the rear seat cushions will pro-
Always lock backrest in its upright position vide you with a larger, flat cargo area.
when rear seat bench is occupied, or the ex-
왘 Fold the seat cushions and the back-
tended trunk compartment is not in use.
rests forward.
Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the backrest. 왘 Remove the head restraints
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
(컄 page 116).
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown 왘 Fold the backrest into the vertical posi-
왘 Swing the head restraint forward by around inside the vehicle, and cause injury tion.
hand until it engages. to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo.
1 Release lever
왘 Pull seat cushion release lever 1 and
remove the seat cushion by pulling it
upward.
242
Controls in detail
Loading
! Loading instructions The handling characteristics of a fully load-

Leave the seat cushion hinge in this po- ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis-
sition. The upholstery could be dam- tribution. It is therefore recommended to
aged if you fold the hinge back. load the vehicle according to the illustra-
tions shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
Always place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should al-
ways be kept as low as possible since it in-
The total load weight including vehicle oc- fluences the handling characteristics of
cupants and luggage/cargo should not ex- the vehicle.
ceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated
on the certification tag which can be found
왘 Fold the seat backrest forward. on the left door pillar.
243
Controls in detail
Loading
Cargo tie-down rings* Rear seat

Warning! G There is a cargo tie-down ring located on
Always fasten items being carried as secure- each side of the footwell under the rear
ly as possible. seat.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-

den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause in-
jury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care Four rings 1 are located in the trunk.
when transporting cargo. Put luggage or car-
왘 Carefully secure cargo by applying
go in the trunk if possible. Do not pile lug-
even load on all rings with rope of suffi-
gage or cargo higher than the seat backs.
cient strength to hold down the cargo.
Do not place anything on the rear-window
shelf. Always follow loading instructions
(컄 page 243).
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter ve-
hicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
and death.
244
Controls in detail
Useful features
왔 Useful features
Storage compartments Parcel net in front passenger footwell Glove box
Warning! G
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
gage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs. Do not place anything on the shelf
below the rear window. A small convenience parcel net is located 1 Glove box lid release
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy in the front passenger footwell. It is for 2 Compartment for mobile
objects. small and light items, such as road maps, phone/glasses
mail, etc.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
Opening the glove box
about and injuring vehicle occupants during Warning! G 왘 Push lid release 1.
an accident.
The glove box lid opens downward.
The parcel net is intended for storing
light-weight items only.
Closing the glove box
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
왘 Push lid up to close.
fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel net.
The parcel net cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
245
Controls in detail
Useful features
i 왘 Press button 1 to open. 왘 Briefly press the marking in the back of

Prior to closing the glove box, close the The control panel swings out upward the cover.
compartment for glasses first. and the storage compartment extends The cover opens.
out.
Storage compartment in the center
console (no CD changer* installed) i
Never place any medications in the
storage compartment. If there is a pow-
er failure, the storage compartment
cannot be opened.
왘 Press button 1 to close.
Cup holder in the center console 왘 Briefly press marking on the cup hold-
er.
The cup holder extends automatically.
1 Opening/closing button
i
The cup holder can be removed for
cleaning. Clean the cup holder only
with clear, lukewarm water.
Make sure to insert the cup holder in
the guides when reinstalling it.
246
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage space under armrest Front center console storage compart-

ment ventilation
The front center console storage compart-
ment under the armrest in your vehicle
may have its own air vent. The air temper-
ature is about the same as that of the
dashboard air vents.
If the front center console storage com-
partment in your vehicle is equipped with
1 Left cup holder its own air vent, the lever is located in the
2 Right cup holder 1 Storage compartment front center vent.
2 Storage tray
Warning! G Opening storage tray
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed 왘 Pull handle 2.
while traveling. Place only containers that fit
into the cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids Opening storage compartment
on open containers and do not fill containers
왘 Pull handle 1.
to a height where the contents, especially
hot liquids, could spill during vehicle maneu-
vers.
1 Lever
왘 To open air vent slide the lever up.
왘 To close air vent slide the lever down. 컄컄
247
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄 i Ruffled storage bags Storage compartment in the rear arm-

The compartment can get very warm rest
due to its confined space. When storing
heat sensitive objects (e.g. groceries)
in the compartment, close the air vent
while heating the passenger compart-
ment
Storage compartment in the rear cen-

ter console
Ruffled storage bags are located on the
back of the front seats. 왘 Press the handle upward and fold the
armrest up.
Warning! G
The ruffled storage bag is intended for stor-
ing light-weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
왘 Briefly press the top of the compart- ruffled storage bag.
ment.
The ruffled storage bag cannot protect
It extends automatically. transported goods in the event of an acci-
dent.
248
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear cup holder Ashtrays i

A small rubber mat is located in the
Center console ashtray glove box. If you wish to store
coins/tokens, remove the ashtray in-
sert and insert the rubber mat in its
place. Empty ashtray insert and store it
in a convenient location in the vehicle.
Warning! G
왘 Briefly press the front of the center Only use rubber mat in conjunction with
armrest. storing coins/tokens. Always remove rub-
The cup holder extends automatically. ber mat and/or all other contents and rein-
Opening ashtray sert ashtray insert before placing hot
cigarettes or other hot smoking materials in
Warning! G 왘 Briefly press the marking on the bot-
this compartment.
tom of cover 1.
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed The ashtray opens automatically.
while traveling. Place only containers that fit
into the cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids
on open containers and do not fill containers
to a height where the contents, especially
hot liquids, could spill during vehicle maneu-
vers.
249
Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing ashtray insert Reinstalling ashtray insert Cigarette lighter

왘 Install insert by pushing it back into
The cigarette lighter is located in the cen-
Warning! G frame until it engages again.
ter console compartment in front of the
armrest (컄 page 26).
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle Rear seat ashtray
standing still. Set the parking brake to se-
cure vehicle from movement. Move gear se-
lector lever to position N. With gear selector
lever in position N, turn off the engine.
왘 Secure vehicle from movement by set-

ting the parking brake. Move the gear
selector lever to position N.
Now you have more room to take out
the insert. 1 Cigarette lighter
Opening rear seat ashtray 왘 Turn ignition on.
왘 Push sliding button 2 to the right and
hold. 왘 Briefly press the top of the ashtray. 왘 Push in cigarette lighter 1.
왘 Grip and remove insert from ashtray The ashtray opens. The lighter will pop out automatically
frame. when hot.
250
Controls in detail
Useful features
12-V socket* Heated steering wheel*

Warning! G
The steering wheel heating warms up the
Never touch the heating element or sides of leather area of the steering wheel.
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
The stalk with the heated steering wheel
knob only.
switch is on the lower left-hand side of the
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the steering wheel.
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
The socket is located in the rear of the cen-
cle equipment may cause an accident
ter console storage compartment.
The socket can be used for accessories up
to a maximum of 180 W.
i
The lighter socket can be used to ac-
commodate electrical accessories up 1 Indicator lamp
to a maximum 85 W. 2 Switching off
3 Switching on
251
Controls in detail
Useful features
Switching on Telephone*
Warning! G
All lamps in the instrument cluster Warning! G Please do not forget that your primary re-
come on. sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
Never operate radio transmitters equipped attention to the road must always be
왘 Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the di-
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- his /her primary focus when driving. For
rection of arrow 3.
out being connected to an external antenna) your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
The steering wheel is heated. Indicator from inside the vehicle while the engine is ommend that you pull over to a safe location
lamp 1 comes on. running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- and stop before placing or taking a tele-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos- phone call.
Switching off sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious If you choose to use the telephone1 while
왘 Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc- personal injury. driving, please use the hands-free device
tion of arrow 2. and only use the telephone when road,
The heated steering wheel is turned off. Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele- weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
Indicator lamp 1 goes out. phone or a citizens band unit, should only jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
be used inside the vehicle if they are con- cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
i nected to an antenna that is installed on Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man-
The steering wheel heating does not the outside of the vehicle. agement and Data System) if road, weather
turn off automatically. The external antenna must be approved by and traffic conditions permit.
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho- 1
Observe all legal requirements.
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-
tion on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio trans-
mitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
252
Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid* The Tele Aid system

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is (Telematic Alarm Identification on De-
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- ! mand)
ly 14 m) every second. The initial activation of the Tele Aid sys-
The Tele Aid system consists of three
tem may only be performed by com-
types of response:
You can take and place telephone calls us- pleting the subscriber agreement and
placing an acquaintance call using the 앫 automatic and manual emergency
ing the s and t buttons on the
steering wheel. To carry out other tele- SOS button. Failure to complete either 앫 roadside assistance and
phone functions, use the control system of these steps will result in a system
that is not activated. If the system is 앫 information
(컄 page 134).
not activated, the indicator lamp in the The Tele Aid system is operational provid-
See separate operating manual for instruc- SOS button stays on after turning the ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
tions on how to use the telephone. SmartKey in starter switch to properly connected, not damaged and cel-
position 2, or pressing the lular and GPS coverage is available.
Warning! G KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
to position 2. The message Tele Aid –
be adjusted when using the volume control
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from not activated will be shown in the
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
using a cellular telephone while driving a ve- multifunction display for approximately
raise, press button æ and to lower,
hicle. Whether or not prohibited by law, for 10 seconds.
press button ç.
safety reasons, the driver should not use the
If you have any questions regarding ac-
cellular telephone while the vehicle is in mo- 왘 To activate, press the SOS button, the
tivation, please call the Response Cen-
tion. Roadside Assistance button • or
ter at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before an- the Information button ¡, depend-
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
swering or placing a call. ing on the type of response required.
253
Controls in detail
Useful features
i !
The SOS button is located above the in- The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular Warning! G
terior rear view mirror. network for communication and the
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
GPS (Global Positioning System) satel-
The Roadside Assistance button • the Roadside Assistance button and/or in
lites for vehicle location. If either of
and the Information button ¡ are the Information button remain illuminated
these signals are unavailable, the
located below the center armrest cov- constantly in red and/or the message TELE
Tele Aid system may not function and if
er. AID - VISIT WORKSHOP! is displayed in
this occurs, assistance must be sum-
the multifunction display after the system
moned by other means.
Shortly after the completion of your ac- self-check, a malfunction in the system has
quaintance call, you will receive a user ID been detected.
System self-check
and password via first call mail. By visiting If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid” Initially, after turning the ignition on, mal- above, the system may not operate as ex-
(USA only), you will have access to account functions are detected and indicated (the pected. Have the system checked at the
information, remote door unlock and indicator lamps in the SOS button, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
more. Roadside Assistance button • and the possible.
Information button ¡ stay on longer
than ten seconds or do not come on). The
message TELE AID – VISIT WORKSHOP! ap-
pears for approximately 10 seconds in the
254
Controls in detail
Useful features
Emergency calls tion display. All information relevant to the The Tele Aid system is available if:
emergency, such as the location of the ve-
An emergency call is initiated automatical- 앫 it has been activated and is operation-
hicle (determined by the GPS satellite loca-
ly: al. Activation requires a subscription
tion system), vehicle model, identification
for monitoring services, connection
앫 following an accident in which the number and color are generated.
and cellular air time
emergency tensioning devices (ETDs)
A voice connection between the Response
or air bags deploy 앫 the relevant cellular phone network
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
and GPS signals are available and pass
앫 if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away will be established automatically soon af-
the information on to the Response
alarm stays on for more than ter the emergency call has been initiated.
Center
20 seconds. See anti-theft alarm sys- When a voice connection is established,
tem (컄 page 89) and tow-away alarm the audio system mutes and the message i
(컄 page 90) TELE AID – EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE ap- Location of the vehicle on a map is only
An emergency call can also be initiated pears in the multifunction display. The Re- possible if the vehicle is able to receive
manually by opening the cover next to the sponse Center will attempt to determine signals from the GPS satellite network
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then more precisely the nature of the accident and pass the information on to the
briefly pressing the button located under provided they can speak to an occupant of Response Center.
the cover. See below for instructions on the vehicle.
initiating an emergency call manually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CONNECTING CALL appears in the multifunc-
tion display. When the connection is estab-
lished, the message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunc-
255
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually

If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is il- If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
luminated continuously and there was no vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, ve-
voice connection to the Response Center hicle in a dangerous road location), please
established, then the Tele Aid system could do not wait for voice contact after you have
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele- pressed the emergency button. Carefully
vant cellular phone network is not available). leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-
The message EMERGENCY CALL – tion. The Response Center will automatically
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction contact local emergency officials with the
display for approximately 10 seconds. 1 Cover vehicle’s approximate location if they re-
Should this occur, assistance must be sum- 2 SOS button ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
moned by other means. make voice contact with the vehicle occu-
왘 Briefly press on cover 1. pants.
The cover will open.
왘 Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
왘 Wait for a voice connection to the Re-
sponse Center.
왘 Close cover after the emergency call is
concluded.
256
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance button • TELE AID – ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE i

CALL ACTIVE appears in the multifunction The indicator lamp on the Roadside As-
Located below the center armrest cover is
the Roadside Assistance button •. display. sistance button • remains illumi-
왘 Describe the nature of the need for as- nated in red for approximately
왘 Press and hold the button (for longer
sistance. 10 seconds during the system
than 2 seconds).
self-check after turning the ignition on
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside As- (together with the SOS button and the
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
sistance dispatcher will be initiated. Information button ¡).
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
The button will flash while the call is in
tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized See system self-check (컄 page 254)
progress. The message ROADSIDE AS-
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such when the indicator lamp does not come
SISTANCE – CONNECTING CALL will ap-
as labor and/or towing, charges may ap- on in red or stays on longer than ap-
pear in the multifunction display.
ply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance man- proximately 10 seconds.
When the connection is established, the ual for more information. If the indicator lamp on the Roadside
message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –
These programs are only available in the Assistance button • is illuminated
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunc-
USA: continuously and there was no voice
tion display. The Tele Aid system will trans-
connection to the Response Center es-
mit data generating the vehicle 앫 Sign and Drive services: Services such
tablished, then the Tele Aid system
identification number, model, color and lo- as a jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
could not initiate a Roadside Assis-
cation (subject to availability of cellular the replacement of a flat tire with the
tance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
and GPS signals). vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
phone network is not available). The
A voice connection between the Roadside 앫 Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This func- message ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE –
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants tion permits the Mercedes-Benz Road- CALL FAILED appears in the multifunc-
of the vehicle will be established. When a side Assistance dispatcher to tion display.
voice connection is established, the download malfunction codes and actu-
audio system mutes and the message al vehicle data.
257
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance calls can be ter- lished. When a voice connection is estab- See system self-check (컄 page 254)
minated using the tbutton on the lished, the audio system is muted and the when the indicator lamp does not come
multifunction steering wheel. message TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE on in red or stays on longer than ap-
appears in the multifunction display. Infor- proximately ten seconds.
Information button ¡ mation regarding the operation of your ve-
If the indicator lamp on the Information
hicle, the nearest authorized
The Information button ¡ is located be- Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
button ¡ is illuminated continuous-
low the center armrest cover. USA products and services is available to
ly and there was no voice connection to
the Response Center established, then
왘 Press and hold button (for longer than you.
the Tele Aid system could not initiate
2 seconds). For more details concerning the Tele Aid an Information call (e.g. the relevant
A call to the Customer Assistance Cen- system, please visit www.mbusa.com and cellular phone network is not avail-
ter will be initiated. The button will use your ID and password (sent to you sep- able). The message INFO –
flash while the call is in progress. The arately) to learn more (USA only). CALL FAILED appears in the multifunc-
message INFO – CONNECTING CALL will tion display.
appear in the multifunction display. i
The indicator lamp on the Information Information calls can be terminated us-
When the connection is established, the
button ¡ remains illuminated in red ing the tbutton on the multifunc-
message INFO – CALL CONNECTED appears tion steering wheel.
for approximately 10 seconds during
in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid
the system self-check after turning the
system will transmit data generating the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
vehicle identification number, model, color
position 2 (together with the SOS but-
and location (subject to availability of cel-
ton and the Roadside Assistance
lular and GPS signals).
button •).
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be estab-
258
Controls in detail
Useful features
! Upgrade signals !
If the indicator lamps do not start flash- The Tele Aid system processes calls using If the indicator lamp continues to flash
ing after pressing one of the buttons or the following priority: or the system does not reset, contact
remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Response Center at
앫 Automatic emergency – First priority
the Tele Aid system has detected a 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
fault or the service is not currently ac- 앫 Manual emergency – Second priority 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
tive, and may not initiate a call. Visit 앫 Roadside assistance – Third priority Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
and have the system checked or con- 앫 Information – Fourth priority (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Cus-
tact the Response Center at Should a higher priority call be initiated tomer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or while you are connected, an upgrade (al- Canada.
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon ternating) tone will be heard, and the ap-
as possible. propriate indicator lamp will flash. If i
certain information such as vehicle identi- The indicator lamp in the respective
fication number or customer information is button flashes until the call is conclud-
not available, the operator may need to re- ed. Calls can only be terminated by a
transmit. Response Center or Customer Assis-
During this time you will hear a beep and tance Center representative except
voice contact will be interrupted. Voice Roadside Assistance and Information
contact will resume once the retransmis- calls, which can also be terminated by
sion is completed. Once a call is conclud- pressing button t on the multifunc-
ed, a beep will be heard and the respective tion steering wheel.
indicator lamp will stop flashing. The
COMAND system operation will resume.
259
Controls in detail
Useful features
i Remote door unlock The Response Center will then unlock your
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, vehicle with the remote door unlocking
In case you have locked your vehicle unin-
the COMAND system audio is muted feature.
tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the selected mode (radio or CD) and the reserve SmartKey is not handy: i
pauses. The optional cellular phone (if
왘 Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response The remote door unlock feature is avail-
installed) switches off. If you must use
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) able if the relevant cellular phone net-
this phone, the vehicle must be parked.
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). work is available.
Disconnect the coiled cord and place
the call. The COMAND navigation* You will be asked to provide your pass- The SOS button will flash and the mes-
system (if engaged) will continue to word which you provided when you sage EMERGENCY CALL –
run. The display in the instrument clus- completed the subscriber agreement. CALL CONNECTED will appear in the mul-
ter is available for use, and spoken 왘 Then return to your vehicle and pull the tifunction display to indicate receipt of
commands are only available by press- trunk recessed handle for a minimum the door unlock command.
ing the RPT button on the COMAND of 20 seconds until the SOS button is Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Re-
unit. A pop-up window will appear in flashing. sponse Center specialist will attempt
the COMAND display to indicate that a
The message EMERGENCY CALL – to establish voice contact with the ve-
Tele Aid call is in progress.
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multi- hicle occupants.
function display. If the trunk recessed handle was pulled
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi- for more than 20 seconds before door
cle via Internet using the ID and password unlock authorization was received by
sent to you shortly after the completion of the Response Center, you must wait
your acquaintance call. 15 minutes before pulling the trunk re-
cessed handle again.
260
Controls in detail
Useful features
Stolen vehicle tracking services Garage door opener

In the event your vehicle was stolen:
Warning! G
The built-in remote control is capable of
왘 Report the incident to the police. operating up to three separately controlled Before programming the integrated remote
devices, for example garage door openers, control to a garage door opener or gate op-
The police will issue a numbered inci-
gate openers, or other devices compatible erator, make sure that people and objects
dent report.
with HomeLink® or some other systems. are out of the way of the device to prevent
왘 Pass this number on to the potential harm or damage.
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along You can program the signal transmitter
buttons. When programming a garage door opener,
with your password issued to you when
the door moves up or down. When program-
you subscribed to the service.
ming a gate operator, the gate opens or
The Response Center will then attempt closes.
to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Do not use the integrated remote control
Aid system. Once the vehicle is locat- with any garage door opener that lacks safe-
ed, the Response Center will contact ty stop and reverse features as required by
the local law enforcement and you. The U.S. federal safety standards (this includes
vehicle’s location will only be provided any garage door opener model manufac-
to law enforcement. tured before April 1, 1982). A garage door
that cannot detect an object - signaling the
123 Signal transmitter key door to stop and reverse - does not meet
4 Indicator lamp current U.S. federal safety standards.
5 Hand-held transmitter button

6 Hand-held remote control trans-
mitter (not part of the vehicle
equipment)
261
Controls in detail
Useful features
i i Programming or reprogramming the in-

Certain types of garage door openers For operation in the USA only: tegrated remote control
are incompatible with the integrated This device complies with Part 15 of Step 1:
opener. If you should experience diffi- the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
culties with programming the transmit- the following two conditions:
ter, contact your authorized Step 2:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
Mercedes-Benz Center, or call interference, and 왘 If you have previously programmed an
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance integrated signal transmitter button
Center (in the USA only) at (2) this device must accept any inter-
and wish to retain its programming,
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer ference received, including interfer-
proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press
Service (in Canada) at ence that may cause undesired
and hold the two outer signal transmit-
1-800-387-0100. operation.
ter buttons 1 and 3 and release
Any unauthorized modification to this them only when the indicator light be-
device could void the user’s authority gins to flash after approximately 20
to operate the equipment. seconds (do not hold the button for
longer than 30 seconds). This proce-
dure erases any previous settings for
all three channels and initializes the
memory. If you later wish to program a
second and/or third hand-held trans-
mitter to the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this
step and begin directly with step 3.
262
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 3: i i
왘 Hold the end of the hand-held remote The indicator lamp 4 flashes the first If the indicator lamp 4 blinks rapidly
control transmitter 6 of the device time the signal transmitter button is for about two seconds and then turns
you wish to train approximately 2 to programmed. If this button has already to a constant light, continue with pro-
5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the surface been programmed, the indicator lamp gramming steps 8 through 12 as your
of the integrated remote control locat- will only start flashing after 20 sec- garage door opener may be equipped
ed on the interior rear view mirror, onds. with the “rolling code” feature.
keeping the indicator lamp 4 in view.
Step 4: Step 5: Step 7:
왘 When the indicator lamp 4 flashes 왘 To program the remaining two buttons,
왘 Using both hands, simultaneously
press the hand-held transmitter rapidly, release both buttons. repeat the steps above starting with
button 5 and the desired integrated step 3.
Step 6:
signal transmitter button (1, 2
왘 Press and hold the just-trained inte-
or 3). Do not release the buttons until
grated signal transmitter button and
completing step 5.
observe the indicator lamp 4.
The indicator lamp 4 on the integrat-
If the indicator lamp 4 stays on con-
ed remote control will flash, first slowly
stantly, programming is complete and
and then rapidly.
your device should activate when the
integrated signal transmitter button is
pressed and released.
263
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rolling code programming Step 9: Step 12:

To train a garage door opener (or other roll- 왘 Press “training” button on the garage 왘 Confirm the garage door operation by
ing code devices) with the rolling code fea- door opener motor head unit. pressing the programmed integrated
ture, follow these instructions after signal transmitter button (1, 2
The “training light” is activated.
completing the “Programming” portion or 3).
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow-
ing step. Step 13:
person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.) 왘 To program the remaining two buttons,
Step 10:
repeat the steps above starting with
Step 8: 왘 Firmly press, hold for two seconds and step 3.
왘 Locate “training” button on the garage release the programmed integrated
door opener motor head unit. signal transmitter button (1, 2 Gate operator/Canadian programming
or 3).
Exact location and color of the button Canadian radio-frequency laws require
may vary by garage door opener brand. Step 11: transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
Depending on manufacturer, the “train- 왘 Press, hold for two seconds and re- after several seconds of transmission
ing” button may also be referred to as lease same button a second time to which may not be long enough for the inte-
“learn”or “smart” button. If there is dif- complete the training process. grated signal transmitter to pick up the sig-
ficulty locating the transmitting button, nal during programming. Similar to this
refer to the garage door opener opera- Some garage door openers (or other rolling Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
tor’s manual. code equipped devices) may require you to are designed to “time-out” in the same
perform this procedure a third time to manner.
complete the training.
264
Controls in detail
Useful features
If you live in Canada or if you are having dif- Operation of integrated remote control i
ficulties programming a gate operator (re- If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
gardless of where you live) by using the of all three channels.
programming procedures, replace step 4 왘 Select and press the appropriate inte-
with the following: grated signal transmitter button (1,
2 or 3) to activate the remote con- Reprogramming a single integrated
Step 4: signal transmitter button
trolled device.
왘 Continue to press and hold the inte- To program a device using a signal trans-
The integrated remote control trans-
grated signal transmitter button (1, mitter continues to send the signal as mitter button previously trained, follow
2 or 3) while you press and re-press long as the button is pressed – up to these steps:
(“cycle”) your hand-held remote con- 20 seconds. 왘 Press and hold the desired signal trans-
trol transmitter 6 every two seconds
mitter button (1, 2 or 3). Do not re-
until the frequency signal has been Erasing the integrated remote control lease the button.
learned. Upon successful training, the memory
indicator lamp 4 will flash slowly and 왘 The indicator lamp will begin to flash af-
then rapidly after several seconds. 왘 Switch on ignition. ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the
왘 Simultaneously hold down the signal integrated signal transmitter button,
왘 Proceed with programming step 5 and
transmitter buttons 1 and 3, for ap- proceed with programming starting
step 6 to complete.
proximately 20 seconds, until the indi- with step 3.
cator lamp 4 blinks rapidly. Do not
hold for longer than 30 seconds.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
265
266
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
267
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
왔 The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find de- The more cautiously you treat your vehicle !
tailed information on operating, maintain- during the break-in period, the more satis- Additional instructions for AMG vehi-
ing and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later cles:
on.
앫 During the first 1000 miles
앫 Drive your vehicle during the first (1500 km), do not exceed a speed
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but of 85 mph (140 km/h).
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫 During this period, avoid engine
앫 During this period, avoid heavy loads speeds above 4500 rpm in each
(full throttle driving) and excessive en- gear.
gine speeds (no more than 2⁄ 3 of maxi-
mum rpm in each gear).
All of the above, as may apply to your vehi-
앫 Avoid accelerating by kick-down. cle type, also apply when driving the first
앫 Do not attempt to slow the vehicle 1000 miles (1500 km) after the engine or
down by shifting to a lower gear using the rear differential has been replaced.
the selector lever. i
앫 Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when Always obey applicable speed limits.
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may grad-
ually increase vehicle and engine speeds
to the permissible maximum.
268
Operation
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, de-

pends on driving habits and operating con- Warning! G Warning! G
ditions.
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Ob-
To save fuel you should:
and driving are very dangerous combina- jects stored in this area may impair pedal
앫 Keep tires at the recommended infla- tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or movement.
tion pressures. drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
앫 Remove unnecessary loads. and judgement.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac-
앫 Remove roof rack when not in use.
cident are greatly increased when you drink
앫 Allow engine to warm up under low or take drugs and drive.
load use.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
앫 Avoid frequent acceleration and decel- anyone to drive who has been drinking or
eration. taking drugs.
앫 Have all maintenance work performed
at the intervals specified in the Service
Booklet and as required by the FSS.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driv-
ing in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly country.
269
Operation
Power assistance Brakes

system, we recommend that the vehicle be
Warning! G transported with all wheels off the ground

using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
Warning! G
equipment. A tow bar must be used if cir-
The brake system requires electrical energy After driving in heavy rain for some time
cumstances do not permit the use of the
for operation. without applying the brakes or through wa-
recommended towing methods and the ve-
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply ter deep enough to wet brake components,
hicle requires towing with all four wheels on
or electrical system may impair brake sys- the first braking action may be somewhat
the ground. Towing the vehicle with all four
tem operation and switch it into its emer- reduced and increased pedal pressure may
wheels on the ground is only permissible for
gency operation mode. In such a case, the be necessary to obtain expected braking ef-
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
red brake warning lamp (컄 page 314) and fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For
warning messages in the instrument cluster in front.
more information, refer to “Towing the vehi-
(컄 page 321) come on while driving. To cle” (컄 page 385). For more information, Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
brake, the driver must then apply signifi- see “The SBC brake system” (컄 page 85). cause excessive and premature wear of the
cantly greater brake pedal pressure and de- brake pads.
With the engine not running, there is no
press the pedal much further to obtain the It can also result in the brakes overheating,
power assistance for the brake and steering
expected braking effect. If necessary, apply thereby significantly reducing their effec-
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes may tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
only be applied to the front wheels. Stop- vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci-
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve-
ping distance is increased! dent.
hicle.
270
Operation
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after If the parking brake is released and the
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly brake warning lamp in the instrument clus- Warning! G
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the ter stays on, there is a malfunction in the
vehicle with considerable force prior to SBC brake system (컄 page 85) or the If other than recommended brake pads are
parking. The heat generated serves to dry brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low. installed, or other than recommended brake
the brakes. fluid is used, the braking properties of the
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
If your brake system is normally only sub- be the reason for low brake fluid in the res- safe braking is substantially impaired. This
jected to moderate loads, you should occa- ervoir. could result in an accident.
sionally test the effectiveness of the
Have the brake system inspected by quali- Be certain to read and observe the warning
brakes by applying above-normal braking
fied technicians immediately. Contact an notices on brake pad replacement
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. (컄 page 329).
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
All checks and service work on the brake
! system should be carried out by qualified !
Be very careful not to endanger other technicians only. Contact an authorized
When driving down long and steep
road users when you apply the brakes. Mercedes-Benz Center.
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
Refer to the description of the Brake Only install brake pads and brake fluid rec- by shifting into a lower gear to use the
Assist System (BAS) (컄 page 82). ommended by Mercedes-Benz. engine’s braking power. This helps pre-
vent overheating of the brakes and re-
duces brake pad wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive

on for some time, rather than immediately
parking, so that the air stream will cool
down the brakes faster.
271
Operation
Driving off Parking

앫 Slowly release brake pedal.
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after 앫 When parked on an incline, turn front
! wheel towards the road curb.
driving off. Perform this procedure only
Set the parking brake whenever park-
when the road is clear of other traffic. 앫 Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
ing or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
position 0 and remove, or press
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not move gear selector lever to position P. KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (vehi-
place full load on the engine until the oper- When parking on hills, always set the cles with KEYLESS-GO*).
ating temperature has been reached. parking brake and turn front wheel
앫 Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
When starting off on a slippery surface, do against road curb.
KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an ex- when leaving.
tended period with the ESP switched off.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the Warning! G Tires
drive train which is not covered by the
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
Warning! G
!
Simultaneously depressing the acceler- exhaust system, as these materials could be
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ator pedal and applying the brake re- ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
duces engine performance and causes To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re- ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
premature brake and drivetrain wear. sult of vehicle movement, before turning off you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
the engine and leaving the vehicle always: ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal. tion to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫 Move the selector lever to position P.
272
Operation
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody

for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest Although the applicable federal motor vehi- Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for re- cle safety laws consider a tire to be worn the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
pairs. when the tread wear indicators (TWI) be- may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
come visible at approximately 1/16 in driving with a flat tire or driving at high
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not al- speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
law. These indicators are located in six low your tires to wear down to that level. As heat build-up and possibly a fire.
places on the tread circumference and be- tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the
come visible at a tread depth of approxi- adhesion properties on a wet road are Hydroplaning
mately 1⁄ 16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the sharply reduced.
tire is considered worn and should be re- Depending on the depth of the water layer
Depending upon the weather and/or road
placed. on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid widely. at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
band across the tread. vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
Specified tire pressures must be main-
rain.
tained. This applies particularly if the tires
are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper-
atures).
273
Operation
Tire traction considerably greater than when the road is E 320, E 320 4MATIC
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise ap- E 500, E 500 4MATIC
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or propriate caution. E 320 4MATIC (Appearance Package*)
icy road is always lower than on a dry road. E 500 4MATIC (Appearance Package*)
You should pay particular attention to the Tire speed rating Your vehicle is factory equipped with
condition of the road whenever the outside “H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
temperatures are close to the freezing Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
of 130 mph (210 km/h).
point. speed limits should be obeyed. Use pru-
dent driving speeds appropriate to prevail-
E 320 (Appearance Package*)
ing conditions.
Warning! G E 500 (Appearance Package*)
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction Warning! G “W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
will be substantially reduced. Under such of 168 mph (270 km/h).
Even when permitted by law, never operate
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi- An electronic speed limiter prevents your
with extreme caution.
mum speed rating of the tires. vehicle from exceeding a speed of
Exceeding the maximum speed for which 130 mph (210 km/h).
Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail-
radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth
ure, causing loss of vehicle control and pos-
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to make sure
personal injury and possible death, for you
normal balanced handling characteristics.
and for others.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance compared to summer
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
274
Operation
E 320 (Sport Package*), E 55 AMG Winter driving instructions

E 500 (Sport Package*) Your vehicle is factory equipped with
The most important rule for slippery or icy
Your vehicle is factory equipped with “Z”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
“Z”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of above 149 mph (240 km/h).
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
of above 149 mph (240 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of system under such conditions.
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 155 mph (250 km/h).
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
155 mph (250 km/h).
i move gear selector lever to position N. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by cor-
E 320 4MATIC (Sport Package*) For information on speed ratings for
rective steering action.
E 500 4MATIC (Sport Package*) winter tires, see “Winter driving”
(컄 page 297). i
Your vehicle is factory equipped with min.
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating For more information on driving with
of above 186 mph (300 km/h). snow chains, see “Snow chains”
(컄 page 298).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
155 mph (250 km/h).
Warning! G
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of control loss.
275
Operation
Road salts and chemicals can adversely af- Standing water

fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal Warning! G
force may become necessary to produce !
the normal braking effect. If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
Do not drive through flooded areas or
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
Depressing the brake pedal periodically water of unknown depth. Before driving
pipe and from around the vehicle with the
when traveling at length on salt-strewn through water, determine its depth.
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking Never accelerate before driving into
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-
efficiency back to normal. water. The bow wave could force water
terior resulting in unconsciousness and
into the engine and auxiliary equip-
If the vehicle is parked after being driven death.
ment, thus damaging them.
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien- To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
cy should be tested as soon as possible af- open a window slightly on the side of the ve- If you must drive through standing wa-
ter driving is resumed. hicle not facing the wind ter, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
Warning! G these areas could cause damage to
Warning! G electrical components or wiring of the
Make sure not to endarger any other road
engine or transmission, or could result
users when carrying out these braking ma- The outside temperature indicator is not de-
in water being ingested by the engine
neuvers. signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
through the air intake causing severe
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In-
internal engine damage. Any such dam-
dicated temperatures just above the freez-
age is not covered by the
ing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice.
For more information, see “Winter driving”

(컄 page 297)
276
Operation
Passenger compartment Control and operation of radio trans- Telephones and two-way radios
mitter
COMAND, radio and telephone*
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
ly as possible. Warning! G out being connected to an external antenna)
In an accident, during hard braking or sud- from inside the vehicle while the engine is
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown Please do not forget that your primary re-
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury sponsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
to vehicle occupants unless the items are Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man-
securely fastened in the vehicle. agement and Data System), radio or tele-
personal injury.
phone1 if road, weather and traffic
The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob- conditions permit.
jects. Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
phone or a citizens band unit should only
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Driving abroad be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
nected to an antenna that is installed on
ly 14 m) every second.
Abroad, there is an extensive the outside of the vehicle.
1
Mercedes-Benz service network at your Observe all legal requirements
Refer to the radio transmitter operation in-
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas structions regarding use of an external an-
which are not listed in the index of your tenna.
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
277
Operation
Catalytic converter Emission control

Warning! G
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with Certain systems of the engine serve to
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op- keep the toxic components of the exhaust
important element in conjunction with the erate this vehicle in areas where combusti- gases within permissible limits required by
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con- ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves law.
trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis- can come into contact with the hot exhaust
These systems, of course, will function
sions. Keep your vehicle in proper system, as these materials could be ignited
properly only when maintained strictly ac-
operating condition by following our rec- and cause a vehicle fire.
cording to factory specifications. Any ad-
ommended maintenance instructions as
justments on the engine should, therefore,
outlined in your Service Booklet.
be carried out only by qualified
! Mercedes-Benz Center authorized techni-
cians. Engine adjustments should not be
To prevent damage to the catalytic con-
altered in any way. Moreover, the specified
verters, use only premium unleaded
service jobs must be carried out regularly
gasoline in this vehicle.
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing re-
Any noticeable irregularities in engine quirements. For details refer to the Service
operation should be repaired promptly. Booklet.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat, which could
start a fire.
278
Operation
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions and
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem- 앫 Driving when your engine is badly over-
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon perature may rise close to approximately heated can cause some fluids, which
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon- 248°F (120°C). may have leaked into the engine com-
sciousness and lead to death. partment, to catch fire. You could be se-
The engine should not be operated with riously burned.
Do not run the engine in confined areas the coolant temperature over 248°F 앫 Steam from an overheated engine can
(such as a garage) which are not properly (120°C). Doing so may cause serious en- cause serious burns and can occur just
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas gine damage which is not covered by the by opening the engine hood. Stay away
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. from the engine if you see or hear steam
have the cause determined and corrected coming from it.
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one win-
dow fully open at all times.
279
Operation
At the gas station
왔 At the gas station
Refueling 왘 Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
the point indicated by the arrow.
The fuel filler flap springs open.
Warning! G
왘 Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. to it until possible pressure is released.
It burns violently and can cause serious inju-
왘 Take off the cap and set it in the recess
ry. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
on the fuel filler flap.
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks, To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
flame or smoking materials near gasoline! 왘 Turn the engine off into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
앫 by turning the SmartKey to
The fuel filler flap is located on the 왘 Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
position 0.
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the unit cuts out – do not top up or over-
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with 앫 by pressing the KEYLESS-GO* fill.
the remote control automatically start/stop button. Open the driv-
er’s door (with the driver’s door
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
open, starter switch is now in Warning! G
position 0, same as SmartKey re-
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres-
moved from starter switch).
sure in the system which could cause a gas
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
switch. back out when removing the fuel pump noz-
zle, which could cause personal injury.
280
Operation
At the gas station
왘 Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the i Check regularly and before a long trip
right. Leaving the engine running and the fuel
You will hear when the fuel cap is tight- cap open can cause the yellow fuel
ened. tank reserve warning lamp to flash and
the ? lamp to illuminate.
왘 Close the fuel filler flap.
See also “Practical hints” section
i (컄 page 317).
Use only premium unleaded gasoline
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump. 1 Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system*
More information on gasoline can be
For more information on refilling the
found in the Factory Approved Service
reservoir (컄 page 289).
Products pamphlet.
2 Brake fluid
More information on brake fluid can be
found in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 409).
3 Coolant level
More information on the coolant level
(컄 page 287).
281
Operation
At the gas station
! Engine oil level Tire inflation pressure

If you find that the brake fluid in the More information on engine oil More information on tire inflation pressure
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the (컄 page 284). (컄 page 292).
minimum mark or below, have the
See also “Opening hood” (컄 page 283).
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks immediately.
Vehicle lighting
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately. Do not add brake Check function and cleanliness. For more
fluid as this will not solve the problem. information on replacing light bulbs, see
For more information, see “Practical the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 365).
hints” (컄 page 314). See also the section on the exterior lamp
switch (컄 page 124).
282
Operation
Engine compartment
왔 Engine compartment
Hood 왘 Pull lever 1 downwards. 왘 Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radia-
The hood is unlocked and handle 2 tor grille.
will extend out of the radiator grille. 왘 Pull up on the hood (do not pull up on
Warning! G the handle) and then release it.
!
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi- The hood will be automatically held
To avoid damage to the windshield wip-
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could open at shoulder height by gas-filled
ers or hood, never open the hood if the
be forced open by passing air flow. struts.
wiper arms are folded forward away
from the windshield.
Opening Warning! G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for ap-
proximately 30 seconds or even restart af-
ter the engine has been turned off. Stay
1 Hood release 2 Handle for opening the hood clear of fan blades.
283
Operation
Engine compartment
Closing Engine oil

Warning! G
The amount of oil your engine needs will
If you see flames or smoke coming from the Warning! G depend on a number of factors, including
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem- driving style. Higher oil consumption can
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
perature gauge indicates that the engine is occur when
anyone.
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
앫 the vehicle is new
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary, 왘 Let the hood drop from a height of ap- 앫 the vehicle is driven frequently at
call the fire department. proximately 1 ft (30 cm). higher engine speeds
The hood will lock audibly. Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Warning! G 왘 Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed. i
The engine is equipped with a transistorized If you can raise the hood at a point Do not use any special lubricant addi-
ignition system. Because of the high voltage above the headlamps, then it is not tives, as these may damage the drive
it is dangerous to touch any components (ig- properly closed. Open it again and let it assemblies. Using special additives not
nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic drop with somewhat greater force. approved by Mercedes-Benz will
socket) of the ignition system restrict your warranty entitlement.
앫 with the engine running More information on this subject is
앫 while starting the engine available at any Mercedes-Benz
앫 if ignition is “on” and the engine is Center.
turned manually
284
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level i

When checking the oil level the vehicle If you want to interrupt the checking
must procedure, press the k or j
button on the multifunction steering
앫 be parked on level ground
wheel.
앫 be at normal operating temperature
앫 have been stationary for at least five One of the following messages will 왘 If necessary, add engine oil.
minutes with the engine turned off subsequently appear in the indicator:
For adding engine oil see (컄 page 286).
To check the engine oil level via the multi- 앫 Engine oil level ok
More information on engine oil can be
function display, do the following: 앫 Add 1.0 qt. to reach max. oil found in the “Technical data” section
왘 Switch on ignition. level! (컄 page 406) and (컄 page 409).
The standard display (컄 page 139) should (Canada: 1.0 liter)
Other display messages
appear in the multifunction display. 앫 Add 1.5 qts. to reach max. oil
If the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
왘 Press button k or j, on the level!
button* is not in position 2, the following
steering wheel until the following (Canada: 1.5 liters) message will appear:
message is seen in the multifunction
앫 Add 2.0 qts. to reach max. oil Turn on ignition
display:
level! to see engine oil level!
Engine oil level - Measuring now!
Measurement correct only if veh. (Canada: 2.0 liters) 왘 Switch on the ignition.
level If you see the message:
Observe waiting period
285
Operation
Engine compartment
왘 If engine is at normal operating If there is excess engine oil with the engine Adding engine oil
temperature, wait five minutes before at normal operating temperature, the
repeating check procedure. following message will appear: !
Only use approved engine oils. For a
왘 If engine is not yet at normal operating Engine oil level
listing of approved engine oils, refer to
temperature, wait 30 minutes before Reduce oil level!
the Factory Approved Service Products
repeating check procedure.
왘 Have excess oil siphoned or drained pamphlet in your vehicle literature port-
If you see the message: off. Contact an authorized folio.
Engine oil level In addition, check the oil filler cap for
Not when engine on! ! important information pertaining to the
왘 Turn off the engine. engine oil needing to meet a specific
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
Mercedes-Benz specification (e.g. MB
왘 If the engine is at normal operating off. It could cause damage to the
229.5). If such information is printed
temperature, wait five minutes before engine and catalytic converter not
on the oil filler cap, only use an engine
checking oil. covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
oil from the list of approved engine oils
Warranty.
왘 If the engine is not yet at normal in the Factory Approved Service Prod-
operating temperature, you must wait ucts pamphlet that meets the specifi-
More information on messages in the cation indicated on the oil filler cap.
30 minutes before checking oil. display concerning engine oil can be found Using engine oils of other specification
in the “Practical hints” section may cause the FSS to incorrectly deter-
(컄 page 336). mine the next service interval and will
result in engine damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
286
Operation
Engine compartment
! Transmission fluid level

Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the The transmission fluid level does not need
engine and catalytic converter not to be checked. If you notice transmission
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
Warranty. have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the transmission.
왘 Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
Coolant level
More information on engine oil can be
1 Filler cap found in the “Technical data” section The engine coolant is a mixture of water
(컄 page 406) and (컄 page 409). and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
왘 Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck. the coolant level, the vehicle must be
왘 Add engine oil as required. Be careful parked on level ground and the engine
not to overfill with oil. must be cool.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. The coolant expansion tank is located on
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil the driver’s side of the engine compart-
entering the ground or water. ment.
287
Operation
Engine compartment
왘 Replace and tighten cap.

Warning! G More information on coolant can be found
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns: in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 411).
앫 Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
Battery
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
Your vehicle is equipped with two batter-
cates that the coolant is overheated.
ies:
앫 Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if engine temperature is above 1 Coolant expansion tank 앫 Auxiliary battery (located in the engine
194°F (90°C). Allow engine to cool compartment).
왘 Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approx-
down before removing cap. The coolant 앫 Main battery (starter and electrical
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under imately one half turn to the left to re-
lease any excess pressure. consumers; located in the trunk).
pressure.
앫 Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx- 왘 Continue turning the cap to the left and These batteries should always be suffi-
imately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pres- remove it. ciently charged in order to achieve their
sure. If opened immediately, scalding rated service life. Refer to Service Booklet
hot fluid and steam will be blown out un-
The coolant level is correct if the level: for battery maintenance intervals.
der pressure. 앫 for cold coolant: reaches the black If you use your vehicle mostly for short-dis-
앫 Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine top part of the reservoir tance trips, you will need to have the bat-
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly- 앫 for warm coolant: is approximately tery charge checked more frequently.
col which may burn if it comes into con-
0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher
tact with hot engine parts.
왘 Add coolant as required.
288
Operation
Engine compartment
When replacing batteries, always use bat- Windshield washer system and
E Wear eye protection.
teries approved by Mercedes-Benz. headlamp cleaning system*
C
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle Keep children away. The windshield washer reservoir is located
for an extended period of time, consult an
in the engine compartment.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
F
steps you need to observe. Follow the instructions in this
Operator's Manual.
G Observe all safety instructions

and precautions when handling Batteries contain materials that can harm
automotive batteries. the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
A Risk of explosion method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
D Keep flames or sparks away for recycling.

from battery. Do not smoke.
1 Washer fluid reservoir
B Battery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact Fluid for the windshield washer system and
with skin, eyes or clothing. the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
In case it does, immediately from the windshield washer reservoir. It
flush affected area with clear has a capacity of:
water and seek medical help if 앫 Vehicles without headlamp cleaning
necessary. system: approximately 4.8 US qt
(4.5 l).
앫 Vehicles with headlamp cleaning sys-
tem: approximately 7.4 US qt (7 l).
289
Operation
Engine compartment
During all seasons, add MB Windshield i To determine if your vehicle is

Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix If you are operating the vehicle where equipped with a heated windshield
the windshield washer fluid in a suitable temperatures may fall below freezing: washer system*, contact an authorized
container. Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫 Vehicles without heated windshield
왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield washer system:
Washer Concentrate and water (or
commercially available premixed wind- Use a fluid mixture (MB Windshield Warning! G
shield washer solvent/antifreeze, de- Washer Concentrate “S” and com-
mercially available washer sol- Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flam-
pending on ambient temperatures).
vent/antifreeze) that will provide mable. Do not spill washer solvent/
Always use washer solvent/antifreeze sufficient protection against freez- antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it
where temperatures may fall below ing in the area you are operating the may ignite and burn. You could be seriously
freezing point. Failure to do so could re- vehicle in. burned.
sult in damage to the washer sys-
tem/reservoir. 앫 Vehicles with heated windshield
washer system*: !
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
A fluid mixture (MB Windshield
for plastic lenses. Improper washer flu-
Washer Concentrate "S" and com-
id can damage the plastic lenses of the
mercially available washer sol-
headlamps.
vent/antifreeze) produced to resist
freezing at temperatures of approx-
imately 14 ° F (-10 ° C) should be For more information, see “Windshield and
sufficient. headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio”
(컄 page 413).
290
Operation
Tires and wheels
왔 Tires and wheels
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Important guidelines
ter for information on tested and recom- Warning! G
mended rims and tires for summer and 앫 Only use sets of tires and rims of the
winter operation. They can also offer ad- Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the same type and make.
vice concerning tire service and purchase. tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
앫 Tires must be of the correct size for the
sustained damage, replace them.
rim.
Warning! G When replacing rims, use only genuine
앫 Break in new tires for approximately
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can re-
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
Replace rims or tires with the same designa- speeds.
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the sult in the bolts loosening and possibly an
original part. See your authorized accident. 앫 Regularly check the tires and rims for
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa- damage. Dented or bent rims can
tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are Retreaded tires are not tested or recom- cause tire pressure loss and damage to
mounted: mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous the tire beads.
앫 The wheel brakes or suspension compo- damage cannot always be recognized on 앫 If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
nents can be damaged retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore pressure and correct as required.
not assure the operating safety of the vehi-
앫 The correct operating clearance of the 앫 Do not allow your tires to wear down
wheels and the tires are no longer guar- cle when such tires are used.
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
anteed See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- roads are sharply reduced at tread
ter for information on tested and recom- depths under 1⁄ 8 in (3 mm).
mended rims and tires for summer and
앫 When replacing individual tires, you
winter operation.
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
291
Operation
Tires and wheels
Life of tire Direction of rotation Correct the tire pressure only when tires
are cold.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon Unidirectional tires offer added advantag-
If the tires are warm, you should only cor-
varying factors including but not limited to: es, such as better hydroplaning perfor-
rect the tire pressure if it is too low for cur-
mance. To benefit, however, make sure
앫 Driving style rent operating conditions.
that the tires rotate in the direction speci-
앫 Tire pressure fied. A table on the fuel filler flap lists the spec-
앫 Distance driven ified tire inflation pressures for warm and
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the in-
cold tires as well as for various operating
tended direction of tire rotation.
conditions.
Warning! G
Checking tire inflation pressure i
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after The pressures listed for light loads are
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Warning! G minimum values offering high driving
comfort.
! If the tire pressure drops repeatedly: Increased inflation pressures listed for
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry 앫 Check the tires for punctures from for- heavier loads may also be used for light
place with as little exposure to light as eign objects. loads. These higher pressures produce
possible. Protect tires from contact favorable handling characteristics. The
앫 Check to see whether air is leaking from
with oil, grease and gasoline. ride of the vehicle, however, will be
the valves or from around the rim.
somewhat harder. Never exceed the
maximum values or inflate tires below
Regularly check your tire pressure at inter- the minimum values listed in the fuel
vals of no more than 14 days. filler flap.
292
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire pressure changes by approximately You can select the unit of measure used for
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air the tire inflation pressure by changing the
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
temperature change. Keep this in mind setting in the control system (컄 page 148).
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
when checking tire pressure where the
from being overheated. i
temperature is different from the outside
temperature. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Possible differences between the read-
specified vehicle capacity weight (as indicat- ings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
Tire temperature and tire pressure are also ed by the label on the pillar in the driver’s hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and
increased while driving, depending on the door opening). Overloading the tires can the vehicle’s control system can occur.
driving speed and the tire load. overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. The readings issued by the control sys-
Check the spare tire periodically for condi- tem are more precise.
tion and inflation. Spare tires will age and Checking tire pressure electronically*
become worn over time even if never used, 왘 Switch on ignition.
The tire inflation pressure monitor only
and thus should be inspected and replaced
when necessary.
functions on wheels that are equipped with 왘 Press the k button until the current
the proper electronic sensors. It monitors inflation pressures for each tire appear
the tire inflation pressure, as selected by in the multifunction display.
Warning! G the driver, in all four tires. A warning is is-
sued to alert you to a decrease in pressure
Follow recommended inflation pressures. in one or more of the tires.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be- multifunction display (컄 page 134).The
cause they are more likely to become punc- present inflation pressures are displayed
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes, only after a few minutes’ travel time.
etc.
293
Operation
Tires and wheels
Activating the tire inflation pressure 왘 Press the j or k button repeat-

Warning! G monitor edly until you see the current inflation
You must activate the tire inflation pres- pressures for each tire appear in the
The tire inflation pressure monitor does not display or the following message ap-
indicate a warning for wrongly selected in- sure monitor in the following cases:
pears in the display
flation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation 앫 If you have changed the tire pressure Tire pressure
pressure according to the label on the fuel display after driv. a few mins.
앫 If you have replaced the wheels or tires
filler cap. Reactivate using R button
앫 If you have installed new wheels or
The tire inflation pressure monitor is not
able to issue a warning due to a sudden dra-
tires i
matic loss of pressure (e.g. tire blowout 왘 Make sure the tire pressure is correctly If transporting a deflated road wheel or
caused by a foreign object). In this case set. additional wheel sensors in the vehicle,
bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply- the tire inflation pressure monitor
왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul- should not be reactivated until the de-
ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly flated wheel or additional wheel sen-
maneuvers.
until the standard display menu ap- sors have been removed from the
pears in the multifunction display vehicle. Otherwise, the deflated wheel
i (컄 page 139). or additional sensors could cause the
Operating radio transmission equip- tire inflation pressure monitor system
ment (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way to malfunction.
radios) in or near the vehicle could
cause the tire inflation pressure moni-
tor to malfunction.
294
Operation
Tires and wheels
왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 22). If you wish to cancel activation: Rotating wheels
The following message will appear in 왘 Press the ç button.
the multifunction display:
Check current
If the following message appears in the Warning! G
multifunction display field:
tire pressure?
Reactivate tire Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are
왘 Press the æ button. Pres. monitor of the same size.
or
The following message will appear in
Tire pres. On vehicles with the same wheel size all
the multifunction display field:
Check tires! around, wheels can be rotated every 3000
Tire pressure
monitor activated 왘 Check the tire inflation pressures and to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or
correct them if necessary. sooner if necessary, according to the de-
The tire inflation pressure monitor will
gree of tire wear. The same direction of tire
now monitor the tire inflation pressure 왘 Reactivate the tire inflation pressure
rotation must be retained.
values of all four tires. monitor.
Rotate the wheels before the characteris-
The following message will appear in
tic tire wear pattern becomes visible
the multifunction display field:
(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread
Tire pressure
center wear on rear wheels).
display after driv. a few mins.
Reactivate using R button Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
wheels after each rotation. Check and
This display appears until the individual
make sure proper tire inflation pressure.
inflation pressure values are matched
with the tires. The individual values are
then displayed (컄 page 343).
295
Operation
Tires and wheels
!
If your vehicle is equipped with a tire in- Warning! G
flation pressure monitor*, there are
Have the tightening torque checked after
electronic components built into the
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
wheel.
loose if not tightened with a torque of
Do not use mounting tools in the area
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
of the valve as they could damage the
electronic components. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
To prevent damage or incorrect instal- bolts specified for your vehicle's rims.
lation, have the tires changed at an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For information on wheel change, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 356) and
(컄 page 372).
296
Operation
Winter driving
왔 Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your vehi- 앫 Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recom- Always observe the speed rating of the
cle winterized at an authorized mends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service in- minimum tread depth of approximately maximum speed for which your tires are
1
cludes: /6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the rated is below the speed rating of your ve-
winter season. hicle, you must place a notice to this effect
앫 Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
where it will be seen by the driver. Such no-
concentration.
Winter tires tices are available at your tire dealer or any
앫 Addition of cleaning concentrate to the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
water of the windshield and headlamp Always use winter tires at temperatures
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry
“S” to a premixed windshield washer road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires
Warning! G
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated is the only way to achieve the maximum ef-
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
for temperatures below freezing point fectiveness of the ABS, ESP and 4MATIC in
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
(컄 page 412). winter operation.
the difference in tire characteristics may
앫 Battery test. Battery capacity drops For safe handling, make sure that all very well impair turning stability and that
with decreasing ambient temperature. mounted winter tires are of the same make overall driving stability may be reduced.
A well charged battery helps to make and have the same tread design. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
sure that the engine can be started and
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
the SBC brake system will be fully oper-
ational, even at low ambient tempera-
Warning! G tire at the nearest authorized
tures.
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
6
longer suitable for winter operation.
297
Operation
Winter driving
Block heater* (Canada only) i 앫 Only use snow chains that are ap-
When driving with snow chains, you proved by Mercedes-Benz. Your autho-
The engine is equipped with a block heat- rized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
may wish to deactivate the ESP
er. glad to advise you on this subject.
(컄 page 84) before setting the vehicle
The electrical cable may be installed at in motion. This will improve the vehi- 앫 Use of snow chains may be prohibited
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. cle’s traction. depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
Snow chains Please observe the following guidelines snow chains.
when using snow chains:
! !
앫 Use of snow chains is not permissible
When driving with snow chains, always Even on vehicles with all-wheel-drive,
with all wheel/tire combinations. use snow chains on rear tires only.
select the raised level of the level con-
trol system Airmatic* (컄 page 231). 앫 Snow chains should only be used on Use of snow chains is not permissible
Other settings may result in damage to the rear wheels. Follow the manufac- with spare wheels (Minispare wheel or
your vehicle. turer's mounting instructions. collapsible tire) and with tires of size
265/35 ZR18 (컄 page 398).
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to ex-
ceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
298
Operation
Maintenance
왔 Maintenance
Flexible Service System PLUS Service A in XXXX miles (km) i
(FSS PLUS) Service A in XX days The additional + after the type of ser-
Service A in X day vice indicates the degree of wear of the
We strongly recommend that you have Service A due now! brake pads.
your vehicle serviced by your authorized
The type of service due is indicated in the The brake pads may reach their wear
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
speedometer display field: limit in the time period up to the next
the Service Booklet at the times called for
by the FSS PLUS from Service A service interval.
(Flexible Service System PLUS). (Minor service) Have the brake pads checked and, if
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in necessary, replaced by an authorized
to Service H
accordance with the Service Booklet at the Mercedes-Benz Center during your
designated times/mileage called for by (Major service) next service appointment.
the FSS PLUS may result in vehicle dam-
age not covered by the Mercedes-Benz i
Limited Warranty. The interval between services depends
FSS PLUS will notify you when your next on your driving habits. A gentle driving
service is due. style, moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short-distance trips will
Approximately one month before your next
lengthen the interval between services.
service is due, one of the following mes-
sages will appear in the multifunction dis-
play while you are driving or when you
switch on the ignition (example service A):
299
Operation
Maintenance
Clearing the service indicator Calling up the service indicator Resetting the service indicator
You can clear the service indicator 왘 Switch the ignition on. In the event that a service on your vehicle
is not carried out by an authorized
왘 Press the j button on the multi- The standard display of the control sys-
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can reset the
function steering wheel. tem appears (컄 page 134).
service indicator yourself.
The service indicator is cleared and the 왘 Press button k or j on the mul-
왘 Switch the ignition on.
standard display appears in the multi- tifunction steering wheel until the
function display. FSS PLUS indicator appears in the mul- The standard display of the control sys-
tifunction display. tem appears (컄 page 139).
Service term exceeded
i 왘 Press button k or j on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel until the
If you have exceeded the suggested ser- If the battery is disconnected, the days
FSS PLUS indicator appears in the mul-
vice term, you will see the following mes- of disconnection will not be included in
tifunction display.
sage in the multifunction display: the count shown by the service indica-
tor. To arrive at the true service dead- 왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 22) for
Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles (km)
line, you will need to subtract these about five seconds.
Service A exceeded by XXX days
Service A exceeded by X day
days from the days shown in the ser-
vice indicator.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the service indicator following a com- Do not confuse the service indicator
pleted service. with the engine oil level indicator :.
300
Operation
Maintenance
The Service menu appears in the multi- The service indicator now displays the FSS PLUS now recalculates the values.
function display. Full service menu. You cannot call up the service display or
the service menu during this time.
왘 Press the ÿ button.
The words service confirmed appear i
in the multifunction display. If the service indicator was inadvertent-
ly reset, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
왘 Select the Confirmation menu with the Only reset if the proper service has
+ or - button. been performed. Resetting the system
without performing proper service as
called for by the FSS PLUS will cause
The service indicator now displays the The service indicator is reset. the FSS PLUS to incorrectly determine
Confirmation menu. the next service interval which will re-
왘 Press the è button on the multi-
The selection marker is on Full ser- function steering wheel until the stan- sult in engine damage not covered by
vice. dard display appears in the the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
301
Operation
Maintenance
Setting the date for special works 왘 Select the Addit. Work menu with the 왘 Press the ÿ button.
+ or - button. The service indicator now displays the
You can enter appointments for exhaust
왘 Press the ÿ button. Next due date menu.
gas analysis and general inspection over
FSS PLUS. The service indicator now displays the
Addit. Work menu.
왘 Switch ignition on.
The standard display of the control sys-
tem appears (컄 page 134).
왘 Press button k or j on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel until the 왘 Select the Month and Year with the
FSS PLUS indicator appears in the mul- + or - button.
tifunction display. 왘 Select the Exh.-gas analysis or 왘 Press button k or j on the mul-
왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 22) for General Inspection menu with the tifunction steering wheel to set the
about five seconds. + or - button. month and year.
The Service menu appears in the multi- 왘 Select Confirm with the + or -
function display. button.
The new date is set.
302
Operation
Maintenance
왘 Press the è button on the multi- Calling up the service item menu The service indicator now displays the
function steering wheel until the stan- Items menu.
왘 Switch ignition on.
dard display appears in the
multifunction display. The standard display of the control sys-
tem appears (컄 page 139).
FSS PLUS now recalculates the values.
You cannot call up the service display or 왘 Press button k or j on the mul-
the service menu during this time. tifunction steering wheel until the
FSS PLUS indicator appears in the mul-
Calling up the service data information tifunction display.
i
왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 22) for The service items to be carried out are
FSS PLUS shows the service type (letters about five seconds.
A-H) in the multifunction display approxi- shown in this menu.
mately one month before the service ap- The Service menu appears in the multi- Please refer to the Service Booklet for
pointment is due in miles (distance function display (컄 page 139). a description of each service item.
criterion) or in days (time criterion). 왘 Select the Items menu with the +
This service type is based on the service or - button. 왘 Press button è on the multifunction
items to be carried out. The service items steering wheel until the standard
are described in the Service Booklet. 왘 Press the ÿ button.
display appears in the multifunction
The service items to be carried out under display.
the corresponding service type can be dis-
played in the multifunction display.
303
Operation
Vehicle care
왔 Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle Such damage is caused not only by ex- More frequent washings are necessary to
treme and varying climatic conditions, but deal with unfavorable conditions:
also by:
앫 Near the ocean
Warning! G 앫 Air pollution
앫 In industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. 앫 Road salt emissions)
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
앫 Tar 앫 During winter operation
Always follow the instructions on the partic-
ular container. Always open your vehicle’s 앫 Gravel and stone chipping You should check your vehicle from time to
doors or windows when cleaning the inside. time for stone chipping or other damage.
To avoid paint damage, you should imme-
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de- diately remove:
possible to prevent corrosion.
signed for cleaning your vehicle. 앫 Grease and oil
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
앫 Fuel of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external in- 앫 Coolant ough check is a washing of the underbody
fluences which, if gone unchecked, can at- followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
앫 Brake fluid
tack the paintwork as well as the aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
undercarriage and cause lasting damage. 앫 Bird droppings Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-
앫 Insects ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
앫 Tree resins etc.
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi- neither necessary nor recommended by
nates the aggressiveness and potency of Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
the above adverse influences. of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others ap-
plied later.
304
Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and Power washer Tar stains

compiled recommendations which are When using a power wash for cleaning the Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
specially matched to our vehicles and vehicle, always observe the manufactur- and become more difficult to remove. A tar
which always reflect the latest technology. er’s operating instructions. remover is recommended.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at your authorized i Paintwork, painted body components
Mercedes-Benz Center. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
should be applied when water drops on the
damage due to negligent or incorrect care water, and a SmartKey with KEY-
paint surface do not“bead up”, normally
cannot always be removed or repaired with LESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
every three to five months, depending on
the car-care products recommended here. within approximately 3 ft (approxi-
climate and washing detergent used.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at your mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inad-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. vertently locked or unlocked. Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
The following topics deal with the cleaning shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
and care of your vehicle and give important !
gloss).
“how-to” information as well as references Never use a round nozzle to
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care prod- power-wash tires. The intense jet of Do not apply any of these products or wax
ucts. water can result in damage to the tire. if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
Additional information can be found in the Always replace a damaged tire.
booklet “Vehicle Care Guide”. Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick
Always keep the jet of water moving
for quick and provisional repairs of minor
across the surface. Do not aim directly
paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehi-
at electrical parts, electrical connec-
cle doors, etc.).
tors, seals, or other rubber parts.
305
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry Ornamental moldings
with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment, For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
agents to dry on the finish.
make sure to protect electrical compo- chrome-plated parts, use a chrome clean-
nents and connectors from contact with Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in er.
water and cleaning agents. exterior rear view mirrors prior to running
the vehicle through an automatic car wash Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor-
to prevent damage to the mirrors. turn signal lenses
rosion Wax should be applied to the engine
compartment after every engine cleaning. In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Before applying, all control linkage bush- of road salt as soon as possible. Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
ings and joints should be lubricated. The When washing the undercarriage, do not
with plenty of water.
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be pro- forget to clean the inner sides of the To prevent scratches, never apply strong
tected from any wax. wheels. force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not at-
Vehicle washing i tempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: or sponge.
in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz ap- water, and a SmartKey with KEY-
proved Car Shampoo. LESS-GO* is in close proximity, i.e.
within approximately 3 ft (approxi-
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inad-
fused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
vertently locked or unlocked.
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
chamois frequently.
306
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor i To prevent scratches, never apply strong
cover Restart the engine after cleaning sen- force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
sor cover 1. cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not at-
tempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth
or sponge.
Cleaning the Parktronic* system
sensors
Wiper blades
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms away
from the windshield to a vertical posi-
tion only. They could otherwise dam-
1 Distronic system sensor cover age the hood.
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
왘 Turn on the wipers and place it in a ver-
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
tical position.
with plenty of water to clean sensor
cover 1. 1 Parktronic* sensors For information on placing the wipers in a
vertical position, see “Replacing wiper
To prevent scratches, never apply strong Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
blades” (컄 page 370). 컄컄
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo
cloth when cleaning the sensor cover. Do with plenty of water.
not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a
When using a steam cleaner or power
dry cloth or sponge.
washer, aim nozzle only briefly from a min-
imum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm) at
sensors 1.
307
Operation
Vehicle care
컄컄 Window cleaning Use a window cleaning solution on all glass

Warning! G surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is
! recommended.
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re- Fold the windshield wiper arms away
move SmartKey from starter switch before from the windshield to a vertical posi- !
cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise the tion only. They could otherwise dam- Fold the windshield wiper arms back
wiper motor might suddenly turn on and age the hood. onto the windshield before turning the
cause injury. SmartKey in the starter switch.
왘 Turn on the wipers and place it in a ver- Hold on to the wiper when folding the
왘 Clean the wiper blade inserts with a tical position. wiper arm back. If released, the force
clean cloth and detergent solution. For information on placing the wipers in a of the impact from the tensioning
vertical position, see “Replacing wiper spring could crack the windshield.
!
blades” (컄 page 370).
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch. Warning! G
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
wiper arm back. If released, the force
move SmartKey from starter switch before
of the impact from the tensioning
cleaning the windshield, otherwise the wiper
spring could crack the windshield.
motor might suddenly turn on and cause in-
jury.
308
Operation
Vehicle care
Light alloy wheels Steering wheel and gear selector lever Seat belts
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly The webbing must not be treated with
should be used for regular cleaning of the or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear,
light alloy wheels. Leather Care. lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
webbing at temperatures above 176°F
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
Cup holder (80°C) or in direct sunlight.
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, us-
ing a soft bristle brush and a strong spray Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
of water. mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a Warning! G
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-
Follow the instructions on the container.
ened in lukewarm solution. Do not use Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
i scouring agents. severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Use only acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid could lead to corrosion. Hard plastic trim items
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Instrument cluster Care onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
Headliner and shelf below rear window
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-
ened in a lukewarm solution. Do not use Clean with a soft bristle brush, or use a
scouring agents. dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
dirt.
309
Operation
Vehicle care
Leather upholstery !
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing Do not use Mercedes-Benz approved
clothing that has the tendency to give off Leather Care or any solvents to clean
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause nubuck leather upholstery.
the upholstery to become permanently dis- Avoid hard scrubbing on nubuck leath-
colored. By lining the seats with a proper er upholstery.
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.
MB Tex upholstery
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
and dry thoroughly or clean with
Care onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
with light pressure.
Exercise particular care when cleaning per-
forated leather as its underside should not
Plastic and rubber parts
become wet.
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Nubuck leather upholstery (E 55 AMG)
Wood trims
The nubuck leather upholstery is treated
with a protective coating. Wipe nubuck Dampen cloth using water and use damp
leather upholstery with damp microfiber cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.
cloth to remove dust and other light stains. Do not use solvents like tar remover or
Carefully dab nubuck leather upholstery wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
with a microfiber cloth to remove oil stains. these may be abrasive.
310
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Batteries
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
311
Practical hints
What to do if …
왔 What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster General information: turning the SmartKey in the starter switch
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to to position 2, have it checked and replaced
come on during the bulb self-check when if necessary.
Problem Possible cause Suggested solution

- The yellow ABS malfunction The ABS has detected a malfunction and has 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
warning lamp comes on while switched off. The BAS and the ESP are also Wheels may lock during hard braking,
driving. switched off (see messages in display). reducing steering capability.
The SBC brake system is still functioning nor- 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
mally but without the ABS available. rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, oth-
er systems such as the Parktronic system*, Failure to follow these instructions in-
Distronic*, or the automatic transmission creases the risk of an accident.
may also be malfunctioning.
왘 Read and observe messages in the
display (컄 page 321).
The charging voltage has fallen below When the voltage is above this value
10 volts. The ABS has switched off. again, the ABS is operational again.
왘 If necessary, have the generator and
battery checked.
312
Practical hints
What to do if …

v The yellow ABS/ESP warning The ESP is deactivated. Risk of accident! 왘 Turn the ESP back on (컄 page 85).
lamp comes on while driving. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
If the ESP cannot be turned back on, have
ing road conditions.
the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possi-
ble.
v The yellow ABS/ESP warning The ABS, ESP or traction control has come 왘 When driving off, apply as little throt-
lamp flashes while driving. into operation because of detected traction tle as possible.
loss in at least one tire. Distronic* is deacti-
왘 While driving, ease up on the acceler-
vated.
ator.
Distronic* is switched off.
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather condi-
tions.
왘 Do not deactivate the ESP.
Exceptions: (컄 page 85).
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of accidents.
313
Practical hints
What to do if …

3 (Canada only)
; (USA only)
The red brake warning lamp You are driving with the parking brake set. 왘 Release the parking brake.
comes on while driving and you
왘 Observe the additional message in
hear a warning sound.
the display.
The red brake warning lamp 앫 There is a malfunction in the SBC brake 왘 Risk of accident! Do not drive any fur-
comes on while driving. system. ther. Consult a Mercedes-Benz
Service Center. Under no circum-
앫 There is insufficient brake fluid in the res-
stances should you top up the brake
ervoir.
fluid. This will not solve the problem.
!
Warning! G Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can re-
sult in spilling brake fluid on hot engine If you find that the brake fluid in the
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi-
can be seriously burned. minimum mark or below, have the
nated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked for brake pad
brake system checked immediately if the
thickness and leaks.
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system.
314
Practical hints
What to do if …

? The yellow “CHECK ENGINE” mal- There is a malfunction in: 왘 Have the vehicle checked as soon as
function indicator lamp comes on possible by an authorized
앫 The fuel management system
while driving. Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫 The ignition system An on-board diagnostic connector is
앫 The emission control system used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics sys-
앫 Systems which affect emissions tem. It allows the accurate identifica-
Such malfunctions may result in excessive tion of system malfunctions through
emissions values and may switch the en- the readout of diagnostic trouble
gine to its limp-home (emergency opera- codes. It is located in the front left
tion) mode. area of the footwell next to the park-
ing brake.
The fuel cap is not closed tightly. 왘 Check the fuel cap.
Your gas tank is empty. 왘 After refuelling, start the engine three
or four times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.
315
Practical hints
What to do if …

D The red coolant warning lamp There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir. 왘 Immediately add coolant to prevent
comes on when the engine is engine from overheating
running. (컄 page 287).
If this warning lamp comes on frequently, 왘 Have the cooling system checked.
there is a leak in the cooling system.
If the coolant level is correct, the electric ra- 왘 If the coolant temperature is below
diator fan may be broken. 257°F (125°C), you can continue
driving to the nearest authorized
왘 Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving
uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
D The red coolant warning lamp The coolant temperature has exceeded 왘 Stop as soon as possible and allow
comes on while driving and you 257°F (125°C). the engine and coolant to cool down.
hear a warning sound.
Warning! G catch fire. You could be seriously burned. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
Driving when your engine is badly overheat- serious burns and can occur just by opening engine has cooled down.
ed can cause some fluids which may have the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
leaked into the engine compartment to if you see or hear steam coming from it.
316
Practical hints
What to do if …

l The red DTR warning lamp You are too close to the vehicle in front of you 왘 Apply the brakes immediately to in-
comes on while driving. to maintain selected speed. crease the following distance.
l The red DTR warning lamp 앫 You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle 왘 Apply the brakes immediately.
comes on while driving and you ahead of you.
hear a warning chime sound.
앫 The distance warning system has recog- 왘 Carefully observe the traffic situation.
nized a stationary obstacle on your prob- You may need to brake or maneuver
able line of travel. to avoid hitting an obstacle.
W The yellow fuel tank reserve The fuel level has gone below the reserve 왘 Refuel at the next gas station
warning lamp comes on while mark. (컄 page 280).
driving.
< The red seat belt telltale illumi- The telltale reminds you to fasten seat belts. 왘 Fasten your seat belt.
nates briefly and a warning
chime sounds after starting the
engine.
317
Practical hints
What to do if …

1 The red SRS indicator lamp There is a malfunction in the restraint sys- 왘 Drive with added caution to the near-
comes on while driving. tems. The air bags or emergency tensioning est authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or ter.
fail to activate in an accident.
Warning! G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an acci-
dent, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in an
accident and/or injury to you or to others.
318
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp in center console

PASS AIR BAG OFF The system is malfunctioning 왘 Have the system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
The indicator lamp illuminates and remains
illuminated with the weight of a typical adult
or someone larger than a small individual on 왘 Also note any messages in the
the front passenger seat. multifunction display and follow cor-
rective steps (컄 page 350).
Warning! G
If the PASS AIR BAG OFF lamp illuminates
and remains illuminated with the weight of a
typical adult or someone larger than a small
individual on the front passenger seat, do
not have any passenger use the front pas-
senger seat until the system has been re-
paired.
319
Practical hints
What to do if …

PASS AIR BAG OFF The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Make sure that there is nothing between seat cush-
ion and child seat and check installation of the child
The indicator lamp does not illuminate
seat.
and/or does not remain illuminated with
the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in 왘 Make sure that no objects applying supplemental
a standard child restraint or less on the weight onto the seat are present.
front passenger seat.
왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the
seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, brief-
cases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head
restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system
may recognize such forces as supplemental weight.
왘 If the light remains out, have the system checked as
soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Do not transport a child on the front passen-
ger seat until the system has been repaired.
왘 Also note any messages in the multifunction display
and follow corrective steps (컄 page 350).
Warning! G weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a

standard child restraint or less on the front
If the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp passenger seat, do not transport a child on
does not illuminate or remains out with the the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
320
Practical hints
What to do if …
Messages in the display i

Warning! G Turning the SmartKey in the starter
The control system shows warning and
switch to position 2, or pressing the
malfunction messages in the multifunction All categories of messages contain impor-
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button twice
display. tant information which should be taken note
to position 2 causes all lamps as well
of and, where a malfunction is indicated, ad-
Certain warning and malfunction messag- as the multifunction display to come
dressed as soon as possible at an autho-
es are accompanied by an audible signal. on. Make sure that they are all in work-
Address these messages accordingly and ing order before starting your journey.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
follow the additional instructions given in damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
this Operator’s Manual. On the pages that follow, you will find a
Limited Warranty, or result in property dam-
compilation of the most important warning
Selecting the malfunction memory menu in age or personal injury.
and malfunction messages that may ap-
the control system (컄 page 134) displays pear in the display. High priority messages
both cleared and uncleared messages. appear on a red background.
High-priority messages appear in the mul- Warning! G
tifunction display in red color.
No messages will be displayed if either the
Certain messages of high priority cannot instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
be cleared from the multifunction display play is inoperative.
using the reset button.
Contact the nearest authorized
Other messages of high priority and mes- Mercedes-Benz Center.
sages of less immediate priority can be
cleared from the multifunction display us-
ing the reset button (컄 page 22) and are
then stored in the malfunction message
memory (컄 page 142).
321
Practical hints
What to do if …
Text messages
Display Display message Possible cause Possible solution

ABS Malfunction! The ABS has detected a malfunction 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! and has switched off. The ESP and Wheels will lock during hard braking, reduc-
the BAS are also deactivated. The ing steering capability.
SBC brake system is still functioning
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
normally but without the ABS avail-
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
able.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of accident.
Display malfunction The ABS or the ABS display is mal- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! functioning.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
322
Practical hints
What to do if …

Battery Conven. Functions The battery has insufficient voltage As soon as the on-board voltage is sufficient,
Protection Temporarily and can no longer supply conve- the consumers will switch on again.
Unavailable nience functions such as the rear
window defroster.
Please Note: Conven. Functions On-board voltage is sufficient; the
Available Again consumers will switch on again.
Cruise control Visit workshop! Cruise control or Distronic* is mal- 왘 Have the cruise control or Distronic*
functioning. checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Distronic External interference The Distronic* is switched off and is 왘 Try activating the Distronic* again later.
Reactivate! temporarily unavailable.
Visit workshop! The Distronic* is malfunctioning or 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
the display is malfunctioning. as soon as possible.
323
Practical hints
What to do if …

Distronic Currently unavailable DISTRONIC* is switched off if: 왘 If necessary, clean the DISTRONIC cover in
see oper. manual the area of the radiator grille.
앫 the DISTRONIC cover in the area
of the radiator grille is dirty 왘 Restart the vehicle.
앫 the functionality is impaired by or

heavy rain or thick fog DISTRONIC* becomes operational again with-
out the engine being restarted when:
앫 dirt on the grille falls off while driving (e.g.
slush or snow)
앫 the system recognizes full sensor availabili-
ty (due to lessening rain or the road surface
drying)
앫 the message in the multifunction display
disappears
앫 the speed last stored flashes in the display
for five seconds.
You can operate DISTRONIC* as usual again.
324
Practical hints
What to do if …

ESP Malfunction! The ESP has detected a malfunction 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! and switched off.
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
The SBC brake system is still func- Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
tioning normally. The ABS may still
be operational.
the risk of an accident.
not available! The ESP is deactivated because of a 왘 Synchronize the ESP. With the vehicle sta-
See Operator’s Manual malfunction or interrupted power tionary, turn the steering wheel completely
supply. to the left and then to the right to synchro-
nize the ESP.
The SBC brake system is still func-
tioning normally. If the ESP message does not go out:
왘 Continue driving with added caution.
! both directions as far as it will go with-

When synchronizing the ESP, make out the wheels hitting any objects, e.g.
sure you can turn the steering wheel in a road curb.
325
Practical hints
What to do if …

ESP Display malfunction The ESP or the ESP display is mal- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
Visit workshop! functioning.
P Gear selector lever in P You have attempted to turn off the 왘 Place the gear selector lever in position P.
engine with the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button with the gear se-
lector lever not in P.
You have opened the driver's door
with the gear selector lever not in P.
P/N Shift to N or P You have attempted to start the en- 왘 Place the gear selector lever in position P
gine with the KEYLESS-GO* or N. Make sure the brake pedal is de-
start/stop button while the gear se- pressed.
lector lever was in position R or D.
326
Practical hints
What to do if …
Symbol messages
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause Possible solution

# Undervoltage The battery has insufficient voltage. 왘 Turn off unnecessary electrical con-
Switch off sumers.
consumers
Visit workshop! The battery was charged with a battery 왘 Have the battery checked at a service
charger or jump started. station.
The battery is no longer charging. 왘 Stop immediately and check the

Possible causes: poly-V-belt.
앫 alternator malfunctioning If it is broken:
앫 broken poly-V-belt 왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an in-
Do not forget that the brake system re-
operative water pump which may re-
quires electrical energy and may be oper-
sult in damage to the engine. Notify
ating with restricted capability.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Considerably greater brake pedal force is
required and the stopping distance is in- If it is intact:
creased.
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Ad-
just driving to be consistent with
reduced braking responsiveness.
327
Practical hints
What to do if …

# Battery/Alternator The battery is malfunctioning. 왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
Stop vehicle! to do so. Adjust driving to be consis-
The SBC brake system requires electrical
tent with reduced braking responsive-
energy and therefore has only limited op-
ness.
eration. Considerably greater brake pedal
force is required and the stopping dis- 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
tance is increased. Center.
Undervoltage The battery has insufficient voltage. 왘 Start the engine (컄 page 43).
Charge battery
Malfunction The consumer battery has insufficient The electrical consumers will come back
Electrical consumers voltage and can no longer supply the con- online as soon as on-board voltage is suf-
switched off venience functions such as seat ventila- ficient.
tion*.
( Backrest rear right The rear seat backrest is not engaged. 왘 Adjust the rear seat backrest until it is
not locked fully engaged in position.
Backrest rear left The rear seat backrest is not engaged. 왘 Adjust the rear seat backrest until it is
not locked fully engaged in position.
328
Practical hints
What to do if …

2 Brake wear The brake pads have reached their wear 왘 Brake pad thickness must be visually
Visit workshop! limit. inspected at the intervals specified in
the Service Booklet.
왘 Have the brake pads replaced as soon
as possible.
T Brake malfunction The SBC brake system is in the emergen- 왘 Do not drive any further.
Stop vehicle cy operation mode. Considerably greater
왘 Stop the vehicle and notify an autho-
brake pedal force is required and the
stopping distance is increased.
왘 Significantly greater force must be ap-
Do not exceed a speed of 55 mph
plied to the brake pedal.
(90 km/h).
왘 Call for Roadside Assistance.
Except Canada: Reduced The battery has insufficient voltage and 왘 Start the engine.
; braking effect cannot supply sufficient power to the
The message disappears when suffi-
Canada only: Start engine! SBC brake system.
cient voltage is available
3 Longer
stopping dist.
Start engine!
329
Practical hints
What to do if …

Except Canada: Reduced The SBC brake system is in emergency 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
; braking effect operation mode. Considerable brake ped-
왘 Adjust driving to be consistent with
Canada only: Visit workshop! al force is required and the stopping dis-
reduced braking responsiveness.
3 Longer
tance is increased.
stopping dist.
Visit workshop!
Service brake! There are malfunctions, but the SBC 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Visit workshop! brake system is operating normally. Center as soon as possible.
Brake overheated! The brake system is overheated due to an 왘 Relieve the load on the brake system.
Drive carefully! excessive load on the brakes.
왘 Drive more smoothly and think ahead
to avoid unnecessary braking.
왘 When driving down slopes, shift into a
lower gear to use the engine’s braking
power (컄 page 163).
왘 Cautiously continue driving so that
the air stream will cool down the
brakes.
Release You are driving with the parking brake 왘 Release the parking brake
park. brake! set. (컄 page 45).
330
Practical hints
What to do if …

Except Canada: Brake fluid There is insufficient brake fluid in the 왘 Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and
; Visit workshop! reservoir. notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Canada only: Center. Do not add brake fluid! This
3 will not solve the problem.
Warning! G Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on

the ground is only permissible for distances
Don’t add brake fluid before checking the
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid res-
Driving while these messages are displayed up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to ervoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
can result in an accident. Have your brake exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more infor- engine parts and the brake fluid catching
system checked immediately. mation, refer to “Towing the vehicle” fire. You can be seriously burned.
(컄 page 385).
system, we recommend that the vehicle be If the SBC brake system enters its emergen- i
transported with all wheels off the ground cy operation mode, the driver must apply If you find that the brake fluid in the
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly significantly greater brake pedal pressure brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
equipment. and depress the pedal much further than minimum mark or below, have the
normal to obtain braking effect. If neces- brake system checked for brake pad
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do sary, apply full pressure to the brake pedal. thickness and leaks.
not permit the use of the recommended Brakes may only be applied to the front
towing methods and the vehicle requires wheels. Stopping distance is increased!
towing with all four wheels on the ground. !
Low brake fluid in the reservoir may cause Brake pad thickness must be visually
the braking system to fail! inspected by a qualified technician at
the intervals specified in the Service
Booklet.
331
Practical hints
What to do if …

? Visit workshop! There may be a malfunction in the: 왘 Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
앫 fuel injection system
ter.
앫 ignition system
앫 exhaust system
앫 fuel system
B Coolant The coolant level is too low. 왘 Add coolant (컄 page 287).
Check level
왘 If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by
! Do not drive without sufficient amount

Warning! G Do not ignore the low engine coolant of coolant in the cooling system. The
level warning. Extended driving with engine will overheat causing major en-
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
the message and symbol displayed gine damage.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may cause serious engine damage not
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
engine parts. You can be seriously burned.
Warranty.
332
Practical hints
What to do if …

Ï Coolant The coolant is too hot. 왘 Stop the vehicle.
Stop, engine off!
왘 Only start the engine again after the
message disappears. You could other-
wise damage the engine.
During severe operation conditions and

Warning! G stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
Driving when your engine is badly overheat-
ed can cause some fluids which may have !
leaked into the engine compartment to The engine should not be operated with
catch fire. You could be seriously burned. the coolant temperature above 248°F
Steam from an overheated engine can cause (120°C). Doing so may cause serious
serious burns and can occur just by opening damage which is not covered by the
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
333
Practical hints
What to do if …

Ï Coolant The poly-V-belt could be broken. 왘 Stop immediately and check the
Stop, engine off! poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an in-
operative water pump which may re-
sult in damage to the engine. Notify
If it is intact:
왘 Do not continue to drive the vehicle
with this message displayed. Doing so
could result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Warranty.
Coolant The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunc- 왘 Observe the coolant temperature dis-
Visit workshop! tioning. play.
왘 Have the fan replaced as soon as pos-
sible.
334
Practical hints
What to do if …

G Display malfunction The instrument cluster display is malfunc- 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
tioning.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Display malfunction The displays for several systems have 왘 Have the electronic systems checked
Visit workshop! malfunctioned. Some systems them- by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
selves may also have malfunctioned. ter.
± Display malfunction Certain electronic systems are unable to 왘 Have the electronic systems checked
Visit workshop! relay information to the control system. by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
The following systems may have failed: ter.
앫 Coolant temperature display
앫 Tachometer
앫 Cruise control display
J Door open You are attempting to drive with one or 왘 Close the doors.
more doors open.
335
Practical hints
What to do if …

: USA only: The engine oil level is too low. 왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 286) and
Add 1 Qt. engine oil check the engine oil level
at next refueling (컄 page 285).
Canada only:
Add 1 Liter engine oil
at next refueling
Engine oil level There is no oil in the engine. There is a 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
Stop, engine off! danger of engine damage. soon as possible.
왘 Turn off the engine.
왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 286) and
check the engine oil level
(컄 page 285).
Engine oil level You have added too much engine oil. 왘 Have oil siphoned or drained off. Ob-
Reduce oil level! There is a risk of damaging the engine or serve all legal requirements with re-
the catalytic converter. spect to its disposal.
336
Practical hints
What to do if …

: Engine oil The engine oil has dropped to a critical 왘 Check the engine oil level
Visit workshop! level. (컄 page 285) and add oil as required
(컄 page 286).
왘 If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
It may be that there is water in the engine 왘 Have the engine oil checked.
oil.
Engine oil level The measuring system is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the measuring system checked
Visit workshop! by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
When the Engine oil - Visit workshop! If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive !
message appears while the engine is run- to the nearest service station where the The engine oil level warnings should
ning and at operating temperature, the en- engine oil should be topped to the required not be ignored. Extended driving with
gine oil level has dropped to approximately level with an approved oil. the symbol displayed could result in
the minimum level. serious engine damage that is not
When this occurs, the warning will first covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
come on intermittently and then stay on if Warranty.
the oil level drops further.
337
Practical hints
What to do if …

A Reserve fuel The fuel level has dropped below the re- 왘 Refuel at the next gas station
serve mark. (컄 page 280).
Y Hood open! You are driving with the hood open. 왘 Close the hood (컄 page 283).
F Key The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* batter- 왘 Change the batteries (컄 page 361).
Check battery! ies are discharged.
Key The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not 왘 Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
not recognized! recognized while the engine is running to do so.
because
왘 Search for the SmartKey.
앫 the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is Otherwise the vehicle cannot be cen-
not in the vehicle trally locked nor can the engine be
앫 there is strong radio-frequency inter- started again after the engine is
ference stopped.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is mo- 왘 Change the position of the SmartKey
mentarily not recognized. in the vehicle.
왘 Operate the vehicle with the
SmartKey in the starter switch if nec-
essary.
338
Practical hints
What to do if …

F Key detected A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the 왘 Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
in vehicle! vehicle was recognized while locking the
vehicle from the outside.
Keyless go The KEYLESS-GO* system is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Check system ing. Center as soon as possible.
Key This display appears (for a maximum of 왘 Insert SmartKey in the starter switch.
Do not forget key 60 seconds) if the driver’s door is opened
왘 Take the SmartKey with KEY-
with the engine shut off and no SmartKey
LESS-GO* with you when leaving the
in the starter switch.
vehicle.
This message is only a reminder.
Remove key! You have forgotten to remove the 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the start-
SmartKey. er switch.
Replace key There is no additional code available for 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
SmartKey or SmartKey with Center as soon as possible.
KEYLESS-GO*.
339
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Brake light Brake lamp illumination is delayed or 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Visit workshop! lamp is permanently on. Center as soon as possible.
Brake light, left The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. A 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Back-up light on! backup bulb is being used. Center as soon as possible.
Brake light, right The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Display malfunction The display for the lamps or the system is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Visit workshop! malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible.
Front foglight, The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
left
Front foglight, The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
right
Headlt. cornering The Bi-Xenon cornering lamps system is 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible.
Back- up light on malfunctioning. Another light is being Center as soon as possible.
used.
malfunction malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible.
Visit workshop!
340
Practical hints
What to do if …

. High beam, The left high beam lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
left ing.
High beam, The right high beam lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
right ing.
License plate lamp, The left license plate lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
left ing.
License plate lamp, The right license plate lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
right tioning.
Lamp sensor The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The 왘 In the control system, set lamp opera-
Visit workshop! headlamps switch on automatically. tion to manual mode (컄 page 151).
왘 Switch on headlamps using the exteri-
or lamp switch.
Low beam, left The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Low beam, right The right low beam lamp is malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
ing. Center as soon as possible.
341
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Marker light, The front left side marker lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
front left functioning.
Marker light The front right side marker lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
front right functioning.
Park. light, front left The left parking lamps are malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Back-up light on! ing. A backup bulb is being used. Center as soon as possible.
Park. light, front right The right parking lamps are malfunction- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Back-up light on! ing. A backup bulb is being used. Center as soon as possible.
Rear foglight The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. A 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Back-up light on! backup bulb is being used.
Reverse light, left The left reverse light is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Reverse light, right The right backup lamp is malfunctioning. 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Switch off lights! Lamps have been turned on although the 왘 Switch off the headlights.
SmartKey in the starter switch is in posi-
tion 0.
Tail light, left The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Tail light, right The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
342
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Turn signal, rear left The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Back-up light on! tioning. A backup bulb is being used.
Turn signal, rear right The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Turn sig., front left The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Turn sig., front right The right front turn signal lamp is mal- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Back-up light on! functioning. A backup bulb is being used.
Turn sig., The left turn signal in the side mirror is 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
left mirror malfunctioning. This message will only possible.
appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
Turn sig., The right turn signal in the side mirror is 왘 Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
right mirror malfunctioning. This message will only possible.
appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
H Tire pres. monitor The tire pressure is being checked.
activated!
Tire pres. monitor The tire inflation pressure monitor* is de- 왘 Activate the tire inflation pressure
Reactivate activated. monitor* (컄 page 294).
343
Practical hints
What to do if …

H Tire pres. monitor The tire inflation pressure monitor* is un- 왘 Check the tire pressure at the next
not activated! able to monitor the tire pressure due to service station.
앫 the presence of several wheel sensors
in the vehicle.
앫 excessive wheel sensor tempera-
tures.
앫 a nearby radio interference source.
앫 unrecognized wheel sensors mount-
ed.
Tire pressure The tire pressure is being checked.
display after driv. a
few mins. Reactivate us-
ing R button
Warning! G You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-

ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
344
Practical hints
What to do if …

H Tire pres. monitor The tire inflation pressure monitor is mal- 왘 Have the tire inflation pressure moni-
Visit workshop! functioning. tor checked by an authorized
A wheel without proper sensor was in-
stalled. 왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 372).
Tire pres. The tire pressure has decreased signifi- 왘 Check and correct tire pressure as re-
Caution, tire defect! cantly in one or more tires. quired (컄 page 292).
Tire pres. One or more tires is deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
Caution, tire defect avoiding abrubt steering and braking
maneuvers.
왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 372).
Tire pres. The tire pressure in one or more tires is 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
Check tires! already below the minimum value. avoiding abrubt steering and braking
maneuvers.
The tire pressure in one or more tires is
low. 왘 Change the wheel (컄 page 372).

345
Practical hints
What to do if …

H Tire pres. RL The left rear tire is deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
Caution avoiding abrupt steering and braking
Tire defect maneuvers.
Tire pres. RL The left rear tire pressure is low. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
Check tires!
왘 Check the tire pressure.
Tire pres. RR The right rear tire is deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
Caution avoiding abrubt steering and braking
Tire pres. RR The right rear tire pressure is low. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
Check tires!

346
Practical hints
What to do if …

H Tire pres. FL The left front tire is deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
Caution avoiding abrupt steering and braking
Tire pres. FL The right rear tire pressure is low. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
Check tires!
Tire pres. FR The right front tire is deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
Caution avoiding abrubt steering and braking
Tire pres. FR The right front tire pressure is low. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt.
Check tires!

347
Practical hints
What to do if …

< Seat belt system The seat belt system is malfunctioning. 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Visit workshop! Center as soon as possible.
9 Service memory full The FSS Plus service memory cannot 왘 Have the service memory checked by
See Operator’s Manual save any more data. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
K Close You have opened the driver’s door with 왘 Close the sliding/pop-up roof
Sunroof the SmartKey removed from the starter (컄 page 206).
switch and the sliding/pop-up roof open.
J Close You have opened the driver’s door with 왘 Close the sliding/pop-up roof
Sunroof the SmartKey removed from the starter (컄 page 206).
switch and the sliding/pop-up roof open.
348
Practical hints
What to do if …

L Tele Aid defective One or more main functions of the Tele 왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by
Visit workshop! Aid system are malfunctioning. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tele Aid battery The emergency power battery for the Tele 왘 Have the Tele Aid system checked by
Visit workshop! Aid system is malfunctioning. If the vehi- an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
cle battery is also dead, Tele Aid will not
be operational.
1 Restraint system The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Drive with added caution to the near-
malfunction est authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
Visit workshop! ter.
Warning! G Center immediately to have the system

checked; otherwise the SRS may not be
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi- activated when needed in an accident,
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be which could result in serious or fatal injury,
operational. or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnec-
essarily which could also result in injury.
For your safety, we strongly recommend
that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
349
Practical hints
What to do if …

Front passenger Air bag is activated while Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible
airbag activated driving even though a child, and check the following:
see Oper.’s Man. small individual, or object
왘 Make sure that there is nothing between seat cush-
below the system's weight
ion and child seat and check installation of the child
threshold is on the front
seat.
passenger seat, or the
front passenger seat is 왘 Make sure that no objects applying supplemental
empty. Objects on the seat weight onto the seat are present.
or forces acting on the seat 왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the
may make the system seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, brief-
sense supplemental cases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head
weight. restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system
may recognize such forces as supplemental weight
and sense that an occupant on the front passenger
seat is of a heavier weight than actually present.
(Continued on next page)
350
Practical hints
What to do if …

Front passenger If performing any of the above corrective steps is suc-
airbag activated cessful, the message Front passenger airbag deacti-
see Oper.’s Man. vated will appear in the multifunction display,
confirming the situation has been remedied. Note that
after performing the corrective steps, it may take up to
60 seconds for the message Front passenger airbag
deactivated to appear.
If the message Front passenger airbag activated
remains on in the multifunction display and/or the
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains out even
after performing the above corrective steps, have the
system checked as soon as possible by an authorized
Warning! G indicator lamp remains out even after per-

forming the above corrective steps, do not
If the message Front passenger airbag have any children12 years old and under
activated remains on in the multifunction and other small individuals use the front
display and/or the PASS AIR BAG OFF passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
351
Practical hints
What to do if …

Front passenger Air bag is deactivated while Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible
airbag deactivated driving even though an and check the following:
see Oper.’s Man. adult or someone larger
왘 Do not lean on armrests or lift yourself up using han-
than a small individual is
dle over the door.
occupying the front pas-
senger seat. Forces acting 왘 Adjust the seat in a height position (컄 page 35).
on the seat may make the 왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the
system sense a decrease seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, brief-
in weight. cases etc. lodged underneath, behind or around the
seat). Such forces may cause the system to sense
that an occupant of a lesser weight than actually
present is on the front passenger seat.
왘 Re-position yourself.
왘 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with
your back against the seat backrest.
If performing any of the above corrective steps is
successful, the message Front passenger airbag
activated will appear in the multifunction display,
confirming the situation has been remedied.
(Continued on next page)
352
Practical hints
What to do if …

Front passenger Note that after performing the corrective steps, it may
airbag deactivated take up to 60 seconds for the message Front passen-
see Oper.’s Man. ger airbag activated to appear.
If the message Front passenger airbag deactivated
remains on in the multifunction display and/or the
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains on even after
performing the above corrective steps, have the system
checked as soon as possible by an authorized
Do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat
until the system has been repaired.
Warning! G
If the message Front passenger airbag
deactivated remains on in the multifunc-
tion display and/or the PASS AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp remains illuminated even af-
ter performing the above corrective steps,
do not have any passenger use the front
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
353
Practical hints
What to do if …

t Function This display appears if button t or
Not available! s on the multifunction steering wheel
is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.
Ê Trunk open! This message will appear whenever the 왘 Close the trunk lid.
trunk lid is open.
W Washer fluid The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 289).
Check level! of total reservoir capacity.
354
Practical hints
What to do if …

@ Vehicle rising! Your vehicle is adjusting to your level se-
lection.
Level selec. canceled The “Raised” level setting is canceled at 왘 Reactivate the “Raised” level setting.
vehicle speeds of over 75 mph
(120 km/h).
Stop, car too low! The vehicle level control is malfunction- Avoid excessive steering input. The fend-
ing. er or tires could otherwise be damaged.
Listen for scraping noises.
Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
왘 Drive to the side of the road and se-
lect a higher vehicle level. Depending
on the type of malfunction, this may
raise the vehicle’s level.
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
Visit workshop! The system is functional only to a limited 왘 Do not drive faster than 50 mph
extent. (80 km/h).
The system display or the system is mal- 왘 Have the vehicle checked at an autho-
functioning. rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
355
Practical hints
왔 Where will I find ...?
First aid kit Spare wheel Removing the spare wheel
왘 Turn luggage bowl counterclockwise.
The first aid kit is in the storage compart- The spare wheel is located under the trunk
ment at the front edge of the front passen- floor. 왘 Remove spare wheel 2.
ger seat.
왘 Lift the trunk floor and engage the han-
Storing the spare wheel
dle in the upper edge of trunk.
왘 Place spare wheel 2 in wheel well.
왘 Remove the luggage box (컄 page 357).
왘 Turn luggage bowl clockwise to its stop
to secure the spare wheel.
!
Always lower trunk floor before closing
trunk lid.
1 Tab i
왘 Pull tab 1 upward. Vehicles with collapsible tire:
The electrical air pump is located under
왘 Fold the covering forward. 1 Vehicle tool kit luggage bowl 3.
Wheel bolt wrench and Jack
왘 Remove the first aid kit.
2 Spare wheel
i 3 Luggage bowl
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
356
Practical hints
In the case of a flat tire, you may tempo- Luggage box

Warning! G rarily use the spare wheel when observing
the following restrictions:
The dimensions of the spare wheel Remove luggage box
앫 Do not exceed a vehicle speed of
(Minispare wheel or collapsible tire) are dif-
ferent from those of the road wheels. As a 50 mph (80 km/h).
result, the vehicle handling characteristics 앫 Drive to the nearest tire repair facility
change when driving with a spare wheel to have the flat tire repaired or re-
mounted. placed as appropriate.
The spare wheel should only be used tempo-
앫 Do not operate vehicle with more than
rarily, and replaced with a regular road
one spare wheel mounted.
wheel as quickly as possible.
More information, see “Spare wheel”
(컄 page 402).
1 Fastening clip
2 Luggage box
왘 Turn fastening clips 1 to the left up-
wards from fastening bolts.
왘 Lift luggage box in the area of the fas-
tening bolts and remove it from trunk.
357
Practical hints
Install luggage box Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit is stored in the com-

partment underneath the trunk floor
(컄 page 356).
The vehicle tool kit includes:
앫 One pair of universal pliers
앫 One towing eye bolt
앫 One wheel wrench
왘 Insert luggage box into trunk so that 앫 One alignment bolt
fastening clips are in line with fastening 앫 One fuse extractor
bolts.
앫 Spare fuses
왘 Push front edge of luggage box in direc-
tion of arrow under cover of trunk sill.
왘 Press fastening clips onto fastening
bolts until they lock into place.
358
Practical hints
왔 Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle Unlocking the driver’s door
If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with

the SmartKey, open the driver’s door and
the trunk using the mechanical key.
i
Unlocking your vehicle with the me-
chanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do
one of the following: 1 Mechanical key locking tab
앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the 2 Mechanical key 3 Unlocking
SmartKey. 4 Locking
왘 Move locking tab 1 in the direction of
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter the arrow and slide mechanical key 2 왘 Unlock the door with the mechanical
switch. out of the housing. key. To do so, push the mechanical key
in the lock until it stops and turn it to
앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
the left.
button (컄 page 33).
359
Practical hints
Unlocking the trunk 왘 Turn the mechanical key counterclock- Locking the vehicle
A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft wise to position 1 and hold it in this
position. If you are unable to lock the vehicle with
the SmartKey, lock it with the mechanical
왘 Pull trunk lid handle 2 and lift the
If you are unable to unlock the trunk with key as follows:
trunk lid.
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, open the
왘 Close the passenger doors and the
trunk with the mechanical key. ! trunk.
The handle is located above the rear li- Always make sure there is sufficient
왘 Press the central locking switch in the
cense plate recess. overhead clearance.
cockpit (컄 page 111).
왘 Check to see whether the locking
i
knobs on the passenger doors are still
Unlocking your vehicle with the me- visible. If necessary, push them down
chanical key will trigger the anti-theft manually.
alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do
one of the following: 왘 Slide mechanical key 2 out of the
SmartKey.
앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey. 왘 Lock the driver’s door with the me-
chanical key (컄 page 360).
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
1 Unlocking in an emergency switch. 왘 Check if the trunk is locked.
2 Handle
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘 Insert the mechanical key into the
trunk lid lock. 앫 Grasp the outside door handle.
앫 Press the start/stop button.
360
Practical hints
Changing batteries in the SmartKey/ SmartKey 왘 Remove mechanical key 1

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 359).
i
왘 Insert the mechanical key in side open-
If the batteries in the SmartKey are dis- When changing batteries, always re-
ing and push gray slide.
charged, the vehicle can no longer be place both batteries.
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to The battery compartment is unlatched.
The required replacement batteries are
have the batteries replaced at an autho- 왘 Pull the battery compartment out of the
available at any Mercedes-Benz
rized Mercedes-Benz Center. SmartKey housing in direction of ar-
Center.
row.
Warning! G 왘 Remove the batteries.
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
Batteries contain materials that can harm

the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries 1 Mechanical key
for recycling. 2 Battery compartment 3 Battery
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type 4 Contact spring
CR 2025 or equivalent.
361
Practical hints
왘 Using a lint-free cloth, insert new bat- 왘 Pull the battery compartment out of the
teries under the contact spring with the SmartKey housing in direction of ar-
plus (+) side facing up. row.
왘 Return battery compartment into hous- 왘 Using mechanical key 3 apply pres-
ing until it locks into place. sure to position 2.
Battery 1 tilts up slightly.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
왘 Pull out batteries 1 in direction of ar-
i row.
When changing batteries, always re- 왘 Using a lint-free cloth, insert new bat-
place both batteries. 1 Battery
2 Tilt battery up teries with the plus (+) side facing up.
The required replacement batteries are 3 Mechanical key 왘 Return battery compartment into hous-
available at any Mercedes-Benz ing until it locks into place.
Center. Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘 Remove mechanical key (컄 page 359).
왘 Insert the mechanical key in side open-
ing and push grey slide.
The battery compartment is unlatched.
362
Practical hints
Fuel filler flap emergency release Manually unlocking the transmission 왘 Open the storage compartment in the
selector lever center console (컄 page 247).
In case the central locking system does
왘 Take out the cup holder*.
not release the fuel filler flap, you can open In the case of power failure, the transmis-
it manually. sion selector lever can be manually un- Using two fingers in the horizontal slot
locked, e.g. to tow the vehicle. at the upper rear side of the cup holder,
lift cup holder upwards to remove.
왘 Hold the cover at a 45° angle.
왘 Insert a suitable object 1 (e.g. a pin)
through the hole and press the pin
downward.
왘 Remove pin 1.
i
1 Release knob The selector lever is locked again when
1 Pin moving it to position P.
왘 Open trunk lid.
왘 Remove right-side tail trim.
왘 Turn release knob 1 clockwise (ar-
row).
The fuel filler flap can know be opened.
363
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
왔 Opening/closing in an emergency
Sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama 왘 Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to:
sliding/pop-up roof* 앫 slide roof open
You can open or close the sliding/pop-up 앫 lower roof at the rear
roof or panorama sliding/pop-up roof The sliding/pop-up roof or panorama
manually should an electrical malfunction sliding/pop-up roof must be resynchro-
occur. nized after being operated manually
The sliding/pop-up roof or panorama (컄 page 208).
sliding/pop-up roof drive is located be-
hind lens 1 of the interior overhead light.
i
Do not disconnect the electrical con-
nectors.
왘 Obtain crank 2.
왘 Insert crank 2 through hole 1.
왘 Turn crank 2 clockwise to:
앫 Slide roof closed
1 Screen 앫 Raise roof at the rear
왘 Fold screen 1 down.
364
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왔 Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper Bulbs Front lamps
exterior lighting and signaling. It is there-
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as- Lamp Type
semblies are in good working order at all 1 Additional turn signal LED
times. lamps
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely 2 Turn signal lamp 1156 NA
important. Have headlamps checked and
3 Side marker lamp W5W
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See your autho- 4 Halogen headlamps:
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp Low beam H7 (55 W)
adjustment. Bi-Xenon* headlamps:
Low and high beam1 D2S-35 W
i
Backup bulbs will be brought into use 5 Halogen headlamps:
when the following lamps malfunction: High beam/high beam H7 (55 W)
flasher
앫 Standing lamps
Bi-Xenon* headlamps:
앫 Tail lamps High beam flasher H7 (55 W)
Parking and standing W5W
lamps
6 Fog lamp H1 (55 W)
1
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps* do not replace
the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself.
365
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps Notes on bulb replacement 앫 Use only 12 volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.
Lamp Type
Warning! G 앫 Switch lights off before changing a bulb
7 High mounted brake LED to prevent short circuits.
lamp Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
앫 Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
8 Brake, tail, parking, HiP Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Al- handling bulbs.
standing, backup lamps LED* low the lamp to cool down before changing
앫 Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and turn signal lamps. a bulb.
Rear fog lamp (driver's and grease.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
side). 앫 If the newly installed bulb does not light
bulb can explode if you:
9 License plate lamps C5W up, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
앫 touch or move it when hot Center.
앫 drop the bulb
앫 Have the LEDs and bulbs for the follow-
앫 scratch the bulb ing lamps replaced by an authorized
Wear eye and hand protection. Mercedes-Benz Center:
Because of high voltage in Bi-Xenon* lamps, 앫 Additional turn signal lamps in the
it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair exterior rear view mirrors
the lamp and its components. We recom-
앫 High mounted brake lamp
mend that you have such work done by a
qualified technician. 앫 Bi-Xenon* lamps
앫 Front fog lamps
앫 Rear lamps
366
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps Bi-Xenon* headlamps Low beam halogen bulb
왘 Switch off the lights.
Warning! G 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 283).
Do not remove the cover 4 for the Bi-Xe- 왘 Turn the locking mechanism counter-
non headlamp. Because of high voltage in clockwise and remove headlamp
Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the cover 4.
bulb or repair the lamp and its components. 왘 Pull electrical connector off.
We recommend that you have such work
done by a qualified technician. 왘 Release the retaining springs and take
out the bulb.
1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 왘 Insert the new bulb in the socket so
2 High beam halogen bulb that the base is in the recess on the
3 Bulb socket for parking and standing lower left.
lamp 왘 Attach the retaining springs.
4 Cover for Bi-Xenon* (low beam and
high beam) or halogen (low beam) 왘 Insert connector into the bulb.
headlamp 왘 Align headlamp cover and click into
place.
367
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
High beam halogen bulb Front turn signal lamp bulb Parking and standing lamp bulb
왘 Switch off the lights. 왘 Switch off the lights. 왘 Switch off the lights.
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 283). 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 283). 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 283).
왘 Press the clamp and remove headlamp 왘 Twist bulb socket 1 counterclockwise 왘 Press the clamp and remove headlamp
cover. and pull out. cover.
왘 Pull electrical connector off. 왘 Push bulb into socket, turn counter- 왘 Pull out the bulb socket 3 with the
clockwise and remove. bulb.
왘 Turn the locking mechanism counter-
clockwise and take out the high beam 왘 Insert new bulb in socket, push in and 왘 Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
bulb 2. twist clockwise.
왘 Insert a new bulb in the socket.
왘 Insert the new bulb in the socket so 왘 Reinsert bulb socket in lamp and twist
왘 Reinstall the bulb socket.
that the base is in the recess on the clockwise.
lower left. 왘 Align headlamp cover and click into
place.
왘 Attach the retaining springs.
왘 Insert connector into the bulb.
왘 Align headlamp cover and click into
place.
368
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Side marker lamp bulb ! License plate lamp

To prevent scratches, we recommend
that you have the sidemarker bulb re-
placed by an authorized
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Tail lamp assemblies

The tail lamps are equipped with HiP bulbs.
왘 Switch off the lights. 1 Screw
왘 Carefully slide lamp towards front. Warning! G 왘 Switch off the lights.
왘 Remove rear end first. 왘 Loosen both screws 1 and remove
The bulbs in the tail lamps cannot be re- lamp.
왘 Twist bulb socket counterclockwise
placed individually. The tail lamp bulbs are
and pull out. 왘 Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall
under pressure and could explode during an
왘 Pull bulb out of the bulb socket. attempt to replace them. lamp.
왘 Retighten the screws.
왘 Insert new bulb in socket. If the tail lamps are malfunctioning, have
them exchanged at an authorized
왘 Reinstall bulb socket, push in and twist
clockwise.
왘 To reinstall lamp, set rear end in
bumper and let front end snap into
place.
369
Practical hints
왔 Replacing wiper blades
! Removing wiper blades 왘 Fold the wiper arm forward until it
To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper snaps into place.
왘 Turn SmartKey in starter switch to
arms should only be folded forward
when in the vertical position. position 1.
왘 Turn combination switch to wiper
setting II (컄 page 47).
왘 With wiper arm in the vertical position,
turn SmartKey in starter switch to
position 0.
Warning! G
왘 Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to
For safety reasons, remove SmartKey from wiper arm.
starter switch before replacing a wiper 왘 Slide the wiper blade sideways out of
blade. Otherwise the motor could suddenly the retainer.
turn on and cause injury.
370
Practical hints
Installing wiper blades !

Never open the hood when the wiper
왘 Slide wiper blade onto wiper arm until arm is folded forward.
it locks in place.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
왘 Rotate wiper blade into position paral- wiper arm back. If released, the force
lel to wiper arm. of the impact from the tensioning
왘 Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on spring could crack the windshield.
the windshield. Make sure you hold on Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
to the wiper when folding the wiper arm the windshield glass without a wiper
back. blade inserted.
Make certain that the wiper blades are
properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
371
Practical hints
Flat tire
왔 Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle Mounting the spare wheel
Warning! G
왘 Park the vehicle as far as possible from
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel and Preparing the vehicle
moving traffic on a hard surface.
the collapsible tire are different from those Prepare the vehicle as described under
왘 Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle “Preparing the vehicle” on this page.
handling characteristics change when driv- 왘 Engage the steering wheel lock in the
왘 Take the spare wheel out of the trunk
ing with a spare wheel mounted. straight-ahead position and set the
parking brake. (컄 page 356).
The spare wheel should only be used tempo-
왘 Take the wheel wrench and the jack
rarily, and replaced with a regular road 왘 Move the selector lever to P.
out of the trunk (컄 page 358).
왘 Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway. Lifting the vehicle
In the case of a flat tire, you may tempo-
rarily use the spare wheel when observing 왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
the following restrictions: by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
(not included) or other sizable objects.
50 mph (80 km/h). When changing wheel on a level surface:
앫 Drive to the nearest tire repair facility 왘 Place one chock in front of and one be-
to have the flat tire repaired or re- hind the wheel that is diagonally oppo-
placed as appropriate. site to the wheel being changed.

one spare wheel mounted.
372
Practical hints
Flat tire
When changing wheel on a hill: The jack take-up brackets are located di-
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es-
rectly behind the front wheel housing and
왘 Place chocks on the downhill side pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
in front of the rear wheel housing.
blocking both wheels of the other axle. on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Al-
Warning! G ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient ca-
pacity jackstands before working under the
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking vehicle.
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into either side of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from 1 Jack take-up bracket
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always 2 Jack
firmly set parking brake and block wheels 3 Crank
before raising vehicle with jack.
왘 Position jack 2 on firm ground under
Do not disengage parking brake while the
the respective jack take-up bracket 1.
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
왘 On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts (ap-
proximately one full turn with wrench).
373
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel

Warning! G
Position the jack only on the jack take-up
brackets designed for this purpose.
If the jack is not properly positioned, the ve-
hicle may slip off of the jack.
Warning! G
Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
under the take-up bracket so that it is al- The jack is intended only for lifting the vehi- 1 Alignment bolt
ways vertical (plumb-line) as seen from the cle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited
for performing maintenance work under the 왘 Unscrew the upper-most wheel bolt
side, even if the vehicle is parked on an in-
vehicle. Never lie down under the raised ve- and remove.
cline
hicle. Do not start the engine when the vehi- 왘 Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
왘 Turn crank 3 until the tire is a maxi- cle is raised. bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.
Never start engine while vehicle is 왘 Remove the remaining bolts.
raised.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolt
and wheel hub threads.
왘 Remove the wheel.
374
Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting the spare wheel

Warning! G Always replace wheel bolts that are dam- Use only genuine equipment
aged or rusted. Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. They are identi-
Vehicles with collapsible tire:
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. fied by the Mercedes star. Other wheel bolts
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
may come loose.
properly mounted. Damaged wheel hub threads should be re-
paired immediately. Do not continue to drive Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the ve-
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
under these circumstances! Contact an au- hicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
pump (컄 page 376) before lowering the ve-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call tip over.
hicle.
Roadside Assistance.
왘 Clean contact surfaces of wheel and Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-
wheel hub. ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident. Be
왘 Guide the spare wheel onto the align- sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
ment bolt and push it on.
왘 Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
!
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while in- 왘 Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
stalling first wheel bolt. wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
375
Practical hints
Flat tire
Inflating the collapsible tire

Warning! G
!
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are Do not lower the vehicle before inflat-
different from those of the road wheels. As ing the collapsible tire. Otherwise the
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics rim may be damaged.
change when driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted. 왘 Take the electric air pump out of the
The spare wheel should only be used tempo- trunk (컄 page 356).
rarily, and replaced with a regular road
1 Flap
Warning! G 2 Air pump switch
3 Electrical plug
In the case of a flat tire, you may tempo- Observe instructions on air pump label.
4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
rarily use the Minispare wheel when ob-
screw
serving the following restrictions:
5 Union nut
왘 Open flap 1 on the air pump.
50 mph (80 km/h).
왘 Pull out electrical plug 3 and air hose
앫 Drive to the nearest tire repair facility
with pressure gauge 4.
to have the flat tire repaired or re-
placed as appropriate. 왘 Make sure the vent screw on air hose is
closed.
one spare wheel mounted. 왘 Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
376
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘 Screw air hose 4 onto the tire valve. !

왘 Insert electrical plug 3 into vehicle ci- Do not operate the air pump longer Warning! G
gar lighter socket. than eight minutes without interrup-
Follow recommend inflation pressures.
tion. Otherwise it may overheat.
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the ignition to Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
position 1. You may operate the air pump again af- can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-
ter it has cooled off. cause they are more likely to become punc-
or
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop 왘 Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2. etc.
button on the gear selector lever once
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the ignition to Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
without depressing the brake pedal.
position 0. wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
왘 Press I on electric air pump switch 2.
or and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
The electric air pump should now from being overheated.
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
switch on and inflate the tire.
on the gear selector lever twice without
왘 Inflate the tire to approx. 51 psi 왘 Detach the electric air pump.
depressing the brake pedal.
(3.5 bar). 왘 Stow electrical plug 3 and air hose 4
The electric air pump should now be
This takes about five minutes for the switched off. behind flap 1 and place the air pump
collapsible tire. Air hose 4 and union back in the trunk.
왘 If the tire pressure is above 51 psi
nut 5 can become hot duration infla-
tion. Exercise proper caution to avoid (3.5 bar), release excess tire pressure
burning yourself when using the equip- using the vent screw.
ment.
377
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lowering the vehicle

왘 Lower vehicle by turning crank coun-
Warning! G
terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful- Have the tightening torque checked after
ly on its own weight. changing a wheel. The wheels could come
왘 Remove the jack. loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
왘 Before storing the jack in the trunk, it

should be fully collapsed.
i
Wrap the damaged wheel in the protec-
tive film that comes with the spare
wheel and put the wheel in the trunk.
You can also place the damaged wheel
1 - 5 Wheel bolts
down into the spare wheel well. In this
왘 Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol- case, you must stow the holder from
lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat- the spare wheel well in the trunk.
ed (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Do not activate the tire inflation pres-
Observe a tightening torque of 96 lb-ft
sure monitor until the depressurized
(130 Nm).
tire is no longer in the vehicle.
378
Practical hints
Batteries
왔 Batteries
Your vehicle is equipped with two batter-
ies: Warning! G
앫 Main battery (battery for starter and Failure to follow these instructions can re-
electrical consumers; located in the sult in severe injury or death.
trunk).
Observe all safety instructions and precau-
앫 Auxiliary battery (back-up battery; stations when handling automotive batteries
bilizes the electrical system if the main (컄 page 288).
battery is discharged; located in the en-
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
gine compartment)
you might get injured.
The main battery is in the trunk under the Vehicles with spare wheel
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
luggage box. Remove the luggage box 1 Negative terminal
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
(컄 page 357). 2 Positive terminal
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
Warning! G medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
Jump starting must only be done using the
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
main battery in the trunk.
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
379
Practical hints
Batteries
! Disconnecting the battery

Never loosen or detach battery termi- Warning! G
nal clamps while the engine is running
or the SmartKey is in the starter switch.
The SBC brake system requires electrical Warning! G
power to operate.
Otherwise the alternator and other
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply With a disconnected battery
electronic components could be se-
verely damaged. or electrical system may impair brake sys- 앫 you will no longer be able to turn the
tem operation and switch it into its emer- SmartKey in the starter switch and
Have the battery checked regularly by gency operation mode. The same applies if pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. battery is disconnected. To brake, the driver button on the gear selector lever will
Refer to Service Booklet for mainte- must then apply significantly greater brake have no effect
nance intervals or contact your autho- pedal pressure and depress the pedal much 앫 the gear selector lever will remain
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for further further to obtain the expected braking ef- locked in position P
information. fect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to 왘 Depress parking brake firmly or move
the front wheels. Stopping distance is in- gear selector lever to position P.
Warning! G creased! Adjust your driving style according-
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers.
ly. For more information, refer to “The SBC
Do not place metal objects on the battery as brake system” (컄 page 85). 왘 Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
this could result in a short circuit.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
왘 Press the start/stop button until
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
the engine shuts off.
왘 Open the driver’s door.
왘 Open the trunk.
380
Practical hints
Batteries
왘 Remove the luggage box (컄 page 357). 왘 Charge battery in accordance with the i
instructions of the battery charger The following procedures must be car-
왘 Disconnect battery negative lead 1.
manufacturer. ried out following any interruption of
왘 Remove cover 2 from the positive ter-
왘 Reinstall the charged battery. Follow battery power (e.g. due to reconnec-
minal.
the previously described steps in re- tion):
왘 Disconnect the battery positive lead. verse order. 앫 Set the clock (컄 page 148)
(see COMAND operator’s manual).
Removing the battery Reconnecting the battery
앫 Resynchronize the ESP
왘 Remove the screw-nuts securing the 왘 Turn off all electrical consumers. (컄 page 325).
battery.
왘 Connect the positive lead and fasten its 앫 Resynchronize the side windows
왘 Remove the battery bracket. cover. (컄 page 204).
왘 Take out the battery. 왘 Connect the negative lead. 앫 Resynchronize the sliding/pop-up
roof* (컄 page 208) or the panora-
Charging and reinstalling the battery ! ma sliding/pop-up roof*
Never invert the terminal connections! (컄 page 213).
Warning! G 왘 Install the luggage box (컄 page 357). Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Never charge a battery while still installed in ! Large 12 volt storage batteries contain
the vehicle. Gases may escape during charg- The battery, its filler caps and the vent lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
ing and cause explosions that may result in tube must always be securely installed method of disposal. Many states require
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury. when the vehicle is in operation. sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
381
Practical hints
Jump starting
왔 Jump starting
If the battery is discharged, the engine can !
Warning! G be started with jumper cables and the bat- Jump starting may only be performed
tery of another vehicle. Observe the follow- on the main battery installed in the
Failure to follow these directions will cause ing: trunk.
damage to the electronic components, and
앫 Jump starting should only be performed Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at-
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death. when the engine and catalytic convert- tempts.
er are cold.
Never lean over batteries while connecting Do not attempt to start the engine us-
or jump starting, you might get injured. 앫 Do not start the engine if the battery is ing a battery quick charge unit.
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not If the engine does not run after several
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, 앫 Only jump start from batteries with the unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately same voltage rating (12 V). Jump start- checked at the nearest authorized
flush affected area with water, and seek ing with a more powerful battery could Mercedes-Benz Center.
medical help if necessary. damage the vehicle’s electrical system,
which will not be covered by the Excessive unburned fuel generated by
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, repeated failed starting attempts may
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep damage the catalytic converter.
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid 앫 Use only jumper cables with sufficient
improper connection of jumper cables, cross-section and insulated terminal Make sure the jumper cables do not
smoking, etc. clamps. have loose or missing insulation.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery 앫 Always make sure the jumper cables Make sure the cable clamps do not
can result in it exploding, causing personal are not on or near pulleys, fans or other touch any other metal part while the
injury. parts that move when the engine is other end is still attached to a battery.
Read all instructions before proceeding. started or running.
382
Practical hints
Jump starting
왘 Make sure the two vehicles do not

Warning! G touch.
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers.
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke. 왘 Apply parking brake.
Observe all safety instructions and precau- 왘 Shift gear selector lever to position P.
tions when handling automotive batteries
왘 Connect positive terminals 1 and 3
(컄 page 288).
of the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to charged battery 3
The battery is located in the trunk under- first.
neath the luggage box (컄 page 357). Only
jump start the vehicle from the battery in !
the trunk. Never invert the terminal connections!
1 Positive terminal of discharged battery

2 Negative terminal of discharged bat-
tery
3 Positive terminal of charged battery
4 Negative terminal of charged battery
383
Practical hints
Jump starting
왘 Start engine of the vehicle with the Now you can again turn on the electrical
charged battery and run at idle speed. consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
any circumstances.
왘 Connect negative terminals 4 and 2
of the batteries with the jumper cable. 왘 Remove the jumper cables first from
Clamp cable to charged battery 4 negative terminals 2 and 4 and then
first. from positive terminals 1 and 3.
왘 Start the engine of the disabled vehi- Now you can turn on the lights.
cle.
왘 Have the battery checked at the near-
i est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The message Malfunction - electric !
consumers switched off may appear
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
in the instrument cluster. It will disap-
pear as soon as the battery is suffi-
ciently charged.
384
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
왔 Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehi- When circumstances do not permit the !
cle be transported with all wheels off the recommended towing methods, the vehi- If the vehicle is towed with the front
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel cle may be towed with all wheels on the axle raised (not permissible for vehicles
lift/dolly equipment. This method is pref- ground or front wheels raised (except vehi- with 4MATIC), the engine must be shut
erable to other types of towing. cles with 4MATIC) only so far as necessary off (SmartKey in starter switch
to have the vehicle moved to a safe loca- position 0 or 1). Otherwise the ESP will
! tion where the recommended towing immediately be engaged and will apply
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equip- methods can be employed. the rear wheel brakes.
ment with SmartKey in starter switch
turned to position 0. ! When towing the vehicle with all wheels
Vehicles with 4MATIC: on the ground, the selector lever must
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing be in position N and the SmartKey
Towing with sling-type equipment over
so could damage the transfer case, must be in starter switch position 2.
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports. which is not covered by the Mer- When towing the vehicle with all wheels
cedes-Benz Limited Warranty. on the ground or the front axle raised,
To prevent damage during transport, the vehicle may be towed only for dis-
All wheels must be on or off the ground.
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or tances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
Observe instructions for towing the ve-
suspension parts. speed not to exceed 30 mph
hicle with all wheels on the ground.
Switch off the tow-away alarm and the (50 km/h).
automatic central locking
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
385
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
!
To be certain to avoid a possibility of Warning! G Warning! G
damage to the drive train, however, we
If circumstances require towing the vehicle The brake system requires electrical power
recommend the drive shaft be discon-
with all wheels on the ground, always tow to operate.
nected at the rear axle drive flange (ve-
with a tow bar if: A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
hicles with 4MATIC: disconnected at
the front and rear axle drive flanges) for 앫 the engine will not run or electrical system may impair brake sys-
any towing beyond a short tow to a 앫 there is a malfunction in the SBC brake tem operation and switch it into its emer-
nearby garage. system gency operation mode. To brake, the driver
must then apply significantly greater brake
앫 there is a malfunction in the power sup-
ply or in the vehicle’s electrical system pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further to obtain the expected braking ef-
as that will be necessary to adequately con-
fect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
trol the towed vehicle.
brake pedal. Brakes may only be applied to
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the front wheels. Stopping distance is in-
the ground, make certain that the SmartKey creased! Adapt your driving style according-
is in starter switch position 2. ly. For more information, refer to “SBC brake
If the SmartKey is left in the starter switch system” (컄 page 85).
position 0 for an extended period of time, it With the engine not running, there is no
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this power assistance for the steering system. In
case, the steering is locked. To unlock, re- this case, it is important to keep in mind that
move SmartKey from starter switch and re- a considerably higher degree of effort is nec-
insert. essary to steer the vehicle. Adapt your driv-
ing accordingly.
386
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
i ! i
To signal turns while being towed with When towing the vehicle with all wheels The selector lever will remain locked in
the hazard warning flasher in use, turn on the ground, please note the follow- position P and the SmartKey will not
SmartKey in starter switch to ing: turn in the starter switch if the battery
position 2 and activate the combina- With the automatic central locking acti- is disconnected or discharged. See
tion switch for the left or right turn sig- vated and the SmartKey in starter notes on the battery (컄 page 379) or
nal in the usual manner – only the switch position 2, or KEYLESS-GO* on jump starting (컄 page 382).
selected turn signal will operate. start/stop button in position 2, the ve- Manual unlocking transmission selec-
Upon canceling the turn signal, the haz- hicle doors lock if the left front wheel tor lever (컄 page 363).
ard warning flasher will operate again. as well as the right rear wheel are turn-
ing at vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
Switch off the tow-away alarm
(컄 page 90).
To prevent the vehicle door locks from
locking, deactivate the automatic cen-
tral locking (컄 page 111).
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed tow-
ing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable,
tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chas-
sis, frame or suspension parts.
387
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt The towing eye bolt is supplied with the To remove cover:
tool kit (located in the storage compart-
왘 Pull cover in the direction of the arrow.
ment under the trunk floor).
Front of vehicle 왘 Fold cover down to reveal threaded
왘 Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
hole for the towing eye bolt.
tighten with lug wrench.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
To reinstall cover:
tool kit (located in the storage compart-
왘 Fit cover and snap into place. ment under the trunk floor).
왘 Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
Rear of vehicle tighten with lug wrench.
To reinstall cover:
왘 Fit cover and snap into place.
1 Cover on right side of front bumper
To remove cover:
왘 Press mark on cover in direction of ar-
row.
왘 Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for
towing eye bolt.
2 Cover on right side of rear bumper
388
Practical hints
Fuses
왔 Fuses
i Opening Fuse chart
Only install fuses that have been tested 왘 Pull cover 1 open with a screwdriver The fuse chart is found in the fuse box in
and approved by Mercedes-Benz and or similar tool. the passenger compartment. The amper-
that have the specified amperage rat- ages of the fuses are also given there.
왘 Remove cover 1 rearward.
ing.
Never attempt to repair or bridge a Spare fuses
Closing
blown fuse. Have the cause determined Spare fuses are found in the vehicle tool kit
왘 Attach cover 1 in the front.
and remedied by an authorized in the trunk.
Mercedes-Benz Center. 왘 Fold cover 1 in until it engages.
Fuse extractor
Fuse box in passenger compartment The fuse extractor is found in the vehicle
tool kit in the trunk.
i
Only install fuses that have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
that have the specified amperage rat-
ing.
2 Cover Never attempt to repair or bridge a
3 Catches blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
1 Cover 왘 Turn catches 3 counter-clockwise Mercedes-Benz Center.
and remove cover 2.
389
390
Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Consumer information
391
Technical data
Spare parts service
왔 Spare parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers !
necessary technical data for your vehicle. maintain a stock of genuine The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz parts required for mainte- parts and accessories not authorized
nance and repair work. In addition, strate- by Mercedes-Benz could damage the
gically located parts distribution centers vehicle, which is not covered by the
provide quick and reliable parts service. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
More than 300 000 different spare parts could compromise the vehicle’s dura-
for Mercedes-Benz models are available. bility or safety.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject-
ed to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, man-
ufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
392
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are Loss of Service and Warranty
the warranties printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts Information Booklet
Warranty Information Booklet. Your and Accessories Warranties, copies of
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will ex- which are available at any authorized Mer- Should you lose your Service and Warranty
change or repair any defective parts origi- cedes-Benz Center. Information Booklet, have your authorized
nally installed in the vehicle in accordance Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a re-
with the terms of the following warranties: placement. It will be mailed to you.
앫 New Car Limited Warranty
앫 Emission System Warranty
앫 Emission Performance Warranty
앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
393
Technical data
Identification labels
왔 Identification labels
1 Certification label 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 3 Information label, California version
Vacuum line routing for emission con-
trol system
4 Engine number (engraved on engine)
5 Emission control label
When ordering spare parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine numbers.
394
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
왔 Layout of poly-V-belt drive
E 320/E 500 E 55 AMG
1 Automatic belt tensioner The E 55 AMG has two poly-V-belts (belt one
2 Power steering pump shown in purple/belt two shown in black).
3 Air conditioning compressor 1 Idler pulley
4 Crankshaft 2 Automatic belt tensioner
5 Coolant pump 3 Power steering pump
6 Generator (alternator) 4 Air conditioning compressor
7 Idler pulley 5 Crankshaft
6 Coolant pump
7 Generator (alternator)
8 Idler pulley
9 Automatic belt tensioner
a Super charger
395
Technical data
Engine
왔 Engine
Model E 320 (211.0651) E 500 (211.0701)
E 320 4MATIC (211.0821) E 500 4MATIC (211.0831)
Engine 112 113
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 8
Bore 3.54 in (89.90 mm) 3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke 3.31 in (84.00 mm) 3.31 in (84.00 mm)
3
Total piston displacement 195.2 cu.in. (3199 cm ) 303.0 cu.in. (4966 cm3)
Compression ratio 10:1 10:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 221 hp/5600 rpm 302 hp/5600 rpm
(165 kW/5600 rpm) (225 kW/5600 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 232 lb-ft/3000 rpm - 4800 rpm 339 lb-ft/2700 rpm - 4250 rpm
(315 Nm/3000 rpm - 4800 rpm) (460 Nm/2700 rpm - 4250 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6000 rpm 6000 rpm
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2390 mm 2390 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
396
Technical data
Engine
Model E 55 AMG (211.0761)

Engine 113
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 8
Bore 3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke 3.60 in (92.00 mm)
Total piston displacement 331.8 cu.in. (5439 cm3)
Compression ratio 9:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 469 hp/6100 rpm
(350 kW/6100 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 516 lb-ft/2650 rpm
(700 Nm/2650 rpm - 4500 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6500 rpm
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belts Belt one: 1289 mm
Belt two: 2449 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corre-
sponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
397
Technical data
Rims and tires
왔 Rims and tires
Use only tires and rims which have been i
specifically developed for your vehicle and Further information on tires and rims is
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. available at any authorized
Other tires and rims can have detrimental Mercedes-Benz Center. A tire inflation
effects, such as: pressure table is located on the fuel fill-
앫 Poor handling characteristics er flap of the vehicle. The tire pressure
should be checked regularly and
앫 Increased noise
should only be adjusted on cold tires.
앫 Increased fuel consumption Follow the tire manufacturer’s mainte-
nance recommendation included with
! the vehicle.
Moreover, tires and rims not approved
by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, ex-
hibit dimensional variations and differ-
ent tire deformation characteristics
that could cause them to come into
contact with the vehicle body or axle
parts. This may result in damage to the
tires or the vehicle.
398
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
16’’ tires
E 320/E 320 4MATIC

Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 16
Wheel offset 1.4 in (36 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) -
All-season tires (radial-ply tires) 225/55 R16 95H M+S
Winter tires (radial-ply tires) -
17’’ tires
E 320/E 500 E 500/E 500 4MATIC E 320 4MATIC

(Appearance Package*) E 500 4MATIC
(Appearance Package*)
Rims (light alloy) 8 J x 17 8 J x 17 8 J x 17
Wheel offset 1.5 in (38 mm) 1.5 in (38 mm) 1.5 in (38 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 245/45 R17 95W - -
All-season tires (radial-ply tires) - 245/45 R17 95H M+S 245/45 R17 95H M+S
Winter tires (radial-ply tires) 245/45 R17 95H M+S 245/45 R17 95H M+S 245/45 R17 95H M+S
399
Technical data
Rims and tires
18’’ tires
E 55 AMG E 320 4MATIC (Sport Package*)

E 500 4MATIC (Sport Package*)
AMG light alloy rims 8 J x 18 8 J x 18
Wheel offset 1.18 in (30 mm) 1.18 in (30 mm)
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) - 245/40 ZR18
or
245/40 R18 97Y XL or Extra Load
or
245/40 ZR18 97Y XL or Extra Load
All-season tires (radial-ply tires) - -
Winter tires (radial-ply tires) 245/40 R18 93H M+S -
or
245/40 R18 97V XL or Extra Load M+S
400
Technical data
Rims and tires
Mixed size tires
E 55 AMG
E 320 (Sport Package*)
E 500 (Sport Package*)
Front axle: AMG light alloy rims 8 J x 18
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 245/40 ZR18
Rear axle: AMG light alloy rims 9 J x 18
Summer tires (radial-ply tires) 265/35 ZR18 XL or Extra Load M01
1 Must not be used with snow chains
401
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheel Minispare wheel (except E 55 AMG) Collapsible tire (E 55 AMG only)
i Rim 4 J x 17 Rim 6 B x 18
Please note that the tire pressure of the Wheel offset 1.34 (34 mm) Wheel offset 0.98 (25 mm)
1
Minispare and the collapsible tire dif- Tire T 155/70 R17 110 M Tire 175/55-18 95P1
fers from the tire pressure of the road 1 1
Must not be used with snow chains. Must not be used with snow chains.
tires.
Make sure the Minispare wheel is in-
flated to approx. 61 psi (4.2 bar).
Inflate the collapsible tire (컄 page 376)
to approximately 51 psi (3.5 bar).
402
Technical data
Electrical system
왔 Electrical system
Model E 320/E 320 4MATIC E 500/E 500 4MATIC E 55 AMG
Generator (alternator) 14 V/150 A 14 V/150 A 14 V/180 A
Starter motor 14 V/1.4 kW 14 V/1.7 kW 14 V/1.7 kW
Battery (auxiliary) 12 V/12 Ah 12 V/12 Ah 12 V/12 Ah
Battery (main) 12 V/95 Ah 12 V/95 Ah 12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs Bosch F8 DPP 332U Bosch F8 DPP 332U NGK IL FR 6 A
NGK PFR 5R-11 NGK PFR 5R-11
Electrode gap 0.039 in (1.00 mm) 0.039 in (1.00 mm) 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Tightening torque 18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm) 18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm) 18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm)
403
Technical data
Main dimensions
왔 Main dimensions
Model E 320/E 320 4MATIC E 500/E 500 4MATIC E 55 AMG
Overall vehicle length 190.3 in (4833 mm) 190.3 in (4833 mm) 190.9 in (4849 mm)
Overall vehicle width 71.7 in (1822 mm) 71.7 in (1822 mm) 71.7 in (1822 mm)
Overall vehicle height 57.1 in (1449 mm)
Overall vehicle height (Airmatic DC*) 56.2 in (1429 mm) 56.3 in (1431 mm) 55.6 in (1412 mm)
(optional on E320; standard on
E500/E55 AMG)
Wheelbase 112.4 in (2854 mm) 112.4 in (2854 mm) 112.4 in (2854 mm)
Track, front 61.4 in (1559 mm) 61.7 in (1567 mm) 62.3 in (1583 mm)
Track, rear 61.1 in (1552 mm) 61.4 in (1560 mm) 61.3 in (1558 mm)
404
Technical data
Weights
왔 Weights
Roof load max. 220 lbs (100 kg)
Trunk load max. 220 lbs (100 kg)
405
Technical data
왔 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities Vehicle components and their respective Please refer to the Factory Approved Ser-
lubricants must match. Therefore use only vice Products Pamphlet, or inquire at your
brands tested and approved by us. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Engine with oil filter E 320 / E 320 4MATIC 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engine oils
E 500 / E 500 4MATIC 8.0 US qt (7.5 l)
E 55 AMG 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
Automatic transmission 8.0 US qt (7.5 l) MB Automatic Transmission Oil
Front axle E 320 4MATIC / 0.63 US qt (0.6 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
E 500 4MATIC
Rear axle E 320 / E 320 4MATIC 1.06 US qt (1 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
E 500 / E 500 4MATIC/ 1.37 US qt (1.3 l)
E 55 AMG
Transfer case E 320 4MATIC / 0.62 US qt (0.585 l) MB Transfer Case Fluid
E 500 4MATIC
406
Technical data

Power steering approx. 1.1 US qt (1 l) MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S)
Front wheel hubs approx. 3.0 oz (85 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system 1.1 US qt (1.05 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system E 320 / E 320 4MATIC 10.7 US qt (10 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
E 500 / E 500 4MATIC 11.9 US qt (11.3 l)
E 55 AMG 13.8 US qt (13.2 l)
Fuel tank 21.12 US gal (80.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline:
including a reserve of 2.38 US gal (9.0 l) Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
407
Technical data

Air conditioning system R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lu-
bricant oil (never R-12)
Windshield washer 4.8 US qt (4.5 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning 7.4 US qt (7.0 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
system
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available pre-
mixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 413).
408
Technical data
Engine oils Using engine oils of other specification Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lu-
may cause the FSS to incorrectly deter- bricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
Engine oils are specifically tested for their mine the next service interval and will system will occur.
suitability in our engines. Therefore, use result in engine damage not covered by
only engine oils recommended by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Brake fluid
Mercedes-Benz. Information on recom-
mended brands is available in the Factory Please follow FSS recommendations for During vehicle operation, the boiling point
Approved Service Products Pamphlet, or at scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. could result in engine damage not covered through the absorption of moisture from
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. the atmosphere. Under extremely strenu-
! ous operating conditions, this moisture
Always check the oil filler cap Engine oil additives content can lead to the formation of bub-
(컄 page 287) for important information bles in the system, thus reducing the sys-
pertaining to the engine oil needing to Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. tem’s efficiency.
meet a specific Mercedes-Benz specifi- They may damage the engine. Therefore, the brake fluid must be re-
cation (e.g. MB 229.5). If such informa-
Damage or malfunctions resulting from placed every two years, preferably in the
tion is printed on the oil filler cap, only
blending oil additives are not covered by spring.
use an engine oil from the list of ap-
proved engine oils in the Factory Ap- the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Only brake fluid approved by
proved Service Products pamphlet that Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your au-
meets the specification indicated on Air conditioning refrigerant thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will pro-
the oil filler cap. vide you with additional information.
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil is used in the air condition-
ing system.
409
Technical data
Premium unleaded gasoline Fuel requirements Gasoline additives
! Use only premium unleaded gasoline A major concern among engine manufac-
meeting ASTM standard D 439: turers is carbon build-up caused by gaso-
To maintain the engine’s durability and
line. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
performance, premium unleaded gaso- 앫 The octane number (posted at the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
line must be used. If premium unleaded pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
that prevent the build-up of carbon depos-
gasoline is not available and low octane of both the Research (R) Octane Num-
its.
fuel is used, follow these precautions: ber and the Motor (M) Octane Number:
(R+M)/2). This is also known as the After an extended period of using fuels
앫 Have the fuel tank only partially
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. without such additives, carbon deposits
filled with unleaded regular and fill
can build up especially on the intake valves
up with premium unleaded as soon Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
and in the combustion area, leading to en-
as possible such as Ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
gine performance problems such as:
used provided the ratio of any one of these
앫 Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 앫 Warm-up hesitation
acceleration
10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
앫 Unstable idle
앫 Do not exceed an engine speed of
The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded 앫 Knocking/pinging
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
with a light load such as two per- 앫 Misfire
sons and no luggage Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% 앫 Power loss
앫 Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum ac-
Ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be Do not blend any specific fuel additives
celerator pedal position if the vehi-
used. with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
cle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain These blends must also meet all other fuel costs and may be harmful to the engine op-
requirements, such as resistance to spark eration.
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
410
Technical data
Damage or malfunctions resulting from If the antifreeze mixture is effective to To provide important corrosion protection,
poor fuel quality or from blending specific -22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the cool- the solution must be at least 45%
fuel additives are not covered by the ant in the pressurized cooling system is anticorrosion/antifreeze [equivalent to
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. reached at approximately 266°F (130°C). freeze protection to approximately - 22°F
(-30°C)]. If you use a solution that is more
The coolant solution must be used
Coolants year-round to provide the necessary corro-
than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze [freeze
protection to approximately - 49°F
sion protection and increase boil-over pro-
The engine coolant is a mixture of water (-45°C)], the engine temperature will in-
tection. Refer to Service Booklet for
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which pro- crease due to the lower heat transfer capa-
replacement interval
vides: bility of the solution. Therefore, do not use
Coolant system design and coolant used more than this amount of
앫 Corrosion protection
stipulate the replacement interval. The re- anticorrosion/antifreeze.
앫 Freeze protection placement interval published in the Ser-
앫 Boiling protection (by increasing the vice Booklet is only applicable if MB 325.0
boiling point) anticorrosion/antifreeze solution or other
Mercedes-Benz approved products of
The cooling system was filled at the factory equal specification (see Factory Approved
with a coolant providing freeze protection Service Products pamphlet) are used to re-
to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corro- new the coolant concentration or bring it
sion protection. back up to the proper level.
411
Technical data
If the coolant level is low, water and MB Anticorrosion/antifreeze Therefore, the following product is strongly
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used Your vehicle contains a number of alumi-
recommended for use in your vehicle:
to bring it up to the proper level (have cool- num parts. The use of aluminum compo-
Mercedes-Benz 325.0
ing system checked for signs of leakage). nents in motor vehicle engines
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Agent.
Please make sure the mixture is in accor- necessitates that Before the start of the winter season (or
dance with label instructions. anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in once a year in hot southern regions), you
The water in the cooling system must meet such engines be specifically formulated to should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
minimum requirements, which are usually protect the aluminum parts. (Failure to use concentration checked. The coolant is also
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will regularly checked each time you bring your
are not sure about the water quality, con- result in a significantly shortened service vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
sult your authorized Mercedes-Benz life.) Center for service.
Center.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model Approx. freeze protection

– 35°F (– 37°C) – 49°F (– 45°C)
E 320/E 320 4MATIC 5.3 US qt (5.0 l) 5.9 US qt (5.5 l)
E 500 /E 500 4MATIC 6.0 US qt (5.65 l) 6.6 US qt (6.2 l)
E 55 AMG 7.0 US qt (6.6 l) 7.7 US qt (7.3 l)
412
Technical data
Windshield and headlamp washer 왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
system Washer Concentrate and water (or con- mixing ratio
centrate and commercially available For temperatures above “freezing point”,
Both the windshield and headlamp washer premixed windshield washer use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
systems are supplied from the windshield solvent/antifreeze, depending on am- “S” and water:
washer fluid reservoir. bient temperatures).
앫 1 part “S” to 100 parts water
The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of
approximately: Warning G [40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) water].
앫 7.4 US qt. (7 l) in vehicles with a head- For temperatures below “freezing point”
lamp cleaning system* or heated reser- Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flam- use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
voir mable. Do not spill washer “S” and commercially available premixed
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, be- windshield washer solvent / antifreeze:
앫 4.8 US qt. (4.5 l) in vehicles without a cause it may ignite and burn. You can be se-
headlamp cleaning system riously burned. 앫 1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) solvent].
413
Technical data
왔 Consumer information
The following text is published as required Tread wear Traction
of all manufacturers of passenger cars un- The tread wear grade is a comparative rat- The traction grades, from highest to low-
der Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regula- ing based on the wear rate of the tire when est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades rep-
tions, Part 575 pursuant to the “National tested under controlled conditions on a resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of specified government test course. For ex- pavement as measured under controlled
1966”. ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one conditions on specified government test
and one-half (1½) times as well on the gov- surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
Uniform tire quality grading ernment course as a tire graded 100. The marked C may have poor traction perfor-
relative performance of tires depends mance.
Quality grades can be found, where appli-
upon the actual conditions of their use,
cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
Warning G
example:
habits, service practices and differences in The traction grade assigned to this tire is
Tread wear Traction Temperature road characteristics and climate. based on straight ahead braking traction
200 AA A tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
414
Technical data
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the high-
Warning G
est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis- The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
tance to the generation of heat and its lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
ability to dissipate heat when tested under not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-
controlled conditions on a specified indoor flation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- rately or in combination, can cause
perature can cause the material of the tire excessive heat build-up and possible tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex- failure.
cessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
415
416
Technical terms
ABS BAS CAN system

(Antilock Brake System) (Brake Assist System) (Controller Area Network)
Prevents the wheels from locking up System for potentially reducing braking Data bus network serving to control ve-
during braking so that the vehicle can distances in emergency braking situa- hicle functions such as door locking or
continue to be steered. tions. The system is activated when it windshield wiping.
ADS senses an emergency based on how Cockpit
fast the brake is applied.
(Adaptive Damping System) All instruments, switches, buttons and
Automatically adapts the optimum sus- Bi-Xenon headlamps* indicator/warning lamps in the passen-
pension damping to prevailing driving Headlamps which use an electric arc as ger compartment needed for vehicle
conditions. a light source and produce a more in- operation and monitoring.
tense light than filament headlamps.
Airmatic DC COMAND
Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low
(Airmatic Dual Control) (Cockpit Management and Data Sys-
beam and high beam.
Automatically selects the optimum sus- tem)
pension tuning and ride height for your CAC Information and operating center for
vehicle. Airmatic consists of two com- (Customer Assistance Center) vehicle sound and communications
ponents: Mercedes-Benz customer service cen- systems, including the radio and navi-
ter which can help you with any ques- gation system, as well as other optional
앫 Adaptive Damping System
tions about your vehicle and provide equipment (CD changer, telephone,
앫 Vehicle level control assistance in the event of a break- etc.).
Alignment bolt down.
Metal pin with thread. The centering
pin is an aid used when changing a tire
to align the wheel with the wheel hub.
417
Technical terms
Control system Distronic* Engine oil viscosity

The control system is used to call up A driving convenience cruise control Measurement for the inner friction (vis-
vehicle information and to change system which helps the driver maintain cosity) of the oil at different tempera-
component settings. Information and a pre-selected speed: tures. The higher the temperature an
messages appear in the multifunction oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
앫 If there is no vehicle directly ahead,
display. The driver uses the buttons on or the lower the temperature it can tol-
the system operates in the same
the multifunction steering wheel to erate without becoming viscous, the
way as conventional ->cruise con-
navigate through the system and to ad- better the viscosity.
trol.
just settings. ESP
앫 If a slower moving vehicle is ahead,
Cruise control (Electronic Stability Program)
Distronic will reduce your vehicle
Driving convenience system for auto- Improves vehicle handling and direc-
speed to the extent permitted by re-
matically maintaining the vehicle speed tional stability.
duced throttle and up to 20% brak-
set by the driver.
ing power to maintain the preset ETD
minimum following distance. (Emergency Tensioning Device)
DTR Device which deploys in certain frontal
(->Distronic*) and rear collisions exceeding the sys-
tem's threshold to tighten the seat
Engine number belts.
The number set by the manufacturer ->SRS
and placed on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine pro- FSS PLUS
duced. (Flexible Service System PLUS)
Service indicator in the multifunction
display that informs the driver when
the next vehicle maintenance service is
due.
418
Technical terms
Gear range Kickdown MON

Number of gears which are available to Depressing the accelerator past the (Motor Octane Number)
the automatic transmission for shifting. point of resistance shifts the transmis- The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
The automatic gear shifting process sion down to the lowest possible gear. as determined by a standardized meth-
can be adapted to specific operating This very quickly accelerates the vehi- od. It is an indication of a gasoline's
conditions using the selector lever. cle and should not be used for normal ability to resist undesired detonation
acceleration needs. (knocking). The average of both the
GPS
(Global Positioning System) Lock button MON (Motor Octane Number) and
->RON (Research Octane Number) is
Satellite-based system for relaying Button on the door which indicates
posted at the pump, also known as
geographic location information to and whether the door is locked or un-
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
from vehicles equipped with special re- locked. Pushing the lock button down
ceivers. Employs DVD digital maps for on an individual door from inside will
navigation. lock that door.
Instrument cluster Memory function*
The displays and indicator/warning Used to store three individual seat,
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, in- steering wheel and exterior mirror posi-
cluding the tachometer, speedometer tions for each SmartKey.
and fuel gauge.
419
Technical terms
Multifunction display Power train Remote Vehicle Diagnostics

The display field in the instrument clus- Collective term designating all compo- Transmission of vehicle data and cur-
ter used to present information provid- nents used to generate and transmit rent location to the Mercedes-Benz
ed by the control system. motive power to the drive axles, includ- Customer Assistance Center for sub-
ing: scribers to the Tele Aid service.
Steering wheel with buttons for operat- 앫 Engine Restraint systems
ing the control system. Seat belts, belt tensioners, air bags and
앫 Clutch/torque converter
child restraint systems. As indepen-
Overspeed range
앫 Transmission dent systems, their protective func-
Engine speeds within the red marking
앫 Transfer case* tions complement one another.
on the tachometer dial. Avoid this en-
gine speed range, as it may result in se- 앫 Drive shaft RON
rious engine damage that is not (Research Octane Number)
앫 Axle shafts/axles
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited The Research Octane Number for gaso-
Warranty. Program mode selector switch line as determined by a standardized
Poly-V-belt drive Used to switch the automatic transmis- method. It is an indication of a gaso-
Drives engine-components (alternator, sion between standard operation S and line's ability to resist undesired detona-
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine. operation C. tion (knocking). The average of both
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
E 55 AMG with steering wheel gearshift
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
control and manual shift program: in
posted at the pump, also known as
addition to S and C (for sporty S or
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
comfortable C operation), you can use
M for manual shift program.
420
Technical terms
SBC Tele Aid System Tire speed rating

(Sensotronic Brake Control) (Telematic Alarm Identification on De- Part of a tire designation; indicates the
Electronically controlled hydraulic mand) speed range for which a tire is ap-
braking system for increased braking The Tele Aid system consists of three proved.
safety and comfort. types of response: automatic and man- Traction
Shift lock ual emergency, roadside assistance Force exerted by the vehicle on the
and information. Tele Aid is initially ac-
When the vehicle is parked, this lock road via the tires.
tivated by completing a subscriber
prevents the transmission selector le-
agreement and placing an acquain- Vehicle level control
ver from being moved out of position P
tance call. The ground clearance of the vehicle is
without the ignition or engine on and
The Tele Aid system is operational pro- automatically controlled according to a
brake pedal depressed.
vided that the vehicle’s battery is selected setting and speed.The driver
SRS charged, properly connected, not dam- can set the ground clearance manually
(Supplemental Restraint System) aged and cellular and GPS coverage is for example on very rough roads.
Seat belts, emergency tensioning de- available. VIN
vice and air bags. Though independent (Vehicle Identification Number)
Telematics*
systems, they are closely interfaced to
A combination of the terms “telecom- The number set by the manufacturer
provide effective occupant protection.
munications” and “informatics”. and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug Voice control system*
wrench) with which threaded fasteners Voice control system for car phones,
such as wheel bolts are tightened. portable cell phones and audio sys-
tems (radio, CD, etc.).
421
422
Index
A Easy-entry/exit feature* 155 Adjusting 34

ABS 80, 417 ESP 85 Air distribution 182, 193
ABS control 81 Exterior headlamps 46 Air volume 182, 183, 194
Malfunction indicator lamp 312 Exterior lamps 125 Backrest tilt 35
Messages in display 322 Front fog lamps 126 Exterior rear view mirror 38
Warning lamp 312 Hazard warning flasher 128 Head restraint height 36
Accelerator position, automatic Headlamps 46 Head restraint tilt 36
transmission 168 High beams 127 Instrument cluster illumination 131
Accident Ignition 31 Interior rear view mirror 37
In case of 50 Ignition with KEYLESS-GO* 33 Mirrors 37
Activating Immobilizer 53, 89 Multicontour seat* 116
Air conditioning (cooling) 186, 198 Rear fog lamp 126, 127 Seat cushion depth 117
Air recirculation mode 184, 195 Rear window defroster 177 Seat cushion tilt 35
Anti-theft alarm system 89 Residual heat 186, 198 Seat fore and aft adjustment 35
Automatic climate control 190 Seat heater* 119 Seat height 35
Central locking (control system) 154 Tow-away alarm 90 Seats 34
Charcoal filter 196 Windshield wipers 48 Steering column height 37
Climate control 180 Adding Steering wheel 36
Defrosting 183 Engine oil 286 Adjusting steering column in or out 37
Distance warning function* 227 Additional turn signal 365 Adjusting steering column up or down 37
Distronic* 223 Adjustable air vents, rear passenger Adjusting the dynamic seat 157
compartment 199
423
Index
Air conditioning (cooling) Airmatic DC (Dual Control)* 230 At the gas station 280
Turning off 186, 198 Alarm AUDIO menu 139
Turning on 186, 198 Audible 79, 90 Selecting radio station 139
Air distribution Canceling 90 Selecting satellite radio* station 140
Adjusting 182, 193 Visual 89 Audio system
Air pressure see Tire inflation Alarm system CD mode 140
pressure 292 Anti-theft 89 Automatic antiglare for rear view
Air pump, electric 377 Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 358, mirror 172
Air recirculation mode 184, 194 374, 417 Automatic central locking
Activating 184, 195 Antiglare Activating/deactivating
Deactivating 185, 195 Automatic 172 (control system) 154
Air vents, rear passenger compartment Antilock brake system (ABS) 417 Automatic climate control
Adjustable 199 Anti-theft alarm system Temperature sensor 27
Air volume Arming 89 Automatic climate control* 188
Adjusting 182, 183, 194 Canceling alarm 90 Adjusting air distribution 193
Airbags 57 Disarming 90 Adjusting air volume 183, 194
Children 58 Anti-theft systems 89 Air recirculation mode 194
Front 61 Anti-theft alarm system 89 Defrosting 194
Passenger 61 Immobilizer 89 Rear window defroster 177
Safety guidelines 60 Tow-away alarm 90 Residual heat utilization 198
Side impact 62 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning 273 Residual ventilation 198
Window curtain 62 Ashtray 249 Setting the temperature 192
424
Index
Automatic headlamp mode 125 B Brake assist system (BAS) 417

Automatic lighting control Backrest Brake fluid 281, 331
Activating 129 Folding forward 240 Brake pads
Deactivating 129 Folding rearward 241 Message in display 329
Automatic locking when driving 111 BAS 82, 417 Brakes
Automatic transmission 162 Batteries, SmartKey Warning lamp 314
Accelerator position 168 Changing 361, 362 Break-in period 268
Emergency operation Check lamp 96, 100 Bulbs, replacing
(Limp Home Mode) 171 Checking 97, 102 Additional turn signals 365
Gear ranges 164 Batteries, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Fog lamps 365
Gear selector lever position 165 Changing 361, 362 Front lamps 365, 367
Gear shifting malfunctions 171 Checking 97, 102 High beam 365
Kickdown 168 Batteries, vehicle High beam bulb
Manual shift program mode Charging 381 (Bi-Xenon* headlamps only) 368
(SL 55 AMG Kompressor) 169 Disconnecting 380 High beam bulb
Manual shifting 163 Messages in display 323, 327, 328 (Halogen headlamps only) 368
One-touch gearshifting 163 Reconnecting 381 High mounted brake lamp 366
Program mode selector switch 168 Removing 381 License plate lamps 366, 369
Selector lever position 162 Service 379 Low beam 365
Starting the engine 43 Battery discharged Parking lamps 366, 368
Winter program mode 168 Jump starting 382 Side marker lamps 365, 369
Bi-Xenon headlamps* 417 Standing lamps 366, 368
Block heater* 298 Tail lamp 366
Blocking Tail lamp assemblies 369
Rear window operation 78 Turn signal lamp 365
425
Index
C Central locking switch 111 Child safety 66

CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 417 Changing Airbags 58
Calling up Batteries (SmartKey with Infant and child restraint systems 63,
Distronic* settings 141 KEYLESS-GO*) 361, 362 67
Range (distance to empty) 159 Batteries (SmartKey) 361, 362 LATCH child seat anchors 77
Service indicator 300 SmartKey setting 155 Child safety switch see Blocking of rear
CAN system 417 Vehicle level 232 window operation 78
Cargo tie-down rings 244 Charcoal filter 196 Cigarette lighter 250
CD player Activating 196 Cleaning
Operating 140 Deactivating 197 Headlamps 174, 306
Center console Charging Light alloy wheels 307
Lower part 26 Vehicle batteries 381 Parktronic* system sensor 307
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator side markers 306
lamp 319 lamp 315 tail lamps 306
Upper part 25 Checking turn signal lenses 306
Centigrade Coolant level 287 Windshield 48
Setting temperature units 146 Oil level 281, 284 Wood trims 310
Central locking Tire inflation pressure 281 Climate control 178
Automatic 111 Vehicle lighting 281 Adjusting 182
From inside 111 Defrosting 183
Switch 111 Setting the temperature 182
Switching on/off Clock 149
(control system) 154
Unlocking from inside 111
426
Index
Closing Cockpit 20, 417 Multifunction display 134

Glove box 245 Cockpit management and data system Multifunction steering wheel 135
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof 210 (COMAND) 417 Selecting radio system 139
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof with Collapsible tire 402 Selecting satellite radio* system 140
KEYLESS-GO* 213 Tire inflation pressure 376 Settings menu 143
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof* with COMAND 417 Standard display menu 139
KEYLESS-GO* 204 COMAND* see separate operating Submenus 136, 138
Roller sunblinds 209 instructions TEL* menu 159
Side windows 202 Combination switch 127 Trip computer menu 158
Side windows with High beam flasher 47 Vehicle submenu 154
KEYLESS-GO* 204, 207 Turn signals 47 Convenience submenu 155
Sliding/pop-up roof* 205 Windshield wipers 47 Activating easy-entry/exit
Sliding/pop-up roof* with Consumer information 414 feature* 155
KEYLESS-GO* 204, 207 Control system 134, 418 Adjusting dynamic seat* 157
Sliding/pop-up roof* with AUDIO menu 139 Setting parking position for exterior
SmartKey 206 Convenience submenu 155 rear view mirror 157
Trunk Display digital speedometer 139 Setting SmartKey-dependency 156
Vehicle with KEYLESS-GO* 108, Distronic* menu 141 Coolant
109 Functions 138 Checking level 287
Trunk lid 105 Instrument cluster submenu 146, Messages in display 332, 333, 334
Windows 201 148 Temperature gauge 132
Windows with SmartKey 203 Lighting submenu 151 Warning lamp 316
Closing the trunk lid 108, 109 Malfunction memory menu 142 Coolant temperature 279
Menus 137, 138
427
Index
Cruise control 215, 418 Climate control 180 Deceleration

Canceling 216 Cruise control 216 With Distronic* 221
Driving downhill 216 Defrost 183, 194 Defogging
Driving uphill 216 Distance warning function* 227 Windshield 183, 193
Fine adjustment 217 Distronic* 225 Defrosting 183, 194
Lever 222 Engine with KEYLESS-GO* 53 Delayed switch-off
Saving current speed 216 ESP 84 Interior lighting 154
Setting speeds 217 Exterior lamps 125 Dialing
Cruise control lever 215 Hazard warning flasher 128 A number (telephone) 160
Cup holder in the center console 246 Headlamps 52 Difficulties
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 417 Immobilizer 89 While driving see Problems while
Interior lighting delayed driving 49
D
switch-off 154 With starting 44
Daytime running lamp mode 126
Rear window defroster 177 Digital speedometer 139
Setting 151
Residual heat 187 Direction of rotation 292
Deactivating
Seat heater* 118 Discharged battery
Air conditioning 186
Seat ventilation* 119 Jump starting 382
Air recirculation mode 185, 195
SmartKey Disconnecting
Alarm 90
Turning off the engine 53 Vehicle battery 380
Anti-theft alarm system 90
Tow-away alarm 91 Display
Automatic climate control 185, 190
Selecting 147, 148
Central locking (control system) 154
428
Index
Displays Distronic* 218, 418 Door control panel 28

Digital speedometer 139 Activated 222 Door entry lamps 130
Distronic* 220 Activating 223 Door handle 28
Messages 285 Calling up settings 141, 221 Door unlock
Selecting 147 Cleaning system sensor 307 With Tele Aid* 260
Service indicator 299 Cruise control lever 222 Doors
Showing malfunctions 142 Deactivated 222 Message in display 335
Distance Deactivating 225 Opening from inside vehicle 103
Decreasing in Distronic* 226 Deceleration 221 Opening from outside 100
Increasing in Distronic* 226 Decreasing distance 226 Downhill driving
Warning function 226 Displays in the speedometer dial 220 Cruise control 216
Distance to empty (range) Distance warning function 226 Downshifting 163
Calling up 158 Driving hints 227 Drive-Dynamic seat* 117
Distance warning function* 226 Increasing distance 226 Driving
Activating 227 Intermittent signal tone 220 General instructions 40
Deactivating 227 Menu 221 Hydroplaning 273
DTR* warning lamp 226 Messages in display 323 In winter 275
Intermittent warning sound 226 Sensor cover 307 Problems 49
Symbol in multifunction display 141 Setting a higher speed 223 Safety systems 80
Setting a slower speed 224 With Distronic* 227
Setting the current speed 223
Setting the following distance in
Distronic 225
Warning and indicator lamps 220
429
Index
Driving hints E Releasing trunk lid from inside 110

SBC brake system 87 Easy-entry/exit Remote door unlock 260
Driving instructions 269 Message in display 330 Unlocking the trunk lid 360
Driving off 272 Easy-entry/exit feature* 113 Unlocking the vehicle 359
Driving safety systems Activating 155 Emergency tensioning device see
4MATIC 88 Interrupting movement 113, 156 ETD 66, 418
ABS 80 Electric air pump 376 Emission control 278
BAS 82 Electrical fuses 389 Ending
ESP 82, 418 Electrical system 403 A call (telephone) 160
SBC brake system 85 Electronic Stability Program see ESP 82, Engine 396
Driving systems 215 418 Compartment 283
Airmatic DC* 230 Emergency call system* 253 Message in the display 315
Cruise control 215 Emergency calls Starting 43
Distronic* 218 Initiating an emergency call 256 Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 44
Driving safety systems 80 With Tele Aid* 255 Starting with the SmartKey 43
Vehicle level control 231 Emergency operation Turning off with the key 53
DTR see Distronic* 418 (Limp Home Mode) 171 Engine compartment
Dual control* Emergency operations Hood 283
Airmatic DC* 230 Opening/closing Sliding/pop-up roof* Engine malfunction indicator lamp 315
or panorama sliding/pop-up Engine number 418
roof* 364
430
Index
Engine oil F Front lamps 365

Adding 286 Fahrenheit Messages in display 341
Additives 409 Setting temperature units 146 Replacing bulbs 367
Checking level 284 Fastening the seat belts 40 Switching on 124
Consumption 284 Fine adjustment Front seat head restraints
Display messages 336 Cruise control 217 Power seat 114
Filler neck 287 First aid kit 356 Removing and installing 114
Messages in display 285 Flat tire 372 Front seats
Viscosity 418 Collapsible tire 376 Heater* 118
ESP 82, 418 Mounting the spare wheel 372, 375 FSS (Flexible Service System) 299, 418
Four wheel electronic traction system Spare wheel 372 Fuel 281
with ESP 88 Flexible Service System (FSS) 299, 418 Fuel tank reserve warning lamp 317
Switching off 84 Fog lamp, rear 127 Premium unleaded gasoline 281
Switching on 85 Fog lamps, front 126 Fuel consumption statistics
Synchronizing 325 Messages in display 340 After start 158
Warning lamp 313 Replacing bulbs 365 Since last reset 158
ETD 418 Switching on 126, 127 Fuel filler flap 280
Safety guidelines 60 Following distance in Distronic* 225 Locking 280
Exterior lamp switch 124 Four wheel electronic traction system Unlocking 280
Exterior rear view mirrors (4MATIC) with ESP 88 Fuel reserve tank
Adjusting 38 4MATIC 88 Message in display 338
Parking position for 157 Front airbags 61
431
Index
Fuel tank Gasoline see Fuel 281 H

Filler flap 280 Gear range 419 Hand-held transmitter
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 406 Automatic transmission 164 Programming integrated remote
Fully closing (Express-close) the slid- Limiting 164 control 262
ing/pop-up roof 206 Shifting into optimal 163 Reprogramming integrated remote
Fully opening (Express-open) the Gear range limit control 265
sliding/pop-up roof 206 Canceling 163 Hazard warning flasher 128
Functions (control system) 138 Gear selector lever Switching off 128
Resetting 144 Position 165 Switching on 128
Fuse chart 389 Global Headlamps
Fuses 389 Locking 95 Automatic control 125
Fuse chart 389 Locking with KEYLESS-GO* 100 Bi-Xenon* 417
Fuse extractor 389 Unlocking 95 Cleaning system* 174
Spare fuses 389 Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* 100 Switching off 52
Global Positioning System (GPS) 419 Switching on 46
G
Glove box 245 Heated seats* 118
Garage door opener 27, 261
Closing 245 Heated steering wheel* 251
Erasing the integrated remote
Opening 245 Height adjustment
control 265
Good visibility 172 Head restraints 36
Integrated remote control 262
GPS 419 Steering wheel 36
Rolling code programming 264
GPS see COMAND 254 Vehicle level 231
432
Index
High beam flasher 47, 128 Infant and child restraint systems 67 Integrated remote control
High beam headlamps Installing 75 Canadian programming 264
Messages in display 341 LATCH child seat anchors 77 Erasing memory 265
Replacing bulbs 365 Information Gate operator 264
Switching on 127 About service and warranty 10 Hand-held transmitter 262
Hood 283 Button for Tele Aid* 258 Operation 265
Closing 283 Inside rear view mirror Rolling code programming 264
Message in display 338 Antiglare 172 Interior lighting 128
Opening 283 Installing Activating automatic control 129
Hydroplaning 273 Infant and child restraint systems 75 Deactivating automatic control 129
Towing eye bolt 388 Delayed switch-off 154
I
Wiper blades 371 Manual operation 129
Identification labels 394
Instrument cluster 22, 131, 309, 419 Interior rear view mirror
Ignition 31, 33
Coolant temperature gauge 132 Adjusting 37
Switching on 43, 44
Illumination 131
Immobilizer 89 J
Multifunction display 134
Activating 89 Jack 356
Outside temperature indicator 133
Deactivating 89 Jump starting 382
Selecting language 147
Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and
Instrument lighting 131, 132
warning
433
Index
K Unlocking and opening, trunk lid 101 Fuel reserve 315

Key, Mechanical 359 Unlocking with 32 SBC 85
Key, SmartKey Kickdown 168, 419 Seat belts 315, 317
Changing the batteries 361, 362 Kilometers/miles in speedometer 146 Service indicator 299
Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Km/h or mph in speedometer 146 SRS 57
Changing the batteries 361, 362 Language
L
KEYLESS-GO* Multifunction display 147
Lamp bulbs, exterior 365
Activating ignition with 33 Setting 147
Lamps, exterior
Closing LATCH child seat anchors 77
Front 365
Trunk 108, 109 Layout of poly-V-belt drive 395
Light sensor 341
Closing panorama sliding/pop-up Leather upholstery
Messages in display 341
roof* 204, 207 Cleaning 310
Replacing bulbs for rear 366, 369
Closing side windows 204, 207 Level control system*
Lamps, indicator and warning
Closing sliding/pop-up roof* 204, Airmatic DC* 230
ABS 312
207 Lever
Airbag Off 62
Factory setting 100 For cruise control 222
Battery (SmartKey) 95, 100
Global locking 100 License plate lamps 366
Brakes 314
Global unlocking 100 Messages in display 341
CHECK ENGINE 315
Important notes 98 Replacing bulbs 369
Coolant 316
Locking the vehicle 102 Light alloy wheels
DTR* 220
Remote controls 97 Cleaning 309
Engine diagnostics 315
Starting the engine 44 Light sensor 341
ESP 313
Turning off engine 53 Lighter see Cigarette lighter 250
434
Index
Lighting 124 Loading 237 M

Automatic headlamp mode 125 Cargo tie-down rings 244 Main Dimensions 404
Combination switch 127 Instructions 243 Maintenance 12
Daytime running lamp mode 126 Roof rack* 237 Malfunction
Door entry lamps 130 Ski sack* 237 Displaying 142
Exterior lamp switch 124 Split rear bench seat* 240 Malfunction memory 142
Front fog lamps 126, 127 Locator lighting 126 Calling up 142
High beams 127 Setting 152 Clearing 143
Instrument cluster illumination 131 Lock button 419 MANUAL
Instruments 131, 132 Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*) 54 Shift program mode
Interior 128 Locking 51, 94 (SL 55 AMG Kompressor) 169
Locator lighting 126 Automatic while driving 111 Manual headlamp mode 125
Low beam 124 Centrally from inside 111 Manual operations
Manual headlamp mode 125 Fuel filler flap 280 Fuel filler flap 363
Night security illumination 126 Global with KEYLESS-GO* 100 Interior lighting control 129
Parking lamps 124 Global, SmartKey 95 Sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama
Rear fog lamp 127 Vehicle in an emergency 360 sliding/pop-up roof* 364
Settings (control system) 151 Vehicle with KEYLESS-GO* 102 Unlocking the driver’s door 359
Trunk lamp 130 Loss of SmartKeys 97, 102 Unlocking the transmission lever 363
Limiting the gear range 164 Low beam headlamps Unlocking the trunk lid 360
Limp Home Mode 171 Messages in display 341 Massage function 118
Replacing bulbs 365 MAXCOOL maximum cooling 194
Lowering Mechanical key 359
Vehicle 378
435
Index
Memory function 121, 419 Automatic antiglare* for inside Coolant 333, 334
Recalling positions from mirror 172 Coolant level 332
memory 122 Exterior rear view mirror 38 Distronic* 323
Storing exterior rear view mirror Exterior rear view mirror parking Doors 335
parking positions 123 positions 157, 173 Easy-entry/exit feature 330
Storing SmartKey dependent Interior rear view mirror 37 Fuel reserve tank 338
settings 122 Storing exterior mirror parking Hood 338
Menus 137 position 123 Lamps 341
AUDIO 139 MON 281 Parking brake 330
Distronic* 141, 221 MON (Motor Octane Number) 419 SBC brake system 329, 330
In control system 137, 138 Mph or km/h in speedometer 146 SmartKey 339
Malfunction memory 142 Multicontour seat* 116 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 338
Settings menu 143 Multifunction display 134, 420 Tele Aid 348, 349
Standard display 139 Selecting language 147 Telephone* 354
Submenus 136 Standard display 138 Tires 345
TEL* 159 Multifunction display messages Trunk 354
Trip computer 158 ABS 322 Washer fluid 354
Miles/kilometers in speedometer Batteries 323, 327, 328 Multifunction steering wheel 24, 135,
Setting 146 Brake fluid 331 420
Mirrors Brake pads 329 Buttons 135
Adjusting 37 Check engine 315
Automatic antiglare for rear view
mirror 172
436
Index
N One-touch gearshifting 163 Opening and closing

Navigation system Canceling gear range limit 163 Panorama sliding/pop-up roof with
See separate COMAND operating Downshifting 163 SmartKey 212
instructions 141 Upshifting 163 Opening from the inside
Night security illumination 126 Opening 364 Trunk 105
Ashtray 249 Opening the trunk from the outside 103
O
Doors from the inside 103 Operating
Occupant Classification System 70
Fuel filler flap 280 CD player 140
Self-test 74
Fuel filler flap manually 363 Radio 139
Occupant safety 56
Glove box 245 Safety 16
Airbags 57
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof 210 Telephone* 159
Children and airbags 58
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof* in an Vehicle outside the USA and
Children in the vehicle 66
emergency 364 Canada 13
Fastening the seat belt 40
Roller sunblinds 209 Operating safety 16
Infant and child restraint systems 67
Side windows 202 Operation
LATCH child seat anchors 77
Sliding/pop-up roof* 205 Garage door opener 265
Seat belts 40, 60
Sliding/pop-up roof* in an Integrated remote control 265
Oil
emergency 364 Operator’s Manual 10
Adding 286
Sliding/pop-up roof* with Ornamental moldings 306
Checking level 285
SmartKey 206 Outside temperature indicator 133
Consumption 284
Trunk 103 Overdue service 299
Filler neck 286
Trunk from the inside 104 Overhead control panel 27
Viscosity 418
Trunk lid with SmartKey 96 Garage door opener 261
Oil level
Windows 201 Overspeed range 420
Checking 285
Windows with SmartKey 203
437
Index
P Parktronic* Positions (Memory function)

Paintwork 305 Malfunctioning 236 Recalling from memory 122
Panic alarm 79 Sensor 307 Positions (Memory function*)
Panic button on SmartKey 79 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp 319 Storing into memory 122
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof Passenger compartment Power assistance 270
Opening and closing with Fuse box 389 Power seat
SmartKey 212 Interior lighting 128 Adjusting backrest tilt 35
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof* 209 Interior rear view mirror 37 Adjusting head restraint height 36
Parcel net in front passenger Passenger safety see Occupant Adjusting head restraint tilt 36
footwell 245 safety 56 Adjusting seat cushion tilt 35
Parking 51 Pedals 269 Adjusting seat height 35
Parking brake 45, 51 Phone book* Memory function 121
Engaging 51 Loading 160 Removing/installing head
Message in display 330 Quick search 161 restraints 114
Releasing 45 Phone number* Seat fore and aft adjustment 35
Parking lamps 365 Dialing 160 Power train 420
Replacing the bulbs 368 Redialing 161 Power washer 305
Switching on 124 Plastic and rubber parts Power windows 201
Parking position Cleaning 310 Blocking of rear window operation 78
Exterior rear view mirrors 123, 157, Pliers, universal (vehicle tool kit) 358 Side windows 201
173 Poly-V-belt drive 420 Synchronizing 204
438
Index
Practical hints R Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 172

First aid kit 356 Radio Rear view mirrors see Mirrors 172
Jump starting 382 Selecting stations 139 Rear window
Lamp in center console 319 Selecting stations (satellite*) 140 Blocking operation 78
Lamps in instrument cluster 312 Radio transmitters, control and Rear window defroster 177
Messages in the display 321 operation 277 Activating 177
Spare wheel 356 Range (distance to empty) Deactivating 177
Vehicle tool kit 358 Calling up 159 Rear window sunshade* 176
Problems Rear bench seat Reconnecting
While driving 49 Foldable 240 Vehicle battery 381
With vehicle 17 Rear fog lamp Refueling 280
Product information 9 Bulb 365 Regular checks 281
Program mode selector switch 420 Switching on 127 Reinstalling the battery 381
Automatic transmission 168 Rear lamp bulbs 366 Remote controls
PULSE function (Massage function) 118 Rear lamps see Tail lamps Integrated 262
Rear passenger compartment SmartKey 94, 98
Q
Adjustable air vents 199 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 97
Quick search
Rear seat head restraints Remote door unlock
Phone book* 161
Installing 116 With Tele Aid* 260
Removing 116 Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 420
439
Index
Removing Resetting S
Ski sack 240 All functions (control system) 143 Safety
Vehicle battery 381 All functions of a submenu 144 Occupant 56
Wheel 374 Fuel consumption 158 Safety belts see Seat belts 40
Wiper blades 371 Service indicator (FSS) 300, 302, Safety defects
Removing and installing 303 Reporting 18
Front seat head restraints 114 Trip odometer 132 Safety systems
Replacing Residual heat utilization 186, 198 Driving 80
Bulbs 365 Residual ventilation 186, 198 Saving current speed 216
Front lamp bulbs 367 REST (Residual engine heat SBC 85
Front turn signal lamp bulb 368 utilization) 198 SBC brake system 421
Fuses 389 Restraint system see Infant and child Activation 86
License plate lamp bulbs 369 restraint systems 67 Deactivation 87
Parking and standing lamp bulb 368 Rims and Tires 398 Driving hints 87
Rear lamp bulbs 366, 369 Roadside Assistance Messages in display 329, 330
Side marker lamp bulb 369 Tele Aid* 253 Self-check 87
Wiper blades 370 Roadside assistance 12 Warning lamp 85
Reporting Rolling code programming 264 Seat belt force limiter 66
Safety defects 18 RON 281 Seat belts 63
Reprogramming RON (Research Octane Number) 420 Cleaning 309
integrated remote control 265 Roof rack* 237 Fastening 40
Reset button in the instrument Rotating wheels 295 Proper use of 42, 64
cluster 143 Rubber parts Safety guidelines 60
Cleaning 310 Warning lamp 317
440
Index
Seat cushion depth Selector lever Service System see FSS 299
Adjusting 117 Lock 43 Setting
Seat heater* Message in the display 326 Convenience functions 145, 155
Switching off 119 Position (automatic Cruise control 216
Switching on 119 transmission) 162 Daytime running lamp mode 151
Seat ventilation* Self-test Distronic* time interval 225
Switching off 119 Occupant Classification System 74 Exterior rear view mirror parking
Switching on 119 Tele Aid* 254 position 123
Seats 113 Service Higher speed in cruise control 217
Adjusting 34 Batteries 379 Higher speed in Distronic* 223
Easy entry/exit feature* 113 Calling up the service indicator 300 Hours (clock) 149
Heater* 118 Major service (Service H) 299 Individual vehicle settings 143
Multicontour seat* 116 Minor service (Service A) 299 Instrument lighting 131, 132
Split rear bench seat* 240 Overdue 300 Interior lighting delayed
Ventilation 119 Types 299 switch-off 154
Securing cargo When due 299 Lamps and lighting
Cargo tie-down rings 244 Service and warranty information 10 (control system) 151
Selecting display 147, 148 Service indicator 299 Language, multifunction display 147
Calling up 300 Locator lighting 152
Clearing 300 Lower speed in cruise control 217
Service life (tires) 292 Lower speed in Distronic* 224
441
Index
Miles/kilometers in Settings Side marker lamps 365, 369

speedometer 146 Calling up Distronic* 141, 221 Side windows
Minutes (clock) 149, 150 Convenience functions 155 Automatic opening 202
Parking position for exterior rear view Factory, KEYLESS-GO* 100 Cleaning 308
mirrors 157 Factory, SmartKey 95 Closing 201, 202, 203
Slower speed in cruise control 217 Individual 156 Closing with KEYLESS-GO* 204, 207
Slower speed in Distronic* 224 Lighting (control system) 151 Closing with SmartKey 203
SmartKey dependent memory 156 Menus and submenus 136 Opening 201, 203
Speed in cruise control 217 Resetting all (control system) 143 Opening fully (Express-open) 202
Speed in Distronic* 223 Resetting in the submenu 144 Opening with SmartKey 203
Speedometer display mode 146 Selective 95, 100 Stopping 202
Suspension tuning 230 Settings menu Synchronizing power windows 204
Synchronizing the time 149 Functions in 143 Simultaneous wiping and washing
Temperature (interior) 182, 192 Individual vehicle settings 143 Windshield wipers 48
Temperature indicator 146 Submenus 144 Single wipe 48
Tire inflation pressure 148 Shift lock 421 Ski sack* 237
Units Shifting Removing 240
Speedometer 146 Gear selector lever positions 165 Unfolding and loading 237
Temperature 146 Into optimal gear range Unloading and folding 239
Tire inflation pressure 148 (automatic transmission) 163 SL 55 AMG Kompressor
Vehicle level control 231 Side impact airbags 62 MANUAL shift program mode 169
442
Index
Sliding/pop-up roof* 205 Opening and closing windows Spare fuses 389
Closing 205 with 203 Spare parts service 392
Closing with KEYLESS-GO* 204, 207 Opening the panorama sliding/pop-up Spare wheel 356
Closing with SmartKey 206 roof* with SmartKey 212 Speed
Opening 205 positions in starter switch 31 Saving current 216
Opening with SmartKey 206 Remote controls 94, 98 Speed settings
Stopping 206 Restoring to factory setting 96, 100 Cruise control 217
Synchronizing 208 Selective setting 95, 100 Distronic* 223, 224
Sliding/pop-up roof* or panorama slid- Starting the engine 43 Speedometer
ing/pop-up roof* Unlocking with 30 Displays 220
Emergency operations 364 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 97 Settings units 146
SmartKey 94 Global locking and unlocking 100 Speedometer display mode
Battery check lamp 95, 100 Locking the vehicle 102 Selecting 146
Checking the batteries 97, 102 Loss of 102 Split rear bench seat* 240
Factory setting 95 Messages in display 338 Sporty driving style 230
Global locking 95 Remote controls 97 SRS 421
Global locking and unlocking 95 Turning off the engine 53 SRS indicator lamp 23, 318
Global unlocking 95 Unlocking with 32 Standing lamps 124
Locking and unlocking 94 SmartKey-dependency memory Replacing bulbs 368
Loss of 97 Settings 156 Standing water 276
Opening and closing the slid- Snow chains 298 Starter switch 31
ing/pop-up roof* with 206 Solar panel* 214 Positions 31
443
Index
Starting difficulties 44 Submenus Headlamps 52

Starting position 31 Convenience 155 Seat heating* 119
Starting the engine 43 For settings 136 Switching on
Steering column In control system 138 Automatic central locking
Height adjustment 37 Instrument cluster 146, 148 (control system) 154
Length adjustment 37 Lighting 151 ESP 85
Steering wheel Resetting functions in Control Front fog lamps 126, 127
Adjusting 36 system 144 Hazard warning flasher 128
Cleaning 310 Selecting 144 Headlamps 46
Electrical adjustment 37 Settings menu 144 High beams 127
Stolen vehicle Vehicle 154 Parking lamps 124
Tracking services 261 Sun visors 174 Rear fog lamp 127
Stopping Supplemental Restraint System Seat heating* 119
Panorama sliding/pop-up roof 211 (SRS) 421 Windshield wipers 47
Sliding/pop-up roof* 206 Suspension tuning Symbol (Distronic*)
Windows 202 For comfortable driving style 230 Distance warning function* 141
Storage compartment under For sporty driving style 230 Synchronizing
armrest 247 Switching off ESP 325
Storage compartments 245 Automatic central locking Panorama sliding/pop-up roof* 213
Glove box 245 (control system) 154 Power windows 204
Storing (Memory function*) Engine 52 Sliding/pop-up roof* 208
Positions into memory 122 ESP 84 Time 149
Hazard warning flasher 128
444
Index
T Telematics* 421 Tightening torque 378, 421

Tachometer 133 Telephone* 24, 252 Time
Displaying gear range 164 Answering a call 160 Setting hours 149
Overspeed range 133 Dialing a number from the phone Setting minutes 149, 150
Tail lamps 366, 369 book 160 Tire inflation pressure
Tar stains 305 Ending a call 160 Setting units 148
Tele Aid Loading phone book* 160 Tire speed rating 421
Messages in display 348, 349 Messages in the display 354 Tire traction 274
Tele Aid System 421 Operating 159 Tires 414
Tele Aid* 253 Redialing 161 Driving instructions 272
Emergency calls 255 Temperature Messages in display 345
Information 258 Display mode 146 Messages in the display 343, 344
Initiating an emergency call Sensor 27 Retreads 291
manually 256 Setting interior temperature 182, Service life 292
Remote door unlock 260 192 Temperature 293
Roadside Assistance 257 Setting units in display 146 Tread depth 297
SOS button 256 Tires 293 Wear pattern 295
Stolen vehicle tracking services 261 The coolant level is correct if the Winter 297
System self-check 254 level 288 Tires and wheels
Tele Aid System 253 Tie-down rings (trunk) 244 Tire inflation pressure 292
Upgrade signals 259
445
Index
Tools 358 Message in display 354 U

Tow-away alarm 90 Opening 103 Units
Arming 90 Opening from inside vehicle 104 Setting speedometer units 146
Disarming 90 Opening from the inside 105 Setting temperature units 146
Disarming for transport 90 Tie-down rings 244 Setting tire inflation pressure
Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit) Trunk lid 105 units 148
Installing 388 Trunk lid emergency release 110 Unlocking 30, 94, 359
Towing the vehicle 385 Unlocking and opening with Centrally from inside 111
Tracking services KEYLESS-GO* 101 Driver’s door in an emergency 359
For stolen vehicle 261 Unlocking and opening with Fuel filler flap 280
Traction 168, 421 SmartKey 96 Global 95
Transmission fluid level 287 Unlocking in an emergency 360 Global with KEYLESS-GO* 100
Tread depth (tires 297 Trunk lid Selective settings 95, 100
Trip computer 158 Closing 105 Trunk in an emergency 360
Trip odometer Turn signals 47 Trunk lid with KEYLESS-GO* 101
Resetting 132 Additional in mirrors 365 Trunk lid with SmartKey 96
Trunk Front bulbs 365 Vehicle in an emergency 260
Closing the lid 105 Turning off With KEYLESS-GO* 32
Lamp 130 Engine 52 With the SmartKey 30
Lock button, KEYLESS-GO* 102
446
Index
Upgrade signals Vehicle care Vehicle level

Tele Aid* 259 Cup holder 309 Changing 232
Uphill driving Distronic* system sensor cover 307 Setting 232
Cruise control 216 Engine cleaning 306 Automatic 232
Upshifting 163 Gear selector lever 309 Manual 232
Useful features 245 Hard plastic trim items 309 Vehicle level control system*
Ashtrays 249 Leather upholstery 310 Airmatic DC* 230
Cigarette lighter 250 Light alloy wheels 309 Vehicle tool kit 358
Garage door opener 261 Ornamental moldings 306 Alignment bolt 358
Heated steering wheel* 251 Paintwork 305 Fuse extractor 358
Tele Aid* 253 Parktronic* system sensor 307 Hex-socket wrench 358
Telephone* 252 Plastic and rubber parts 310 Open-end wrench 358
Power washer 305 Screwdriver 358
V
Seat belts 309 Spare fuses 358
Vehicle
Steering wheel 309 Towing eye bolt 358
Individual settings 143, 145
Tar stains 305 Universal pliers 358
Locking in an emergency 360
Vehicle washing 306 Wheel wrench 358
Lowering 378
Window cleaning 308 Vehicle washing 306
Towing 385
Wood trims 310 VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 421
Unlocking in an emergency 359
Voice control system* 421
447
Index
W Windshield Winter driving instructions 275

Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and Defogging 183, 193 Winter tires 297
warning Refilling washer fluid 289 Wiper blades 307
Warning sounds Replacing wiper blades 371 Installing 371
Distance warning function* 226 Washer fluid 289 Removing 371
Distronic* 220 Windshield washer fluid Replacing 371
Drivers seat belts 63 Message in display 354 Wiping
Parking brake 46 Refilling 289 And washing simultaneously 48
Warranty coverage 393 Wiping with 48 Interval 48
Washing the vehicle 304 Windshield wipers 47, 173 With windshield washer fluid 48
Wear pattern (tires) 295 Fast wiper speed 48 Wood trims
Weights 405 Intermittent wiping 48 Cleaning 310
Wheel change 372 Replacing wiper blades 370, 371
X
Tightening torque 378 Single wipe 48
Xenon headlamps*
Wheels Switching on 47
Bi-Xenon* 417
Rotating 295 Wiping with windshield washer
Tires and wheels 291 fluid 48
Window curtain airbags 62 Winter driving
Windows see Side windows 201 Block heater* 298
Snow chains 298
Tires 297
Transmission program mode 168
Winter tires 297
448
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider
this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
Warning G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual. Re-
printing, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2282-31
Press time 12/02/03
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany
Order No. 6515 1109 13 Part No. 211 584 47 83 USA Edition B 2004

E-Class Sedan Operator's Manual

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

E-Class Sedan Operator's Manual

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

E-Class Sedan Operator’s Manual

Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 19 Getting started ................................... 29

Memory function ............................... 121

Driving systems ................................. 215 At the gas station .............................. 280

Maintenance...................................... 299 Replacing bulbs.................................. 365

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. .......... 406

Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership

Reporting safety defects

Item Page Item Page Item Page

앫 Turn signals 47 wheel 135 k Glove box 245

앫 Windshield wipers 47 c Horn l Center console 25

앫 High beam 47 d Lever for voice control sys-

Item Page Item Page Item Page

Lower part Item Page Item Page

Starter switch positions !

Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* i

The SBC brake system is activated.

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be Ignition (or position 2)

Warning! G Your seat must be adjusted so that you can

Head restraint height Head restraint tilt Steering wheel

Steering wheel adjustment Adjusting steering column in or out Mirrors

1 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir-

Warning! G Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-

Starting the engine Automatic transmission Starting with the SmartKey

If the engine does not start after several Driving

Warning! G More information on driving can be found 1 Off

Turn signals and high beam i Windshield wipers

Switching on windshield wipers ! Single wipe

! 앫 Remove blockage. Problems while driving

Switching off headlamps

Turning off with the SmartKey

More information can be found in the

1 Lock button on the door handle

Warning! G 앫 Adjust the driver seat as far as possible

Front air bags

Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G

Infant and child restraint systems i

Warning! G Children can be killed or seriously injured by

앫 If you have to place a child in a

Occupant Classification System Furthermore, the occupant weight may ap-

Warning! G Children can be killed or seriously injured by

앫 If you have to place a child in a i 앫 that the seat was occupied by a

More information can be found in the

Once the top tether anchorage hook is at-

Child seat anchors - LATCH type !

1 Indicates the position of the anchors

Blocking of rear door window operation

More information can be found in the

More information can be found in the

To improve the vehicle's traction, turn off !

The SBC brake system

Turn on the ESP immediately if the

컄컄 The SBC brake system is automatically ac- i

The SBC brake servo assistance switches

Four wheel electronic traction system ! !

i 왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the i

1 Tow-away alarm off button

Factory setting Selective setting

Restoring to factory setting 앫 Use the mechanical key to lock the i

Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO

For more information on using the 앫 Metallic objects such as coins or

! Unlocking and opening the trunk lid !

Opening the doors from the inside i Opening the trunk